Home

Lexmark C760 User's Manual

Contents

1. Helvetica Black Helvetica Black Oblique Line Printer 16 POSTNET Barcode C39 Narrow C39 Regular C39 Wide OCR A OCR B Wingdings Symbol lt lt lt lt lt lt x lt lt lt lt lt lt x lt X XxX lt lt lt lt lt lt x lt lt x lt lt
2. 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 10 10 00 00 00 95 0 0 0 00 00 00 10 10 00 00 00 0 0 0 0 00 00 95 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 10 10 00 S S I S IS l l IS S ESPN gt gt gt gt Vw S S ENE NEN EN ESPN SNE SES TESTES S ESN YEN TN 2 E s 3 25 9 5 P 2 8 4 5 2 5 _ e s s S S 928 9o0 o E E 5 S a5 5 51898 o 2 223 o o z 2z z sz 5 220 0 8 21501 0 0 0 0 E EIE E wl 2 2 2 2 dio 01010 SS unio sjala I 85 gt gt gt sls s 2 9 2 2 8 0 10 10 0124 4 4 4 581 5815151 21212 4 OjO Oo lt 1 lt gt 4 Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set
3. Intervention Required 3 68 40021 Close Cover x Printer Cover Open Intervention Required 3 67 40021 Close Cover A x Close Toner Box Cover Intervention Required 3 68 40021 Close Deflector G x Close Deflector G Intervention Required 3 67 40021 31 Defective Print Cartridge y Defective Print Cartridge Intervention Required 3 67 40021 31 Defective Cartridge XXXX x Defective Ink Cartridge Intervention Required 3 68 40021 31 Missing Cartridge XXXX x Missing Cartridge Intervention Required 3 68 40021 31 Missing Printhead x Missing Printhead Intervention Required 3 67 40021 32 Unsupported Print 4 Unsupported Print Cartridge Cartridge Intervention Required 3 67 40021 32 Unsupported XXXX x Unsupported XXXX Cartridge Cartridge Intervention Required 3 67 40021 32 Unsupported Cartridge x Unsupported Cartridge Intervention Required 3 68 40021 32 Unsupported Printhead x Unsupported Printhead Intervention Required 3 68 40021 40 Tray x Size Sense Error x Tray Size Sense Error Intervention Required 3 68 40021 41 Open Bin 1 Exit Tray x Open Bin Exit Tray Intervention Required 3 67 40021 Change Cartridge Invalid 4 Change Cartridge Refill Invalid Refill Intervention Required 3 68 40021 Open Cover x Open Cover Intervention Required 3 68 40021 Open Rear Door x Open Rear Doo
4. such as IBM 6450242 10 in Lexmark 1038693 50 ft Y DCD ER Shield gt 1 ______ Shield RXD 2 2 TXD 2 2 TXD TXD 3 3 RXD 3 B 3 RXD DTR 4 4 RTS 4 4 RTS GND 5 5 CTS 5 5 CIS DSR 6 6 DSR 6 6 DSR RTS 7 7 GND 7 7 GND CTS 8 8 DCD 8r s RI 91 2 DTR 20 20 DTR 9 F 25 25 25 Interfaces Serial Communication Parameters RS 232C The following paragraphs show acceptable values for serial communication parameters Voltage Level Range The maximum voltage level for control lines or data lines is 25 positive V dc and 25 negative V dc A timing or control line is active if the voltage is more than 3 V or inactive if the voltage is less than 3 V The voltage reference point is the signal ground on pin 7 A data signal greater than 3 V means that the bit is a logical 0 A signal less than 3 V means that the bit is logical 1 For additional information refer to Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Communications Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange published by the Electronic Industries Association publications EIA RS 232C and EIA TIA 232 E Serial Data Frame Considerations RS 232C The computer sends serial data in data frames also Known as packets You can create 10 bit 11 bit and 12 bit data frames and set the serial data
5. CG Times Italic Times Bold 14141414141414141414141 141 141414141414141411414141 41414 CG Times Bold Italic Viviviviviviviviviviviviviviv viv iv iv iv viv Iv Univers Medium Italic V Univers Medium VvVvivivivviviviviviviviviviviv viv iv viv viv VIV IV V Univers Bold V IV IV viviviviviviviviviviviv viviv viv iv iv iv viv iv V Univers Bold Italic Times New Roman VivViviviviviviviviviviviviv iv viviv viv iv iv iv viv Iv V Times New Roman Times New Roman Bold Italic VivVivviviviviviviviviviviviv viv iv iv iv viv iv V Arial Ital
6. CG Omega CG Omega Italic CG Omega Bold CG Omega Bold Italic SIEGES SEN SIS SISISIS Xx KLENT SIS SISISIS 5 5 4 NEN ENS 1541515 XX X X Antique Olive lt lt lt m 5 lt lt lt lt 5 lt 5 Table 2 6 PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Continued Latin 2 Latin 5 Latin 6 Cyrillic Greek Antique Olive Italic Antique Olive Bold Albertus Medium Albertus Extra Bold Clarendon Condensed Bold S SISISIS 5 S S SISIS S S SISIS SINUS ENTS S SI SISIS 5 S S SISIS S SISISIS 5 5 555 S SI ISISIS Marigold Coronet Helvetica Helvetica Italic Helvetica Bold Helvetica Bold Italic Helvetica Narrow Helvetica Narrow Italic
7. Supported Printer X Not Supported Page numbers reference command descriptions Model LE LE Command Function ESCE Printer Reset 2 34 ESCY Display Functions On 2 55 FSC7 Display Functions Off 2 56 ESCZ Print Test Page 2 56 x ESC a C Horizontal Cursor Position in Columns 2 40 4 ESC a G Duplex Page Side Selection 2 39 FSC amp a H Horizontal Cursor Position in Decipoints 2 40 7 ESC amp ast Set Left Margin 2 37 ESC8 a M Set Right Margin 2 37 ESCQa P Print Direction 2 37 ESCga R Vertical Cursor Position in Rows 2 41 4 FSC amp ag V Vertical Cursor Position in Decipoints 2 41 7 ESC a b M Monochrome Print Mode 2 52 5 Character Text Path Direction 2 37 ESCad Underline Disable 2 43 ESC amp Number of Collated Copies 2 34 ESC a d D Underline Enable 2 43 A 2 PCL Support Table A 1 PCL Emulation Commands Continued Supported Printer X Not Supported Page numbers reference command descriptions 2 LE 2 5 S ommand Function E ESC 3 f F Set Universal Height 2 36 ESCA Set Universal Width 2 36 ESC amp Set Universal Feed Direction 2 37 ESC a ftw Set Universal Custom Name 2 37 ESC amp 5 Push Pop Cursor Position 2 41 ESC a XC Macro Control 2 45 ESC a Y
8. Setting SmartSwitch for Different Interfaces You can customize your printer so that particular print jobs are sent to particular interfaces For example you may want to send all PostScript emulation jobs to the network interface and all PCL emulation jobs to the parallel interface You can do so by choosing different languages for each interface from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional and setting the selected language to On for the interface you want See your printer documentation for more information If you have turned off a particular language for an interface but then decide to send a job to that interface using that language you must begin the job with a PJL command to override the settings you made from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional For example if you set PCL emulation to Off for the serial interface and later decide to send a job in that language through that interface you must preface the job with a PJL command to override the Off setting Be sure to end the job with a Universal Exit Language UEL command which is described on page 3 2 Printer Job Language For details on Printer Job Language PJL and the PJL ENTER LANGUAGE command see ENTER LANGUAGE Command on page 3 3 Languages Sniffing is Enabled when any End of Job point occurs Disabled when a SIC or PUL command within a valid printer language is received The printer e
9. 4 Supported Printer X Not Supported Page numbers reference parameter descriptions E Default values are listed 3 E CurPatternCache 4 66 CurScreenStorage 4 66 CurSourceList 4 66 CurUPathCache 4 66 DisableFastProcs 4 66 DoPrintErrors 4 67 DoStartPage 4 67 EnableExtraFonts 4 67 EngineBoot 4 67 EngineCode 4 67 EngineSpeed 4 67 EnvironmentSave 4 67 FactoryDefaults 4 67 FatalErrorAddress 4 67 FontResourceDir 4 67 FontVersion 4 67 GenericResourceDir 4 67 GenericResourcePathSep 4 67 InstalledRam 4 68 JobTimeout 4 68 languagelevel 4 68 MaxDisplayList 4 68 MaxFontCache 4 68 MaxFormCache 4 68 MaxImageBuffer 4 68 MaxOutlineCache 4 68 MaxPatternCache 4 68 MaxPermanentVM 4 68 MaxRasterMemory 4 68 C 10 Table C 4 System Interpreter Parameters Continued 4 Supported Printer X Not Supported Page numbers reference parameter descriptions E Default values are listed 3 E MaxScreenStorage 4 68 MaxSourceList 4 69 MaxUPathCache 4 69 PageCount 4 69 PanelCode 4 69 PrinterCode 4 69 PrinterName 4 69 RamSize 4 69 RealFormat 4 69 Revision 4 69 SearchBuiltinFontsFirst 4 69 SerialNumber 4 69 StartJobPassword 4 69 StartupMode 4 69 StaticRamSize 4 69 SystemParamsPassword 4 70 UseOldcopypage 4 70 UseOldfonts 4 70 ValidNV
10. E Variable Name LCUSTOMTYPE4OUTBIN 3 27 x LCUSTOMTYPE4TEXTURE 3 27 LCUSTOMTYPE4WEIGHT 3 27 V LCUSTOMTYPEBSLENGTH 3 28 x LCUSTOMTYPESLOADING 3 28 x LCUSTOMTYPE5MEDIA 3 28 LCUSTOMTYPESNAME 3 28 LCUSTOMTYPESOUTBIN 3 28 x LCUSTOMTYPEBTEXTURE 3 28 LCUSTOMTYPESWEIGHT 3 29 LCUSTOMTYPE6LENGTH 3 29 x LCUSTOMTYPE6LOADING 3 29 x LCUSTOMTYPE6MEDIA 3 29 LCUSTOMTYPE6NAME 3 29 LCUSTOMTYPEGOUTBIN 3 29 x LCUSTOMTYPE6TEXTURE 3 30 v LCUSTOMTYPE6WEIGHT 3 30 LDOWNLOADTARGET 3 30 LDRYTIMEDELAY 3 30 x LDUPLICATEHELDJOBS 3 30 LENVELOPEENHANCE 3 30 x LENVELOPELENGTH 3 30 x LENVELOPEOUTBIN 3 30 x LENVELOPETEXTURE 3 31 LENVELOPEWEIGHT 3 31 LESCCHAR 3 31 LFAXRESOLUTION 3 31 x LFAXREDIAL 3 31 x B 7 PJL Support Table B 2 Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued 4 Supported Printer Model X Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions and are listed for supported variables only Default values are listed for exceptions only E Variable LFAXREDIALFREQUENCY 3 31 x LFAXTRANSMISSIONLOG 3 31 x LFEEDERPAPERTYPE 3 31 x LGLOSSYLOADING 3 31 x LGLOSSYOUTPUTBIN 3 32 x LGLOSSYTEXTURE 3 32 x LGLOSSYWEIGHT 3
11. 3 61 Auto Continuable Conditions esses 3 63 Attendance Conditions eese nnne 3 67 Operator Intervention Paper 3 72 Operator Intervention Paper 3 75 siae iig M s 3 80 Device Attendance Commands esses nnn 3 80 Unique PIL COMMANGS RR 3 82 File Commands for Flash or 3 86 File and Device Protection 3 93 Protecting a File or 3 93 Unlocking a Protected File or Device 3 95 Re Locking a Protected File or 3 96 Unlocking a Protected File or Device for the Current Job 3 97 Recovering Lost 3 98 PbosiScript 5555595 4 1 Selecting 4 1 Using 4 1 Using the Operator Panel or MarkVision 4 1 Using Your Software Program 4 2 Paper Tray SUD DOM E 4 4 Envelope Size LOIN BENNETT 4 9 Envelope Tray Support
12. PostScript Table 4 8 Page Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition NupDetails dictionary Describes the specific actions performed when the Nup function is active Rows is an integer that specifies the number of rows to print on a portrait oriented page Columns is an integer that specifies the number of columns to print on a portrait oriented page Rows and Columns are limited to these values Rows Columns WP Orientation specifies the orientation of the individual pages on the printed page Supported values are 0 Portrait 1 Landscape Orientation determines the positioning of multiple page images on pages printed using NupDetails You may choose one of four different orders The positioning of page images depends on whether they are sent to the printer as portrait or landscape images The following examples show the result of using each setting on a 2 row 2 column page Horizontal Vertical Portrait Landscape Portrait Landscape Page Page o o Page Page o 1 2 82 11 85 12 2 n n im a Page Page o Page o o 3 4 S go 2 4 9 Pa n n n n Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical Portrait Landscape Portrait Landscape Page Page Page T TT 213 pups Page o Page Page o 4 3 SN 4 2 1
13. 4 77 V Interpreter 4 77 4 77 4 77 V PCLSmartSwitch 4 77 4 ocation 4 77 PSSmartSwitch 4 77 4 Type 4 77 Device Parameters for the Communication Device IR A96 HIR_B IR_C 0 DelayedOutputClose 4 77 4 Enabled 4 78 V Filtering 4 78 HasNames 4 78 Interpreter 4 78 4 78 PCLSmartSwitch 4 78 4 78 PSSmartSwitch 4 78 4 78 V Device Parameters for the Communication Device USB 05 USB_B 05 USB_D DelayedOutputClose 4 78 4 Enabled 4 79 Filtering 4 79 HasNames 4 79 4 Interpreter 4 79 4 79 4 PCLSmartSwitch 4 79 V PortLocation 4 79 4 Table C 6 Device Parameters Continued C 17 5917417777 4 Supported Printer X Not Supported E nsn Page numbers reference parameter descriptions E i LE PSSmartSwitch 4 79 V Type 4 79 Device Parameters for the Communication Device TokenTalk TokenTalkA TokenTalkB TokenTalkC TokenTalkD Address 4 79 Bridging 4 79 V DelayedOutputClose 4 80 Enabled 4 80 V Filtering 4 80 HasNames 4 80 Interpreter 4 80 NodelD 4 80 V On 4 80 PCLSmartSwitch 4 80 V PortLocation 4 80 PSSmartSwitch 4 8
14. N N N N N N N N N N N N N gt N N N N 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 214141414141414141414141414141414141411414141141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141414141414 X 41414141 41 41414141 LIX JIV A S SISS SISS SS S S S S LIS SI XX X X X XXXIX xxx XX X XX xxx xxxxxixxx X X X X X X X X XXXIX xixxx XX XX X X X X X X X XXIX xix xx 414141414141414141414141414141441 41441 X X v v XXX XX X X X XX X X X X XXIX X xix xx XX X XX xxx xxxxxxxx XX X X X X X X XXXIX xxx xxxix Times Roman Times Italic Times Bold Times Bold Italic Helvetica Light Helvetica Light Oblique Helvetica Black Helvetica Black Oblique Line Printer 16 POSTNET Barcode C39 Narrow C39 Regular C39 Wide Wingdings SymbolPS
15. The three integers are searchorder The position in the search order This value is the same as the SearchOrder device parameter from the specified lODevice free The number of free bytes on the device This value is the same as the Free device parameter from the specified lODevice size The total number of bytes on the device This value is the same as the LogicalSize device parameter from the specified lODevice Error typecheck diskonline diskonline boolean returns the value of the Writeable device parameter which is a boolean for the 9edisk196 IODevice This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence 5416 15 currentdevparams Writeable get Error stackoverflow PostScript diskstatus diskstatus free logicalsize returns on the stack the following two integers Number of pages that are free on the optional disk The value of the Free device parameter from the disk1 Total number of pages 1024 bytes that are on the optional disk The value of the LogicalSize device parameter from the disk1 This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence disk1 currentdevparams dup Free get exch LogicalSize get Error stackoverflow displayoperatormsg string displayoperatormsg sets a custom paper message The string parameter is used as a prompt string when a pa
16. lt lt lt x 9 gt o c c l c LI 2 o o o a E gt o c 2 E n g N m E Cyrillic 9 3991 eYeujeyy 49215 8 2d x9945 une 8 Od 929015 168 2 929015 698 Od x9945 une7 2 6988 OSI 48015 86 8 15090 155 9 SG8 Od 998 9d c 6598 OSI 86 9 une 8 Od oneg 9 Ue 01 6588 OSI 9 86 8 uspuni USPUNL Od une ES8 Od s une 758 9d 6 6588 OSI une 86 swopuiM 8 Od BIAOZEW 8 Od 2 une 298 2 2 une 2 6988 OSI 2 une 86 swopuiM Typeface Symbol 91051 SINIM 24834 cINIM PJL Value Symbol Set ID SymbolPS ITC Zapf Dingbats 4 Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set X Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set Table 2 7 PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Specials Specials syeqbuig jdez syeqbulg jdez 2 Sd syeqbuig jdez JLI eunjua joquiAs uewny snid Jeg
17. 551 54 1 S S SISISISISI S S S SISISI SISI S ee SS SS 6 SD SIS SIS SETS S IS SISISISISIS S N S S NIN ADS S S SISISISISIS S S SISISISISI S Helvetica Narrow Bold lt lt lt lt 5 5 lt 5 lt lt Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic lt lt lt m 5 lt lt lt 5 lt 5 Palatino Italic Palatino Bold Palatino Bold Italic 5 lt lt S S SIS SIS SIS SS SIN ISIS 5 lt ISIS 15 1 1 lt lt 1 lt 511 S S SIS x x x Table 2 6 PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Continued Latin 2 Latin 5 Latin 6 Cyrillic Greek Cyrillic 8 49915
18. X X XIX XIX X XX X Viviv Xviviviv X viviv v VIX X X X X X X X VivViv Xviviviv X viviv v vVIX X X X X X X X X X X X X X ITC Bookman Light ITC Bookman Light ITC Bookman Demi ITC Bookman Demi ITC Avant Garde ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique ITC Avant Garde ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique Century Schoolbook Roman Century Schoolbook Century Schoolbook Century Schoolbook Bold Italic ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic CourierPS Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set X Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set Table 2 6 PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Continued Latin 2 Latin 5 Latin 6 Cyrillic Greek CourierPS Oblique 5 CourierPS Bold lt lt lt lt 5 lt lt lt lt 5 m lt CourierPS Bold Oblique 5 lt lt lt lt lt 5 5 5 lt 5 Times Roman Times Italic Times Bold Times Bold Italic Helvetica Light Helvetica Light Oblique xixi SIS ISIS xix ISIS ISIS xIx SIS ISIS xixi SIS NGS xixi SIS ISIS xIx SIS ISIS 41 81845
19. 54 yN Typeface Symbol Set LNOdld SHLVIN HLVINSd HLVINNA PJL Value Symbol Set ID 0 9 50 0 0 0 0 0 0 Se SQ 9 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 gt 0 0 50 0 0 SQ 00 DQ gt S S IS l S S S S IS YEN YEN SS SFES gt l S lS l S S gt TN SIS I gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt S EN YEN YEN SIS 551555555555 S lS TN S S I I S IS IS S S S gt gt o o 2 gt S gc E 9 5 515 S zm 1
20. 0 9 9 lt lt 5 o 9o 12121212 8185 5 8 8 8 8 518 2125 5151515 5 5 6 21515 515 5 8 8 4 54 9 6 222151455 S 5 2 22 z O G Of olo o 0 OJ GB GG Gi gt gt gt S SY Se lt lt Cc Cc OF OF gt gt gt gt Of O 2 2 zz lt lt lt 515 5 gt gt gt gt c t t T I 0100 Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set X Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set Table 2 7 PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Continued Specials Specials syeqbuig dez 19d syeqbuig gt 2 Sd sjyeqbuig jdez 911 banque joquiAs snid po9 Jeg ose 1 m07 snid po9 Jeg 1 ddnN po9 Jeg 9 20 LA fere LINLSOd eueyeey LL6 Od 308s0421A JUO Id 54 11 11 Typeface Symbol Set LNOdld SHLVIN HLVINSd HLVINNA PJL Value Symbol Set ID 0 9 50 0 0 0 0
21. 4 11 Supplemental Operator Summairy essen 4 13 Page Device Param9pBielB uci o pii pacte pta a D Ru ERE USE 4 48 Interpreter Parameters 2 440040450 nnne nnne tnn nnns 4 62 User Paramielefs recenter 4 62 System 4 65 Device Paramielel 4 71 Status and Error Messages eec renuit entente tme Deb eu tres n ducii Deu pu pau d uestes 4 92 Tagged Binary Not Active ucu 4 92 Tagged Binary Raduni 4 92 TOC 3 Contents Status 4 93 Switching Languages 5 1 ng c c 5 1 Setting SmartSwitch for Different Interfaces 5 2 Printer Job Lang age o c 5 2 5 3 Flash Memory and Disk 6 1 Resource Data Collection Download 6 2 Storing Resources on Flash Memory or 6 3 Viewing the Contents of Flash Memory and 6 3 Password Pro
22. PostScript Table 4 8 Page Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition InputAttributes dictionary Mode is a key within the InputAttributes dictionary and its value is a name that continued determines the mapping of the physical input sources to the input sources listed in InputAttributes The allowable values are Default Printer s default source assignment Optra Specifies the following ordering used in InputAttributes 0 Tray 1 1 Tray 2 2 Envelope Feeder 1 or Multipurpose feeder 3 Tray 3 4 Multipurpose feeder 5 Tray 4 6 Tray 5 7 Feeder 2 HPLJFamily1 Specifies the following ordering used by the Hewlett Packard Company s printers 0 Tray 1 1 Tray2 2 Envelope Feeder 1 or Multipurpose feeder 3 Multipurpose feeder see Note 4 Tray 3 5 Tray 4 6 Tray 5 7 Feeder 2 Note Values 3 and 4 for the Hewlett Packard Company s LaserJet printers are switched relative to the Optra values 3 and 4 Priority is an array of integers that describes the order in which the input sources are searched The first integer represents the highest priority source and so on If no array exists or none of the matching sources is in the array then the priority order is arbitrary Install procedure Installs device dependent parameters into the graphics state This procedure can modify any parameter in the graphics state Jog integer Specifies which Offset Pages setting is used The following values are
23. 0 0 Se SQ x 0 9 00 0 52 de 0 0 0 0 5 9 0 0 0 00 00 00 10 0 S TN 9 de 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 0 0 NTN TN 5 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 NS 5 0 0 0 de de X 5 0 0 0 0 De DE 00 0 de de X 5 5115 X 38 NS NTN 30 38 S S TNE NEN TEN TEN YN 09x NS 98 2 3 o 9 o oa 8 e 8 o gt 5 8 8 amp o ole 3 3 2 O m m S 52 5 0 210101901 9016 6 c tz tu 2 2 2 gt 51210010 6 6 66152 595 Par Sid 9 9 9 o looc E lzamcrisi
24. 2 3 Lexmark C760 and C762 pssst aiaa 2 4 FUERINT UU UU T 2 5 Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark C760 and 762 2 7 Forward and Backward Compatibility Modes for the Lexmark C760 and C7622 9 Selecting Symbol Sets for the Lexmark C760 and C762 2 14 C mmand Coca et neus 2 31 Preis Eee UT ES 2 31 55 2 31 POL Emulation CommandS 2 uaa ede puta saxea Eu cimo Eua a ada za PR da 2 34 PCL Emulation Commands by 2 34 CEP eMe Oe 2 56 Raster Image 2 60 Raster Compression Mode nennen 2 60 Macros 2 67 Printer Job Language 3 1 PJL Command Notation RTT M 3 1 Kernel Commands TOC 2 Contents Job Separation 3 4 Environment Commands and 3 7 Status Readback Commands essen 3 54 Status Message Format eren rtt sme rnb essi cmn xs dece cud 3 61 Information
25. 8 Od x9945 une 8 Od 929015 168 2 929015 698 Od xyoo15 une7 7 6588 OSI 399315 86 SMODUIA 8 1s09 uessny SG8 Od 998 4 c 6598 OSI 86 9 une 8 Od Omeg GLL Od 9 un 01 6588 OSI oneg 9 une1 86 8 uspun USPUNL Od ysn 6 une 98 2 s une 758 9d 6 6588 OSI G une 86 swopuiM 8 Od BIAOZEW 8 Od 2 une 298 2 2 une 2 6588 OSI 2 une 86 swopuiM Typeface Symbol PJL Value Symbol Set ID N N N N N x N N N N x N N N Viviv Xviviviv X viviv v X X X X X X X X XX X X VivVivX viviviviXiviviviviv iX X X X XIX XIX X X XX X X X X XIX XIX XX X VivVivXviviviv X viviv v X X X X X X X X XIX XIX X X XX X VivivXviviviv X viviv v X X X X X X X X X Viviv Xviviviv X viviv v X X X X X X X X X X XIX XIX X XX X VivivXviviviv X viviv v vIX X X X X X X X X XX X VivivXviviviv X viviv v vVIX X X X X X X X
26. LocalTalk_NV LocalTalk_Pending contain the same parameters DelayedOutputClose boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job Supported values are True An end of file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs finish printing False An end of file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the interpreter whether or not that job has finished printing This value is set independently for each port Enabled boolean Read only Supported values are True False Filtering name Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed Supported values are InterpreterBased None HasNames boolean Read only Always returns False Interpreter name Read only Supported values are PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS LocalTalkType string The type of the AppleTalk network entity name This parameter also sets the Type parameter to the same value The new value is returned by the appletalktype compatibility operator Legal value Any string of 32 or fewer non null characters Default value is LaserWriter Note Setting this variable does not affect the value for other physical internal print servers The statusdict string appletalktype is correct for the current job port NodelD integer Read only On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data Suppo
27. PostScript devforall proc scratchstring devforall executes the specified proc procedure for each storage device after pushing a substring on the stack that is the portion of the scratch string containing the device name This operator is in systemdict Errors invalidaccess rangecheck stackoverflow stackunderflow typecheck undefined devformat devicename pages action devformat formats erases all data from the specified device This operator is in systemdict pages Sets the LogicalSize device parameter for the specified device 0 entire device is formatted 1 2 3 an ioerror occurs action 1 is added to the action argument The result is used for the InitializeAction device parameter for the same device A devformat on a flash device formats the entire device regardless of the LogicalSize specified Errors invalidaccess ioerror limitcheck rangecheck stackunderflow typecheck undefined undefinedfilename Note An invalidaccess error occurs if devformat is not executed through exitserver or startjob PostScript devmount device devmount boolean sets the Mounted device parameter for the specified device to t rue It also returns the value of the Mounted device parameter for the specified device This operator is in systemdict The boolean values indicate true device successfully mounted or was already mounted false device not mounted If a device with the specified device name is n
28. The following commands modify the environment variables and are described in this section DEFAULT e SET INITIALIZE RESET The following commands query the environment variables and are described in Status Readback Commands on page 3 54 INQUIRE DINQUIRE INFO ECHO DEFAULT Command This command modifies the default setting for the specified environment variable and stores the setting in the printer NVRAM The new setting is activated with the occurrence of the next PJL reset condition PJL DEFAULT command modifier value variablezvalue CR lt LF gt command modifier value The command modifier value parameter specifies the type of PJL variables to be modified The variables supported are listed in the tables beginning on page 3 12 e A command modifier value parameter is not required for variables listed in the tables Common Variables for Both Printer Languages on page 3 12 and Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages on page 3 19 LPARM PCL is used with variables specific to PCL emulation See the tables Common Variables for PCL Emulation on page 3 48 and Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation on page 3 49 LPARM POSTSCRI PT is used for variables specific to PostScript emulation See the tables Common Variables for PostScript Emulation on page 3 51 and Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation on page 3 52 LRESOUR
29. v Viviviviviviviv viviviviv viv ivive viv iv VIV v 41414141414141414141414141414141414141414141414 4141414141414141414141414141414141414141 41141414 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 Courier Italic Courier Bold Courier Bold Italic CG Times CG Times Italic CG Times Bold CG Times Bold Italic Univers Medium Univers Medium Italic Univers Bold Univers Bold Italic 4 Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set X Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set Table 2 5 PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Continued Latin 1 SN Banus 1213 0131 1991 3191 eIn u A ys q 1x91 1 Sd UOISU9 X3 uewoy 6 g uewoy dWOOISV jebnyogd IzZe1g dINODIaV 2 50 7001 9IpJON S98 Od u2u814 ueiIpeue 98 2 198 2 098 2 898 2 098 2 uelBamson ysiueg 8 24 2 8 6 une 21 6988 OSI t 6 VIN23 une L 6988 OSI 86 une 0 5 Typeface Symbol Set SNNA TLNINA 4 8NVINOH PJL Value Symbol Set ID N N N N N N N N N N gt gt N N N N 41414141414141414
30. PostScript setsccinteractive channel baud options setsccinteractive supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019 4029 and 4039 It is parsed and three integers are removed from the stack and discarded Errors invalidaccess rangecheck stackunderflow typecheck setsoftwareiomode integer setsoftwareiomode supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019 4029 and 4039 It is parsed and an integer is removed from the stack and discarded This command validates that the integer value provided is an Adobe supported value of 0 1 2 3 4 5 or 100 and then discards the operator and value Errors stackunderflow typecheck invalidaccess rangecheck settumble boolean settumble sets the value of the Tumble page device parameter for the current print job true sets the tumble setting to short edge binding back side of the duplexed page prints upside down in relation to the front side false sets the tumble setting to long edge binding back side of the duplexed page prints in the same orientation as the front default No error is generated if a duplex unit is not installed Notes Atthe start of the next print job the setting for tumble is reset to the user default setting for the Duplex Bind menu item ftumble is changed between the printing of a front and back side of a duplexed sheet a blank back side is not ejected This operator is equivalent to executing the following Pos
31. devcontrol string integer devcontrol boolean allows a host computer utility to manage resources on the flash or disk It requires a string device name parameter an integer command name parameter and two command argument parameters The device control operator performs a specified command on the specified device The return values on the stack indicate true the command is successful false the command is unsuccessful and returns an error code Table 4 6 devcontrol Operator Parameters Integer Command Name Parameter Argument Parameter Description 1 null null Park disk heads 5 file null Make contiguous flash file 8 filename description Set description of file 9 password null Set device read write password 10 password null Set device write password 11 filename password Set file read write password 12 filename password Set file write password 13 password null Declare device read write password 14 password null Declare device write password 15 filename password Declare file read write password 16 filename password Declare file write password 17 null null Reset device password list 18 null null Reset file password list 19 devicename password Get device password 19 filename password Get file password 20 devicename null Determine if device password is properly declared 20 filename null Determine if file password is properly declared 21 null null Scan for bad block
32. ose 1 m07 Jeg asey ddnN Jeg 689 9 2 v 490 LANLSOd eueyeyey LL6 Od S N YPN 54 Typeface Symbol Set LNO4dld SHLVIN HLVINSd HLVINNA PJL Value Symbol Set ID Courier Italic Courier Bold 4 Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set X Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set Table 2 7 PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Continued Specials Specials syeqbuig dez 19d syeqbuig gt 2 Sd sjyeqbuig jdez 911 banque joquiAs snid po9 Jeg ose 1 m07 snid po9 Jeg 1 ddnN po9 Jeg 9 20 LA fere LINLSOd eueyeey LL6 Od 308s0421A JUO Id 54 yN Typeface Symbol Set LNOdld SHLVIN HLVINSd HLVINNA PJL Value Symbol Set ID 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 10 10 00 00 00 95 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 10 10 5 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 5 0 0 0 0
33. ESCA 5 0 Push 1 Pop Push Pop Cursor Position Sets up a cursor position stack for storing and recalling various cursor positions The stack can store up to 20 cursor positions Parameter preceded by or sign denotes a relative cursor move from the current cursor position Parameter without a sign denotes an absolute cursor move from the top left margin Note For the commands listed in Table 2 15 font selection is based on all parameters set following the best fit selection rules Table 2 15 Font Selection Command Parameters ESC primary ESC secondary symbol set ID Default 10U PC 8 or 12U PC 850 Country specific Function Result Select Symbol Set The line draw characters are contained in the symbol set ID 10U PC 8 The non U S characters are contained in symbol set ID 12U PC 850 ESC s P primary ESC s P secondary 0 Fixed Default 1 Proportional Select Spacing Selects a font with proportional or fixed spacing ESC s H primary ESC s H secondary characters per inch Default 10 Select Pitch Selects the number of characters per inch cpi for a fixed space bitmapped or monospaced scalable font Valid to 2 decimal places Note Pitch is not needed for proportional spaced fonts ESC s V primary ESC s V secondary height in points 25 to 999 75 Default 12 Height Select Point Size Sets the font height in poin
34. disk1_0 indicates the first physical unit and the first 0 logical partition on the device Currently one physical device for ROM flash memory and disk is supported The disk supports only the first 0 logical partition Each file on a device has a unique name to identify the information contained within the file The name may be up to 127 characters in length All character codes from X 01 to X FF are valid X 00 is not valid Filenames are case sensitive for example f lash myfile flash MYFILE indicate different files on the flash memory Filename Extensions By default all files referenced when using the PostScript emulation file operators are given a data extension For example if the following PostScript emulation command occurs flash myfile w file the file myfile data is opened on flash memory The data extension is added to Enable the Print Directory feature to identify files as PostScript emulation data files Ensure the integrity of files such as resource collection files and demonstration files However it is sometimes necessary to access files by their real name through PostScript emulation For example you may want to remove old versions of PCL language resource collection fonts without formatting the entire device To do this use the PostScript emulation setfilenameextend operator This operator is in the statusdict dictionary The value of this operator adds the extension d
35. gt lt gt LANGUAGES 1 ENUMERATED lt CR gt lt LF gt PCL lt CR gt lt LE gt USTATUS 4 ENUMERATED lt CR gt lt LF gt DEVICE lt CR gt lt LF gt JOB lt CR gt lt LF gt PAGE lt CR gt lt LE gt TIMED lt CR gt lt LF gt FLASH 1048576 lt CR gt lt LF gt DISK 543283200 MEMORY 2097152 lt CR gt lt LF gt DISPLAY LINES 2 lt CR gt lt LF gt SYSTEM FIRMWARE VERSION 250A lt CR gt lt LF gt ENGINE FIRMWARE VERSION 0 lt CR gt lt LF gt FF INQUIRE Command This command is used to query the current setting of the specified environment variable Syntax QPJL INQUIRE command modifier value variable CR lt LF gt Response Syntax PJL INQUIRE command modifier value variabl e lt CR gt lt LF gt val ue CR LF FF command modifier value The command modifier value parameter specifies the type of PJL variables to be queried The variables supported are listed in the tables beginning on page 3 12 A command modifier value parameter is not required for variables listed in the tables Common Variables for Both Printer Languages on page 3 12 and Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages on page 3 19 LPARM PCL is used with variables specific to PCL emulation See the tables Common Variables for PCL Emulation on page 3 48 and Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation on page 3 49 LPARM POSTSCRIPT is used for variables specific for PostScript emulation See the tables Co
36. number of PCL Units Horizontal Cursor Position in PCL Units Moves the cursor to a new position along the horizontal axis Note PCL units are set by the Unit of Measure Command 1 Parameter preceded by or sign denotes a relative cursor move from the current cursor position Parameter without a sign denotes an absolute cursor move from the top left margin Table 2 14 Cursor Positioning Continued Command Parameters Function Result FSC amp astF number of Rows Vertical Cursor Position in Rows Moves the cursor to a new position along the vertical axis Note Row height is determined by either the Vertical Motion Index VMI or the Set Line Spacing Command ESC amp number of Decipoints 1 Decipoint 1 720 inch Vertical Cursor Position in Decipoints Moves the cursor to a new position along the vertical axis ESC pgy number of PCL Units Vertical Cursor Position in PCL Units Moves the cursor to a new position along the vertical axis Note PCL units are set by the Unit of Measure Command 0 CR CR LF LF FF FF Default 1 CR CR LF LF LF FF FF 2 CR CR LF CR LF FF CR FF 8 CR CR LF LF CR LF FF CR FF Half Line Feed Moves the cursor down 1 2 line 1 2 of the current VMI ESCQK HG Set Line Termination Controls how the printer responds to the Carriage Return CR Line Feed LF and Form Feed FF control codes
37. 1 If mounted ce devdismount 2 Formats the device 3 If dismounted in step 1 devmount If you do not want a device searched dismount it and leave it dismounted Note Do notleave the ROM device unmounted All internal fonts are contained on the ROM device In the previous examples the devmount devdismount operators must be used outside the server loop We recommend that you place the requests in a stop context so that if the devices do not exist error recovery can take place Previous search orders are not retained Once a change is made it remains in effect Performance Some performance degradation may occur during initial access to a resource on a disk as opposed to flash memory or RAM However the information is put in cache and further references to that resource occur at RAM speed Table 6 1 Device Performance Retrieval Speeds Device Retrieval Speed Write Disk 70KB second 70KB second Flash Memory 1MB second 200KB second Job Buffering Job buffering to the disk lets you store incoming print jobs on a disk installed on your printer Although job buffering is designed for individual workstations and networks using MarkVision Professional as the primary tool to control printer operations you can handle some job buffering functions from the printer operator panel See your printer documentation for more details Job buffering requires a minimum of 10 percent of disk stor
38. 3 65 30107 Insert Staple Cartridge x Insert Staple Cartridge Intervention Required 3 65 30107 Insert Stapler x Insert Stapler Intervention Required 3 65 30107 Priming Failed Retry Go x Priming Failed Stop Intervention Required 3 65 30112 54 Network x Software Error x Network x Software Error Intervention Required 3 65 30112 56 Serial Port x Disabled x Serial Port x Disabled Intervention Required 3 65 30112 54 Serial Option x Error x Serial Option x Error Intervention Required 3 65 30112 54 Ser x Fax Connection x Serial x Fax Connection Lost Lost Intervention Required 3 65 30112 56 USB Port x Disabled x USB Port Disabled Intervention Required 3 65 30113 54 Par x ENA Connection x Parallel x ENA Connection Lost Lost Intervention Required 3 65 30113 56 Parallel Port x Disabled x Parallel x Port Disabled Intervention Required 3 65 32001 Operation Failed Jobs on x B 18 PJL Support Table B 10 PJL Messages for Auto Continuable Conditions Continued y Supported X Not Supported Page numbers reference message descriptions Message Status Code Return String Printer Model LE LE Fuser Exhausted Intervention Required 3 65 32001 Operation Failed Faxes on x Disk Operation Failed Disk Faxes on Disk Intervention Required 3 65 32002 52 Flash Full Flash Full Interven
39. 8 8000000000000001 x lees 1 80 x 6x 00 x 1 01 x 8x FF x End graphics Delta Row Delta Row is a compression mode that identifies and transmits only those bytes different from the ones in a preceding row The control byte consists of two parts High 3 bits Number of bytes to replace 1 1 to 8 Low 5 bits Offset from last unmodified byte 0 30 if the offset is 31 the next byte s is added to the offset until the next byte is not 255 Example ESC p300x 1200Y Move cursor to 1 x 4 b 3 M Set compression to Delta Row ESCK f 1A Start raster graphics at current position Num Offset 9 EQOFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF x 111 00000 b 8 at 0 FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF x ESC b9W E08000000000000001 x 8 at 0 8000000000000001 x 0 W No bytes change 0 No bytes change bg W EOFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF x 8 at 0 8FFFFFFFFFFFFFF x ESC B End graphics Adaptive Compression Adaptive compression allows the combined use of compression methods 0 through 3 Uncoded Run Length Encoded TIFF and Delta Row It also allows the printing of empty rows all zeros or duplicate rows The Transfer Raster Data command size includes all rows scan lines Scan Mode and SizeH L are three byte primary control strings CountH and CountL Table 2 32 Adaptive Compression Control Strings Scan Mode CountH CountL Data 0 Data sizeH L Un
40. E Status Code Return String Intervention Required 3 73 41xyy Change source Change Request Custom Type Name gt Custom String gt size type size Intervention Required 3 73 412yy Insert Duplex Pages amp Press Go x Insert Duplex Pages amp Press Go Intervention Required 3 73 4300 Insert Tray source Insert Tray Request X represents an input source code For more information see Table 3 16 Tray Codes on page 3 74 yy represents a media size code For more information see Table 3 17 Media Size Codes on page 3 74 See your printer documentation for return string messages Table B 13 PJL Messages for Paper Jams y Supported X Not Supported Page numbers reference message descriptions T640 T642 T644 Status Code Intervention Required 3 76 4200x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 76 4201x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 76 4202x x Paper Jam w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover The door or cover needs to be opened x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer y represents the tray number z represents the bin number B 27 PJL Support Table B 13 PJL Messages for Paper Jams Continued y Supported Printer Model X Not Supported Page numbers
41. HasNames boolean Read only Indicates if ROM supports named files Valid only if ROM is mounted mounted is set to True If ROM is not mounted this parameter has a value of False InitializeAction integer Read only Always returns a value of 0 zero which indicates no action LogicalSize integer Read only Mounted boolean True System attempts to mount the ROM False System attempts to dismount the ROM When a device is mounted it becomes known to the system and is readable depending on the nature of the device A device must contain a valid file system or it will not mount successfully To verify if the device is currently mounted query this parameter immediately after setting it If the ROM device is dismounted unpredictable results occur PhysicalSize integer Read only Indicates the size of the ROM in pages that is mounted A value of 0 zero indicates that the device is not mounted This parameter is only valid when ROM is mounted Removable boolean Read only Always False Searchable boolean Read only Indicates if ROM participates in searches in file system operations that specify a filename without specifying a device SearchOrder integer Read only If the Searchable parameter is True indicates the priority assigned to the ROM when searching for a file and no device has been specified A lower integer indicates a higher priority If the Searchable parameter is False the value of this
42. Input Relative P1 and P2 IW X1 Y2 Input Window MC mode opcode Logical Operation PP mode Pixel Placement RO angle Rotate Coordinate System SC Xmin Xmax Y min type left bottom Scale Table 2 28 Vector Group Command Parameter Command Name AA SWeep angle chord angle Arc Absolute AR Xcenter Sweep_angle chord angle Arc Relative AT Xinter chord angle Absolute Arc Three Point BR X4 Y4 Xa Bezier Relative BZ Yo Xa Bezier Absolute CI radius chord angle Circle PA X Y Plot Absolute PD X Pen Down PE flag value coordinates Polyline Encoded PR X Plot Relative PU X Pen Up RT Xiner inter Yincr inter end Yincr end chord angle Arc Relative Three Point WU type Pen Width Units Table 2 29 Polygon Group Command Parameter Command Name EA X Y Edge Rectangle Absolute EP Edge Polygon ER X Y Edge Rectangle Relative EW radius start angle sweep angle chord angle Edge Wedge FP 0 Fill Polygon Odd Even FP 1 Fill Polygon Non Zero Winding PM mode Polygon Mode Table 2 29 Polygon Group Con
43. LEXMARK Technical Reference March 2006 www lexmark com Lexmark and Lexmark with diamond design are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc registered in the United States and or other countries 2006 Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington Kentucky 40550 Edition March 2006 The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in later editions Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time Comments about this publication may be addressed to Lexmark International Inc Department F95 032 2 740 West New Circle Road Lexington Kentucky 40550 U S A In the United Kingdom and Eire send to Lexmark International Ltd Marketing and Services Department Westhorpe House Westhorpe Marlow Bucks SL7 3RQ Lexmark may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any wa
44. X Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set Table 2 7 PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Continued Specials Specials syeqbuig dez 19d syeqbuig gt 2 Sd sjyeqbuig jdez 911 banque joquiAs snid po9 Jeg ose 1 m07 snid po9 Jeg 1 ddnN po9 Jeg 9 20 LA fere LINLSOd eueyeey LL6 Od 308s0421A JUO Id 54 11 11 Typeface Symbol Set LNOdld SHLVIN HLVINSd HLVINNA PJL Value Symbol Set ID 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 10 10 00 00 00 95 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 10 10 5 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 5 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 10 10 00 00 00 95 0 0 0 00 00 00 10 10 00 00 00 0
45. 1 720 inch printing GL 2 plot ESC eOT Set Picture Frame Anchor Point 0 Set Anchor Point to Cursor Position Sets the position of the picture frame anchor point to the cursor position The picture frame anchor point defines the location of the upper left corner of the picture frame ESC eatK GL 2 Horizontal Plot Size Size in inches 0 to 32767 Specifies the horizontal scaling factor used when importing an image into the picture frame ESC c L GL 2 Vertical Plot Size Size in inches 0 to 32767 Specifies the vertical scaling factor used when importing an image into the picture frame ESCOLHB Enter GL 2 Language 0 Use Previous GL 2 Pen Position Exits PCL emulation and uses GL 2 commands to print 1 Use Current PCL Cursor Position ESC A Enter PCL Emulation 0 Use Previous PCL Cursor Position Exits GL 2 mode and uses PCL emulation commands to print 1 Use Current GL 2 Pen Position Table 2 26 Miscellaneous Commands Command Parameters Function Result ESC8 sitC End Of Line Text Wrap 0 Enable Enabling End Of Line Text Wrap moves portions of lines that extend 1 Disable Default into the unprintable area to the next line Disabling drops the portion extending into the unprintable area ESCy Display Functions On Prints all control codes and escape sequences rather than executing them Notes To prevent characters from falling outside the right margin and not printing enable End Of Line Text Wrap FS a
46. 6 Bin4 7 Bin 5 8 Bin6 9 Bin7 10 Bin8 11 Bin9 12 Bin 10 ESCg Q L Skip Perforation 0 Off Perforation area includes the area from the bottom margin of the current page to the top margin of the next page When skipping perforations a line feed past the bottom margin ejects a page and places the cursor at the top margin of the next page ESC a number of 1 120 inch increments Valid to 4 decimal places Set Horizontal Motion Index Sets the width of all characters for fixed space fonts Sets only the width of the space for proportional spaced fonts ESC amp number of 1 48 inch increments Valid to 4 decimal places Default 8 Set Vertical Motion Index VMI Sets Vertical Motion Index in 1 48 inch increments The VMI determines the vertical distance between lines Notes For some printers you can change the default VMI from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional by using the Lines Per Page menu item See your printer documentation for more information Use of this command alters any previous Set Line Spacing command settings Table 2 12 Page Control Continued Command Parameters Function Result number from 0 to 14 0 default page length is used 1 to 14 new page length is set ESC amp R D Set Line Spacing Alternative Method 1 1 line inch Specifies VMI in lines per inch 2 2 lines inch Notes 5 Fo
47. Bin 9 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 Bin 10 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name LCUSTOMTYPESTEXTURE Custom 5 SMOOTH NORMAL ROUGH NORMAL Texture DEFAULT only Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Function Selections Factory Default LCUSTOMTYPE5WEIGHT Custom Type 5 LIGHT NORMAL HEAVY NORMAL DEFAULT only Weight LCUSTOMTYPE6LENGTH Custom Type 6 NORMAL SHORT NORMAL DEFAULT only Length LCUSTOMTYPE6LOADING Custom Type 6 OFF DUPLEX OFF DEFAULT only raper LCUSTOMTYPE6MEDIA Custom Type 6 PAPER COATED GLOSSY TRANSPARENCY PAPER Media LABELS CARDSTOCK ENVELOPE DEPRULT ool COTTONPAPER LCUSTOMTYPE6NAME Custom Type 6 name CUSTOMTYPE6 DEFAULT only name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types The text string is truncated to 24 characters When queried the quotes are not returned around the string name The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name LCUSTOMTYPEGOUTBIN Assign UPPER LOWER DISABLED OPTIONALOUTBIN1 UPPER DEFAULT only Type Bin OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBINS DISABLED y Custom Type 6 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBINS Model specific OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBINQ OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to
48. Continued y Supported Printer Model X Not Supported nen Page numbers reference operator descriptions i d Operator Name setresolution 4 44 V setsccbatch 4 44 4 setsccinteractive 4 45 setsoftwareiomode 4 45 V settumble 4 45 4 setuniversalsize 4 4 setuserdiskpercent 4 46 V softwareiomode 4 46 V tumble 4 46 userdiskpercent 4 47 V waittimeout 4 47 Table C 2 Page Device Parameters X Supported Printer Model X Not Supported 5 Page numbers reference parameter descriptions Default values are listed d Key BeginPage 4 48 4 Collate 4 48 DeferredMediaSelection 4 48 DeviceRenderinglnfo 4 48 Screening 4 48 ColorGrade 4 48 x PictureGrade 4 48 4 4 48 V ETImagesOnly 4 48 x C 4 5 C 5 85 Table C 2 Page Device Parameters Continued 4 Supported Printer Model X Not Supported gi Page numbers reference parameter descriptions Default values are listed 3 Q Key ETPictureGrade 4 48 4 48 V TonerSaver 4 49 PictureGrade 4 49 ImageEnhancement 4 49 V PrintDarkness 4 49 V AutoMediaType 4 50 EdgeToEdge 4 50 DefaultPoliciesPageSize 4 50 x SubstituteSize 4 50 Type 4 51 ColorCorrecti
49. For example 100 Media Select String string See Alphanumeric String list at right Alphanumeric ID Selects the media type using a character string The string ID is case sensitive and may be up to 511 bytes long The string ID specifies the media type requested Media Type Alphanumeric String Plain Paper Plain Bond Bond Transparency Transparency Card Stock Card Stock Labels Labels Letterhead Letterhead Pre printed Preprinted Colored Paper Color Envelope Envelope Custom Type 1 Custom Type 1 or User Type 1 Custom Type 2 Custom Type 2 or User Type 2 Custom Type 3 Custom Type 3 or User Type 3 Custom Type 4 Custom Type 4 or User Type 4 Custom Type 5 Custom Type 5 or User Type 5 Custom Type 6 Custom Type 6 or User Type 6 For example the following shows the command and parameters used to select bond paper S amp n5WdBond To select letterhead paper S amp n11WdLetterhead Table 2 14 Cursor Positioning Command Parameters Function Result ESC a C number of Columns Horizontal Cursor Position in Columns Moves the cursor to a new position along the horizontal axis Note The column width is determined by the space character width of the active font or the Horizontal Motion Index HMI if set ESC amp aH number of Decipoints 1 Decipoint 1 720 inch Horizontal Cursor Position in Decipoints Moves the cursor to a new position along the horizontal axis ESC p X
50. ITC Zapf Dingbats v Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set X Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set Latin 2 Latin 5 Latin 6 Cyrillic Greek Table 2 6 PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Cyrillic 8 99915 49215 8 Od x9915 une 8 Od 929915 68 2 929915 698 Od x9915 une7 7 6588 OSI 399315 86 SMODUIA 8 1SO95 ueissng 888 4 998 24 S 6S88 OSI 86 9 8 Od oneg 9 01 6588 OSI oneg 9 Ue 86 5 une1 ES8 Od 5 s une1 268 une 6 6588 OSI 6 ute 86 SMOPUIM 8 Od 8 Od z une 298 2 2 une 2 6588 OSI 2 1 86 Typeface Symbol PJL Value Symbol Set ID N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 41414141414141414141414141414 1414141414141414141414141414 Courier Italic Courier Bold VivVivviviviviviviviviviviviv viviv viv iv iv iv viv Iv V Courier Bold Italic CG Times VivVivviviviviviviviviviviviv viviv viv iv iv iv viv iv V
51. Input Ignored Ignored Flow control to computer CTS Input Ignored Flow control from Ignored computer 1 These values are compatible with Hewlett Packard Company s LaserJet printers Interfaces DTR and DTR DSR Protocol Timing RS 232C Use DTH to pace the data flow from the computer DTR goes from high to low to indicate to the computer that the printer cannot receive more data when it detects the following BUSY conditions Buffer full Attendance error Printer not in ready state The following diagram illustrates DTR Protocol Timing ee RTS DTR DSR 3 Receive Data Valid 4 ge T L1 Lo Legend 1 TheRTS signal is driven active as long as power is supplied to the printer 2 DTR signal becomes active when initialization is complete telling the computer that the printer is ready to receive data 3 When Honor DSR is On the printer considers data received invalid when DSR is low and discards the data Only DTR DSR is used for flow control from the printer to the host computer 4 DTR drops tell the computer that the receive buffer is nearly full or that the printer is busy and that data transmission should stop About 640 free bytes remain in the buffer at this time If the computer continues to send data after the printer has sent a low DTR signal data could be lost Interfaces XON XOFF Protocol Timing RS 232C When you select thi
52. JOB Command The host computer can use the JOB command to separate print data into various parts or jobs Specifically the JOB command signifies to the printer the start of a print job Use the EOJ command to signify the end of a job In addition use the JOB EOJ pair to accomplish the following Provide a job name the name displays on the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional Indicate which pages of the job should be printed Monitor the job status as it prints Syntax GPJL JOB NAME job name START first page END last page PASSWORD number CR LF Notes The JOB command should only be used in conjunction with the EOJ command After receiving a JOB command the printer does not process a UEL command as a PJL job boundary until it receives the corresponding EOJ Instead UELs occurring within a JOB EOJ pair are processed as printer language resets for example PCL Parameters NAME job name Use the NAME parameter to assign a character string name to a particular job The name may be any combination of printable characters spaces or horizontal tabs up to a maximum of 80 characters spaces or tabs Thej ob name must be enclosed in double quotes as indicated by the command syntax START first page Use the START parameter in conjunction with the END parameter to skip the printing of a particular portion of the job The emulator discards pages of a j
53. LWRITEFILE 3 91 OPMSG 3 81 RDYMSG 3 80 RESET 3 11 SET 3 9 STMSG 3 81 USTATUS 3 59 USTATUSOFF 3 60 information messages 88 Black Print Cartridge Low 3 61 88 Black Toner Low 3 61 88 Color Print Cartridge Low 3 61 88 Cyan Toner Low 3 61 88 Magenta Toner Low 3 61 88 Photo Print Cartridge Low 3 61 88 Toner Low 3 61 3 62 88 Yellow Toner Low 3 61 Bin bin gt Full 3 62 Busy 3 62 Cancelling Job 3 62 Not Ready 3 61 Power Saver with 88 Ink Low 3 62 Powersaver 3 62 RDYMSG 3 61 Ready 3 61 Ready with 88 Ink Low 3 61 Replace Fuser 3 61 3 62 Replace PC Kit 3 61 3 62 Replace Toner 3 61 3 62 Replace Transfer 3 62 Res Reduced 3 62 Resetting the Printer 3 61 Tray source gt Empty 3 62 Tray source gt Missing 3 62 Waiting 3 62 status messages and codes 3 61 variable categories 3 7 common variables all printer languages 3 12 PCL emulation 3 48 PostScript emulation 3 51 printer unique all printer languages 3 19 LRESOURCE 3 52 X 10 PCL emulation 3 49 PostScript emulation 3 52 variables AUTOCONT 3 12 BINDING 3 12 BITSPERPIXEL 3 12 CLEARABLEWARNINGS 3 12 COPIES 3 12 CPLOCK 3 13 DENSITY 3 13 DUPLEX 3 13 ECONOMODE 3 13 FONTNUMBER 3 48 FONTSOURCE 3 48 FORMATTERNUMBER 3 13 FORMLINES 3 13 HOLD 3 13 HOLDKEY 3 13 HOLDTYPE 3 14 IMAGEADAPT 3 14 INTRAY1SIZE 3 14 INTRAY2 3 14 INTRAY2SIZE 3 14 3 14 INTRAYSSIZE 3 14 INTRAY4 3 14 INTRAYASIZE 3 14 INTRAY5 3 14 INTRAYSSIZE 3 14 JAMRECOVERY 3 5
54. Legal values True Indicates the copypage command is processed as defined in the PostScript Level 2 description False Indicates the copypage command is processed as defined in the PostScript 3 description VMReclaim integer Legal values 0 Enables automatic garbage collection 1 Disables automatic garbage collection for local Virtual Memory VM 2 Disables automatic garbage collection for both local and global VM VMThreshold integer Frequency of automatic garbage collection which occurs when the specified number of bytes have been allocated since the previous collection Legal value Any integer from 8192 to 500000 inclusive WaitTimeout integer Number of seconds the interpreter waits to receive additional characters from the host before it terminates the current print job by executing a PostScript emulation timeout error A value of 0 indicates an infinite timeout WaitTimeout is initialized to the value of the WaitTimeout system parameter at the beginning of each print job Legal value Any non negative integer PostScript System Parameters The setsystemparams operator sets the values of the specified system parameters This operator requires a password if one is set The currentsystemparams operator returns a dictionary of the current values of the system parameters Values supplied to setsystemparams that are outside the range or limits for the specified integer parameter do not cause ran
55. Ln Notes Ifthe Manual Paper or Manual Envelope source is selected the Manual Feed page device parameter is set to t rue Arangecheck error is returned if a paper source that is not installed is selected If asetpapertray operator is issued for the back of a duplexed page the printer ejects a blank back page changes the paper source and prints the information for the back side of the page on the front side of a page from the new paper source The setting returns to the user default setting for the Paper Source menu item at the end of the print job Errors rangecheck stackunderflow typecheck PostScript Envelope Size Support The literal names in Table 4 3 are also supported as operators in userdict These operators change the image size but do not change the active paper source Therefore when these operators are used part of the image may be clipped When these literal names are used as operators it is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence The following example uses a 3 875 x 7 5 envelope lt lt Policies lt lt PageSize 7 gt gt PageSize 279 540 gt gt gt gt setpagedevice Table 4 3 Envelope Sizes Supported X Supported X Not Supported Envelope Sizes Size 8 Literal Size mm Size inches points 6 3 875x7 5envelope 98 4 x 190 5 3 875 x 7 5 279 540 3 875x8 875envelope 98 4 x 225 4 3 875 x 8 875 2
56. Result 1 999 number of Copies ESCE Printer Reset Prints any partial pages Resets printer environment to defaults Deletes all temporary downloaded resources ESC amp gHA Number of Collated Copies 0 Collation off Turns collation of pages off or sets the number of collated copies ESC RHX number of Copies 1 to 32767 Default 1 Number of Copies Affects the page currently in process and subsequent pages ESCa 045 0 Single Sided Default 1 Duplex Long Edge Binding 2 Duplex Short Edge Binding 100 Manual Duplex First Sides 101 Manual Duplex Second Sides Simplex Duplex Print Long edge or short edge binding refers to the side of the physical page where binding occurs ESC HU number of Decipoints Range 32767 to 32767 1 Decipoint 1 720 inch Default 0 Long Edge Offset Registration Also known as Left Offset Adjusts placement of logical page along the width of the physical page ESC 07 number of Decipoints Range 32767 to 32767 1 Decipoint 1 720 inch Default 0 Short Edge Offset Registration Also known as Top Offset Adjusts placement of logical page along the length of the physical page Table 2 11 Job Control Continued Command Parameters Function Result ESC ust D Range 96 100 120 144 150 160 180 200 225 240 288 300 360 400 450 480 600 720 800 900 1200 1440 1800 2400 3600 7200
57. and so on Thefilename is case sensitive filetype An identifier that categorizes the file such as p5macro for PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets See the table beginning on page 3 87 for a complete list of the supported file types The filetype is case sensitive variablezval ue The supported variables are listed in the tables beginning on page 3 12 This printer returns a for inquiries of an unsupported variable or inquiries of a variable associated with an option that is not installed ECHO Command The ECHO command instructs the printer to return the specified words after the command is parsed This command provides a method of capturing the status information returned by a specific print job Syntax PJL ECHO words CR Response Syntax QPJL ECHO words CR LF FF words parameter The wor ds parameter must start with a printable character and can consist of a combination of printable characters spaces and horizontal tabs Note The ECHO command is terminated by the line feed character INFO Command The INFO command is used to query status information from the printer Table 3 10 INFO Category Parameter Values on page 3 56 lists the categories of information that can be queried See Status Message Format on page 3 61 for additional information about the messages returned by the INFO STATUS USTATUS DEVICE and USTATUS TIMED commands Syntax QPJL INFO category
58. is printed If the device is write protected Write protected is printed If the device is not protected this line is blank For more information see File and Device Protection Commands on page 3 93 and Password Protection on page 6 7 ID Valid for PCL emulation macros fonts and symbol sets only The ID must be used when adding a description to a macro or a symbol set If two files with the same file type have duplicate IDs the following occurs f multiple macros or symbol sets have been created with duplicate download IDs only the last macro or symbol set is listed It is the only one that can be selected On flash memory the number listed for bytes unavailable includes the unlisted macros and symbol sets The bytes unavailable field is not applicable for the disk device PostScript emulation fonts and files created by PostScript emulation file operators do not have IDs Type File types that can be stored on flash memory or disk have unique extensions The following file types are recognized by the flash format used on earlier printer models the name of the file type printed in the directory appears in parenthesis t1 PostScript font SFnt5 PCL scalable font bFnt5 PCL bitmap font 5 PCL macro Except as noted below file types listed above are recognized by the flash format used in your printer In addition the flash format in your printer also recognizes the following formats data
59. pair UTP cabling and to the IEEE 802 3u Fast Ethernet standard for 100BaseTX networks using Category 5 UTP cabling For information on installing a print server in your printer see your printer documentation You may also connect your printer to a LAN by using an external print server Use one of the following Lexmark MarkNet print servers e IBM LAN Connection for Printers and Plotters IBM 4033 Note Network capabilities are standard on some printer models See your printer documentation for more information Input Buffer Your printer has an input link buffer for each interface The maximum size of the input buffer depends upon the amount of RAM memory installed The input buffers serve the same purpose as a print spooler and can be allocated automatically by the printer The size of the input buffer may be modified or disabled from the operator panel menus or through MarkVision Professional If NPAP is active on a port two thirds of the buffer memory is reserved for NPAP and one third is set aside for the input buffer If NPAP is not active all the memory is available for the input buffer Table 8 8 shows the sizes automatically selected for the buffers when the buffer size is set to Auto in the menus Table 8 6 Input Buffer Sizes in Bytes Serial Network Memory Size Parallel Buffer Size Buffer Size Buffer Size LocalTalk USB Fax 2MB 12K 12K 12K 12K 12K N A 4MB 12K 12K 48K 12K 12K 350 6MB 24K 12K 48K 24
60. standard connector 8 8 parallel modes 8 14 parameters PostScript emulation interpreter 4 62 device 4 71 system 4 65 user 4 62 page device 4 48 password 6 7 directory of flash memory or disk 6 6 general notes 3 93 locking entire flash or disk 3 94 lost file or device password 3 98 read write protection 6 7 relocking file or device 3 96 setting job password 3 5 3 6 setting password for a file 3 93 unlocking file or device for current job 3 97 unlocking protection for flash or disk 3 95 write protection 6 7 PCL emulation command structure 2 32 control codes 2 31 escape control code 2 31 linking commands 2 33 parameters 2 32 relative positioning 2 33 syntax 2 32 commands alphabetic 2 34 alphanumeric ID 2 40 color extensions assign color index 2 53 color component one 2 53 color component three 2 53 color component two 2 53 color lookup tables 2 52 configure image data 2 53 driver configuration command 2 52 foreground color 2 53 gamma correction 2 53 monochrome print mode 2 52 palette control 2 52 palette ID 2 52 push pop palette 2 52 render algorithm 2 53 select palette by ID 2 52 simple color 2 52 user defined dither matrix 2 52 viewing illuminant 2 53 cursor positioning half line feed 2 41 horizontal columns 2 40 horizontal decipoints 2 40 horizontal PCL units 2 40 line termination 2 41 push pop cursor position 2 41 vertical decipoints 2 41 vertical PCL units 2 41 vertical rows 2 41 font cr
61. through MarkVision Professional See your printer documentation for more information Use a parallel interface when you Attach your printer to a personal computer Attach your printer to a host system with a Centronics compatible parallel port Attach your printer to a Lexmark external print server Use a USB interface when you Attach your printer to a personal computer iMac Sun Ray or Sun Blade e Need to connect the printer to a computer that does not have an available parallel port Use a serial interface when you Require an interface cable more than 10 feet in length Note Lexmark also offers a 20 ft parallel interface cable part number 1427498 e Need to connect the printer to a computer that does not have an available parallel port Attach network cables to the Token Ring or Ethernet print servers installed in your printer Refer to the MarkNet Quick Start book or your user documentation for additional setup information 8 7 Interfaces Parallel Interface Use the Lexmark 3 04 m 10 ft parallel cable part number 1021231 or a cable that is IEEE 1284 compliant to connect your printer to a personal computer or to a host system with a Centronics compatible parallel port See your printer documentation for the location of the printer parallel connector Note To reset your printer with an INIT signal set Honor Init to On from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional S
62. 0 0 0 00 00 95 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 10 10 00 gt ISIN INS IS gt gt S S SSI STS 5 TS ITS TSIEN TESTS TESTS TESTS gt IN gt gt gt 5 T 2 E S 9272 D a gt 9 518 o s ols 22 5 gt gt gt 4 CAE c c c 190 9o o 5 Emo 55525515 agg 0 3 s 5 9 e EO 5 2 Po oo zu S 218181 2 59519 2 2 91915 sis s s O O 51 5 51 51515 21519 2 c cic 6 0 010 0 lt 2 os Ssi 5 o o 21221559 01010 0 4 Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set X Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set 2 27 Table 2 7 PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Continued Specials Specials syeqbuig dez 19d syeqbuig gt 2 Sd sjyeqbuig jdez 911 banque joquiAs snid po9 Jeg ose 1 m07 snid po9 Jeg 1 ddnN po9 Jeg 9 20 LA fere LINLSOd eueyeey LL6 Od 308s0421A JUO Id
63. 100V 120V 230V Average 650 W 650 W 650 W 830 W 650 W 650 W 650 W 650 W 650 W continuous printing Average x x continuous copying Average continuous scanning Idle without 180 W 180 W 180 W 190 W 190 W 190 W 190 W 190 W 190 W Power Saver Standby Idle with Power 30W 30W 30W 30W 30W 30W 30W Saver Rated short 12 3A 10 2A 5 2A 12 3 102 5 2 12 10 2 52A term current Note Power requirements for network models may differ Note his value is 19 W for units manufactured after 4 30 2004 Physical Specifications 7 3 Printer Model Specifications Dimension Height C760n C762n 528 3 mm 20 8 in C760dn C762dn 617 2 mm 24 3 in C760dn C762dtn 734 1 mm 28 9 in Width 604 5 mm 23 8 in 604 5 mm 23 8 in 604 5 mm 23 8 in Depth 469 9 mm 18 5 in 469 9 mm 18 5 in 469 9 mm 18 5 in Weight 47 7 kg 105 Ib 53 8 kg 118 5 Ib 60 kg 132 Ib Printer Model C762 C762 Dimension with Finisher Max Input Trays Height 1104 9 mm 43 5 in 1051 6 mm 41 4 in Width 1508 8 mm 59 4 in 604 5 mm 23 8 in Depth 713 7 mm 28 1 in 469 9 mm 18 5 in Weight 124 7 kg 274 5 Ib 81 4 kg 179 Ib Clearance Requirements C760n C762n C760dn C76
64. 22 null null Abort bad block scan 23 null null Quick bad block scan 24 null null Flush the disk cache 27 file null Be quiet when writing to disk 4 17 PostScript Table 4 7 Unsuccessful devcontrol Parameter Error Codes Code Meaning 1 File system access has not been initialized 2 Could not allocate file descriptor 3 Some invalid argument was passed 4 No such device 5 Invalid access to file requested 6 Argument too large filename buffer 7 Invalid file descriptor or filename 8 Catch all error or device error 9 Unable to allocate memory for buffer data structure 10 Device busy 11 Device not currently mounted 12 Attempt to perform illegal IO operation 13 No space to update or create file 14 Major change in file system for findnext to function properly 15 Corrupted file system on device 16 Device already mounted 17 Could not initialize file system 18 Device not mounted 19 No file entry located 20 Bad file system on device 21 Password required 22 Aborted by callback Errors invalidaccess rangecheck typecheck devdismount device devdismount dismounts the specified device by setting the Mounted device parameter for the specified device to false This operator is in systemdict Errors invalidaccess stackunderflow undefinedfilename Note An undefinedfilename error occurs when an invalid device name is used
65. 3 16901 Times New Roman Bold Italic 1 1 3 16901 Arial 1 0 0 16602 Arial Italic 1 1 0 16602 Arial Bold 1 0 3 16602 This font is not implemented in the Hewlett Packard Company s LaserJet 4050 Table 2 2 Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands Continued Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode Standard PCL Emulation Font Name Spacing Style Weight Typeface Arial Bold Italic 1 1 3 16602 Letter Gothic 0 0 0 4102 Letter Gothic Italic 0 1 0 4102 Letter Gothic Bold 0 0 3 4102 Univers Condensed Medium 1 4 0 4148 Univers Condensed Medium Italic 1 5 0 4148 Univers Condensed Bold 1 4 3 4148 Univers Condensed Bold Italic 1 5 3 4148 Garamond Antiqua 1 0 0 4197 Garamond Kursiv 1 1 0 4197 Garamond Halbfett 1 0 3 4197 Garamond Kursiv Halbfett 1 1 3 4197 CG Omega 1 0 0 4113 CG Omega Italic 1 1 0 4113 CG Omega Bold 1 0 3 4113 CG Omega Bold Italic 1 1 3 4113 Antique Olive 1 0 0 4168 Antique Olive Italic 1 1 0 4168 Antique Olive Bold 1 0 3 4168 Albertus Medium 1 0 1 4362 Albertus Extra Bold 1 0 4 4362 Clarendon Condensed Bold 1 4 3 4140 Marigold 1 0 0 4297 Coronet 1 1 0 4116 Line Printer 16 0 0 0 0 POSTNET Barcode 1 0 0 0 Wingdings 1 0 0 31402 Symbol 1 0 0 16686 This font is not implemented in the Hewlett Packard Company s LaserJet 4050 Type 1 Fonts Thirty of the Type 1 fonts have different fo
66. 3 79 4284x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 79 4285w Intervention Required 3 79 4286w Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 79 4287 w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover The door or cover needs to be opened X represents the number of jammed pages in the printer y represents the tray number Z represents the bin number Table B 13 PJL Messages for Paper Jams Continued 4 Supported Printer Model X Not Supported Page numbers reference message descriptions ml 3 So Status Code Intervention Required 3 79 4288 x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 79 4289 x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 79 4290 x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 79 4291 x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 79 4292 x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 79 4293 x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 80 4294 x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 80 4295 x Paper Jam w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover The door or cover needs to be opened x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer y represents the tray number z represents the bin number Table B 14 Service Errors 4 Supported X Not Supported Page numbers reference message description Message Error Code ALL SERVICE MESSAGES 3 80 50000
67. 4 70 WaitTimeout 4 64 C 11 590177 12 Table 5 Devices Supported y Supported Printer Model X Not Supported n Network version of the printer model Device ParallelA 4 65 ParallelB ParallelC ParallelD 9eSerialD96 LocalTalkA LocalTalkB LocalTalkC LocalTalkD EtherTalkA EtherTalkB EtherTalkC EtherTalkD IR_B IR_C IR_D USB_A USB_B USB_C USB_D TokenTalkA TokenTalkB TokenTalkC TokenTalkD AppSocketA AppSocketB X 13 EZALE Table C 5 Devices Supported Continued y Supported Printer Model X Not Supported n Network version of the printer model Device AppSocketC 4 65 AppSocketD RemotePrinterA RemotePrinterB RemotePrinterC RemotePrinterD PrintServerA PrintServerB PrintServerC PrintServerD LPR_A LPR_B 9eLPR C96 LPR_D LexLinkA LexLinkB LexLi
68. 40038 80 Fuser Belt Life Warning FALSE fuser belt maintenance Intervention required fuser maintenance 40038 80 Fuser Exhausted FALSE Intervention required belt maintenance 40038 80 Belt Exhausted FALSE Intervention required 40038 80 Fuser Belt Exhausted FALSE fuser belt maintenance Intervention required ITU maintenance 40038 83 ITU Maintenance FALSE Note The Display String is returned in the current language A display string longer than one line shows only the first line of the message Attendance Conditions 3 67 Attendance conditions require operator intervention Attendance messages are returned in this form CODE status code DISPLAY display string in double quotes ONLINEzonline status To determine which messages your printer supports see Table B 11 PJL Messages for Attendance Conditions on page B 19 Table 3 14 PJL Message for Attendance Conditions Printer State Status Code Display String Online Status Intervention required 40010 30 Coating Roll Missing FALSE insert coating roll Intervention required 40010 30 XXXX Print Unit Missing FALSE insert print unit Intervention required 40010 Insert Hole Punch Box FALSE insert hole punch box Intervention required 40010 Insert PC Cartridge FALSE insert photoconductor cartridge Intervention required 40021 Cover Open or Close Top Covers or FALSE printer upper door open Insert
69. 41 ESC rgA Start Raster Graphics 2 49 ESC rgF Raster Graphics Presentation Mode 2 49 V ESC r S Raster Width Source 2 49 72 ESC r T Raster Height Source 2 49 ESC rgL J Simple Color 2 52 ESC rB End Raster Graphics Version B 2 50 ESC rC End Raster Graphics Version C 2 50 ESC sg Inquire Status Readback Entity 2 54 ESC s1M Free Space 2 54 ESC S T Set Status Readback Location Type 2 54 ESC S U Set Status Readback Location Unit 2 54 ESC s X Echo 2 54 Raster Width Destination 2 50 4 Gamma Correction 2 53 5 Render Algorithm 2 53 ESC t R Raster Resolution 2 49 4 Raster Height Destination 2 51 ESC gitW Set Raster Configuration 2 51 x Color Component One 2 53 ESC y B Color Component Two 2 53 ESC y C Color Component Three 2 53 Assign Color Index 2 53 ESC V N Source Transparency Mode 2 46 ESC V O Pattern Transparency Mode 2 46 ESC y HS Foreground Color 2 53 ESC ygrT Select Current Pattern 2 46 ESC y W data Configure Image Data 2 53 PCL Support Table A 1 PCL Emulation Commands Continued 4 Supported Printer X Not Supported Page numbers reference command descriptions Model LE E commend Function E ESC i W data Viewing Illuminant 2 53 x ESCg Clear Horizontal Margins 2 37 ESC_ Half Line Feed 2 41 24 ESC Enter PCL Emulation 2 55 ESC B Enter GL 2 Langu
70. 58 8 Absolute Character Size 2 58 SL Character Slant 2 58 5 Symbol Mode 2 59 SP Select Pen 2 59 SR Relative Character Size 2 58 55 Select Standard Font 2 58 SV Screened Vectors 2 59 SV Screened Vectors 9 level 2 59 V TD Transparent Data 2 58 P4 TM Threshold Matrix 2 59 Table A 2 GL 2 Commands Continued y Supported Page numbers reference command Printer X Not Supported descriptions Model av LE 2 Command Function TR Transparency Mode 2 59 UL User Defined Line 2 59 WG Fill Wedge 2 58 WU Pen Width Units 2 59 7 PCL Support PJL Support APPENDIX B PJL Support The following tables list PJL commands and identify printers that support them For detailed information about PJL commands see Printer Job Language on page 3 1 All commands may not have a full description Note The word common applies to those variables common to both your Lexmark printer and the Hewlett Packard Company s LaserJet printers Table B 1 Common Variables for Both Printer Languages y Supported X Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions and are listed for supported variables only Printer Default values are listed for exceptions only Model q q LE Variable Name AUTOCONT 3 12 AUTOSELECT x BINDING 3 12 BITSPERPI
71. A probability tree determines which characters are frequently used Repeated patterns in a string of characters are identified and stored so the string doesn have to be stored multiple times A three bit zlib header is added to the beginning of a block to describe the type of compression used and indicates whether the block is a final block Other information in the header includes checksums compression algorithm used and the level of compression In compression all checksums are set to zero and in decompression the checksums are ignored The memory required for zlib compression and decompression is independent of the size of the data to be compressed or decompressed The number 999 does not conflict with other compression types so it is used to represent zlib compression See page 2 60 for more information Group 3 and Group 4 Raster Compression Since Group 4 images do not use line endings the width of the image must be specified using the Raster Width command F r S The compressed image data is sent to the printer using the Transfer Raster Data command 650 p W The maximum number of bytes that can be sent using the Transfer Raster Data command is 32K bytes Images larger than 32K bytes must be broken up and sent using multiple commands It does not matter where the image is broken or how many Transfer Raster Data commands are used Once the image is started with a Transfer Raster Data command no other commands are allowed
72. Attached Intervention Required 3 69 40030 58 Many Disks Installed x Too Many Disks Installed Intervention Required 3 69 40036 58 Too Many Disks Installed x Too Many Disks Installed Intervention Required 3 70 40037 31 PerfectFinish Missing x PerfectFinish Missing Intervention Required 3 70 40037 87 PerfectFinish Empty x PerfectFinish Empty Intervention Required 3 70 40038 88 Toner Low V Toner Low XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK where CMYK denotes Cyan Magenta Yellow and Black cartridges respectively Table B 11 PJL Messages for Attendance Conditions Continued 4 Supported X Not Supported Page numbers reference message descriptions Message Page Status Code Return String Printer Model Intervention Required 3 70 40038 88 Yellow Toner Low x Toner Low 88 Magenta Toner Low 88 Cyan Toner Low 88 Black Toner Low 3 70 88 Color Print Cartridge Low x 88 Black Print Cartridge Low 88 Photo Print Cartridge Low 3 70 88 Yellow Toner Empty x 88 Magenta Toner Empty 88 Cyan Toner Empty 88 Black Toner Empty Intervention Required 3 70 40038 84 Black Photo Dev Life x 84 Black Photo Dev Life Warning Warning Intervention Required 3 70 40038 84 Color Photo Dev Life x 84 Color Photo Dev Life Warning Warning Intervention Required 3 70 40038 84 All Photo
73. Communication Device TokenTalk TokenTalkA TokenTalkB TokenTalkC TokenTalkD TokenTalk_NV and TokenTalk_Pending contain the same parameters Address string Read only Bridging name Read only Adaptive 4 80 PostScript Table 4 11 PostScript Emulation Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition DelayedOutputClose boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job Supported values are True An end of file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs finish printing False An end of file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the interpreter whether or not that job has finished printing This value is set independently for each port Enabled boolean Read only Supported values are True False Filtering name Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed Supported values are InterpreterBased None HasNames boolean Read only Always returns False Interpreter name Read only Supported values are PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS NodelD integer Read only On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data Supported values are True Data is sent and processed False Data is lost PCLSmartSwitch boolean Supported values are True PCL SmartSwitch is On False PCL SmartSwitch is
74. Continued MERE PARALLEL DEFAULT only Port Specific Function Parallel Protocol Selections SLOW FAST A value of SLOW indicates the Parallel Protocol setting is Standard The value of FAST indicates the Parallel Protocol setting is FASTBYTES INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of the Parallel Protocol as follows f Parallel Protocol is set as Standard SLOW is returned f Parallel Protocol is set as Fastbytes FAST is returned Factory Default FAST PASSWORD DEFAULT only Default password for PUL NVRAM security 0 to 65535 Locks the printer operator panel to keep the user defaults from changing See your printer documentation for more information The Default PUL password is 0 If the PUL password is not equal to 0 a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the PASSWORD variable returns ENABLED If the PUL password is equal to 0 a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the PASSWORD variable returns DISABLED See the PASSWORD parameter of the JOB command on page 3 5 for more information PERSONALITY Port specific SmartSwitch settings PCL POSTSCRIPT AUTO PERSONALITY controls the SmartSwitch settings for the interface link on which the PUL command is received If AUTO is sent both PS SmartSwitch and PCL Smartswitch menu settings are set to ON If PCL is sent PS SmartSwitch is set to OFF and PCL SmartSwitch is set to ON If POSTSCRIPT is sent PCL SmartSwitch is set to OFF and PS SmartSwitc
75. Control Panel to Classic View 4 Click the Hardware tab 5 Inthe Device Manager area of the Hardware tab screen click the Device Manager button The Device Manager screen appears 6 Scroll down to Ports and click the once to expand the list of available Ports Select the communications port you want to configure and double click The Communications Port Properties screen for this specific port displays For example if you select the COM1 port then the Communications Port COM1 Properties screen displays Click the Port Settings tab Fill out the fields for the following printer settings to make them match your printer settings Bits per second Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow Control Note For Flow Control select Hardware if you want DTR protocol or Xon Xoff for Xon Xoff protocol 10 Click OK 11 Close all windows now that the port is set up Interfaces Deciding Which Interface to Use On some printers you can attach multiple interface cables to the printer at the same time The printer automatically switches to the interface receiving a job Then it prints the job and begins searching the interfaces for the next job One or more of the following is built into your printer a standard parallel connector a USB connector or a network connector To use a port connect a cable from the printer to the computer then set the appropriate values from the printer operator panel or for network connected printers only
76. Default 300 units per inch Unit of Measure Sets the size for the PCL Unit units per inch The Unit of Measure defines the unit used in the following commands e Horizontal Cursor Position by PCL Unit 5 e Vertical Cursor Position by PCL Unit FS p Y Horizontal Rectangle Size by PCL Unit 5 e Vertical Rectangle Size by PCL Unit 5 The Unit of Measure also affects the rounding of character escapements and the Horizontal Motion Index Note This command does not affect the interpretation of binary raster data for bitmapped fonts raster graphics or user defined fill patterns ESCo 42345 Universal Exit Language UEL Start of PJL This command terminates the current printer language and allows switching into PJL For more information see UNIVERSAL EXIT LANGUAGE Command on page 3 2 Table 2 12 Page Control Command Parameters Function Result ESC RHA Set Page Size Paper Selects the physical size of the paper which also determines the 1 E logical page dimensions See the tables beginning on page 2 4 for the Xecutve d dimensions your printer supports 2 Letter paper and envelope your p pports 3 Legal If the requested page size is not in the requested source or if no source 4 10 Folio is requested sources are checked for the requested size in the 6 11 Ledger 11 x 17 following order multipurpose feeder tray 1 tray 2 tray 3 tr
77. FALSE cartridge life warning Intervention required 40021 31 Missing Cartridge XXXX FALSE missing cartridge Intervention required 40021 31 Missing Printhead FALSE missing printhead Intervention required 40021 32 Unsupported Printhead FALSE unsupported printhead Intervention required 40021 40 Tray x Size Sense Error FALSE size sense error Intervention required 40021 41 Open Bin 1 Exit Tray FALSE open bin exit tray Intervention required 40021 Close Cover FALSE printer cover open Intervention required 40021 Open Cover FALSE open cover Intervention required 40021 Close Deflector G FALSE deflector open Intervention required 40021 Open Rear Door FALSE open rear door Intervention required 40021 Close Front Door FALSE close front door Intervention required 40021 Close Side Door FALSE close side door Intervention required 40021 Close Finisher Door FALSE close finisher door Intervention required 40021 Close Finisher Side Door FALSE close finisher side door Intervention required 40021 Close Finisher Top Cover FALSE close finisher top cover Intervention required 40021 Close Door lt d gt FALSE close door d Intervention required 40021 Close Cover c FALSE close cover c Intervention required 40021 Close Tray x Top Cover FALSE close tray top cover XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK where CMYK denotes Cyan Magenta Yellow and Black cartridges respective
78. IET or IETPictureGrade A PostScript job can enter or exit IET or PictureGrade using the Screening parameter in a setpagedevice call This does not change the user default printer settings for print quality which are read and used by the interpreter for the next print job unless the setpagedevice is issued in a startjob context f Screening is set to IET or IETPictureGrade TonerSaver is set to False This is true for all models except the Optra C710 Optra M410 Optra T family and Optra W810 PictureGrade is an integer that provides compatibility with previous Lexmark laser printer drivers PictureGrade works in conjunction with Screening If Screening is set to None or PictureGrade the values for PictureGrade affect Screening in the following way 0 Changes Screening to None 1 Changes Screening to PictureGrade If Screening is set to IET or IETPictureGrade the values for PictureGrade affect Screening in the following way 0 Changes Screening to IET 1 Changes Screening to IETPictureGrade For more information on Screening see page 4 48 ImageEnhancement is an integer that provides compatibility with previous Lexmark laser printer drivers ImageEnhancement works in conjunction with Screening If Screening is set to None or IET the values for ImageEnhancement affect Screening in the following way 0 Changes Screening to None 1 Changes Screening to IET If Screening is set to PictureGrade or IETPictureGrade the values f
79. LCUSTOMPAPERUNITS Universal Units INCHES MILLIMETERS INCHES of Measure MILLIMETERS Country specific LCUSTOMPAPERWIDTH Universal Width 76 to 915 in increments of 1 mm 216 305 mm 3 to 36 01 in increments of 0 01 in 8 5 12 in Model and Note Values are determined to be inches or millimeters based on the LCUSTOMPAPERUNITS setting country specific Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Variable Function Selections Factory Default LCUSTOMPAPERHEIGHT Universal 76 to 915 in increments of 1 mm 356 360 457 mm Height 3 to 36 01 in increments of 0 01 in 14 14 17 18 in Note Values are determined to be inches or 2 and ifi millimeters based on LCUSTOMPAPERUNITS _ Country specific setting LCUSTOMPAPERFEED Universal Feed SHORTEDGE LONGEDGE SHORTEDGE Direction LCUSTOMTYPE1LENGTH Custom 1 NORMAL SHORT NORMAL DEFAULT only Length LCUSTOMTYPE1LOADING Custom 1 OFF DUPLEX OFF DEFAULT only Paper Loading LCUSTOMTYPE1MEDIA Custom Type 1 PAPER COATED GLOSSY TRANSPARENCY PAPER Media LABELS CARDSTOCK ENVELOPE COTTONPAPER LCUSTOMTYPE1NAME Custom Type 1 name CUSTOMTYPE1 DEFAULT only Name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types The text string is truncated to 24 characters When queried the quotes are not returned around the string name The de
80. LOPTIONALOUTBIN10NAME DEFAULT only Optional Output Bin 10 Name name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters When queried the quotes are not returned around the string name The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name OPTIONAL OUTBIN10 LOUTBINCONFIG DEFAULT only Configure Output Bins MAILBOX LINK MAILBOXOVERFLOW LINKOPTIONAL TYPEASSIGNMENT MAILBOX Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued MERE LOVERFLOWOUTBIN DEFAULT only Function Overflow Bin Selections UPPER LOWER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBINS OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBINS OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBINQ OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters If an output bin is full print jobs assigned to that output bin exit to the assigned overflow output bin A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Overflow Bin setting returns Factory Default UPPER Overflow Bin DINQUIRE or setting INQUIRE value Standard Bin UPPER Bin 1 OPTIONALOUTBIN1 Bin 2 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 Bin 3 OPTIONALOUTBINS3 Bin 4 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 Bin 5 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 Bin 6 OPTIONALOUTBING Bin 7 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 Bin 8 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 Bi
81. N PJL Support PJL Support Table B 15 Device Attendance Messages Supported X Not Supported St Page numbers reference message descriptions Message Es RDYMSG 3 80 V OPMSG 3 81 STMSG 3 81 Table B 16 Lexmark Unique PJL Commands 4 Supported Model X Not Supported Sf pene numbers reference command descriptions 3 LE 3 82 74 LDOWNLOADTARGET 3 30 4 LPORTROTATE 3 82 LPRINT testpage 3 83 V LPRINTDIRECTORY 3 83 LPRINTTESTPAGE 3 83 4 LPRINTMENUS 3 83 LPRINTPCLFONTS 3 83 LPRINTPSFONTS 3 83 LESCAPECHAR 3 83 74 PHONENUMBER 3 85 v LOPENFILE 3 89 v LCLOSEFILE 3 89 74 LREADFILE 3 90 LWRITEFILE 3 91 74 PJL Support Table B 16 Lexmark Unique PJL Commands Continued y Supported X Not Supported Sf V Page numbers reference command descriptions LE 21 Command LRUNFILE 3 91 LRENAMEFILE 3 92 V LDELETEFILE 3 92 V LFORMAT 3 92 LDEFRAG 3 92 V Table B 17 File and Device Protection Commands y Supported X Not Supported dc Page numbers reference command descriptions Command E LDECLARE LRESOURCE 3 95 LDELETEPASSWORD 3 96 LQUERYSEED 3 9
82. Off For more information see Using SmartSwitch on page 2 1 PortLocation string Read only Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set Supported values are Standard Port Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2 Option Slot 3 PSSmartSwitch boolean Supported values are True PS SmartSwitch is set to On False PS SmartSwitch is set to Off For more information see Using SmartSwitch on page 4 1 PostScript Table 4 11 PostScript Emulation Device Parameters Continued Key Definition TokenTalkType string Setting this variable does not affect the value of other physical internal print servers Note The statusdict string appletalktype is correct for the current job port Type name Read only Always returns the value of Communications Zone string Returns the value identified when the printer makes connection to the network at power on Device Parameters for the Communication Device AppSocket AppSocketA AppSocketB AppSocketC AppSocketD AppSocket_NV and AppSocket_Pending contain the same parameters DelayedOutputClose boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job Supported values are True An end of file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs finish printing False An end of file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the interpreter whet
83. Page Down keys on the keyboard Use the scroll bar to the right of the page Click the page number box on the status bar at the bottom of the page and type the page you want To increase or decrease the magnification of the pages Select the magnifying glass icon on the toolbar at the top of the page and then draw a box around the area you want to view Click the magnification box on the status bar and select an option from the drop down menu To jump directly to a particular section or key word in this document Click one of the bookmarks in the overview window to the left of the page Click a topic in the table of contents Select Tools from the menu bar and then choose Find or Search Click the binoculars icon on the toolbar and then type a word in the text box Click a cross reference to a figure page number or heading in the docu ment itself Printing the File Although this book was designed primarily for online viewing you can print a hard copy by clicking File on the toolbar and then choosing Print Make sure you ve selected the correct printer range of pages and number of copies before you click OK You should be aware that if you print this document on a color printer the color you see on the paper may not match the color you see on your computer monitor Introduction Bibliography For detailed information about PCL emulation printer commands PostScript emulation pri
84. Primary Font Symbol Set 2 42 ESC X Select Primary Download Font by Font ID 2 43 ESC 3 Select Default Primary Font 2 43 ESC f W data Define Symbol Set 2 44 ESC s B Primary Font Stroke Weight 2 43 ESC s H Primary Font Pitch 2 42 ESC sgp Primary Font Spacing 2 42 5 546 Primary Font Style 2 42 ESC s T Primary Font Typeface Selection 2 43 V ESC s V Primary Font Height Point Size 2 42 ESC s W data Load Character 2 45 5 Secondary Font Symbol Set 2 42 x ESC X Select Secondary Download Font by Font ID 2 43 x ESC 3 Select Default Secondary Font 2 43 ESC s B Secondary Font Stroke Weight 2 43 x ESC s H Secondary Font Pitch 2 42 x ESC s P Secondary Font Spacing 2 42 x ESC s S Secondary Font Style 2 42 x ESC s T Secondary Font Typeface Selection 2 43 x FSC sg V Secondary Font Height Point Size 2 42 x ESC s Widata Load Font Header 2 45 ESC pstM Set Raster Compression Mode 2 50 s A 4 PCL Support Table A 1 PCL Emulation Commands Continued 4 Supported Printer X Not Supported Page numbers reference command descriptions 5 N 5 E commend Function ESC h V data Transfer Raster Data by Plane 2 49 ESC pstWI data Transfer Raster Data by Row Block 2 50 ESC pgy Y Offset 2 49 ESC c A Horizontal Rectangle Size in PCL Units 2 47 ESC estg Vertical Rect
85. Raster Height Source Sets the height of the clip window for raster graphics Number of Data Bytes ESC r A Start Raster Graphics 0 Left Graphics Margin at 0 Default Sets the left margin for raster graphics 1 Current Cursor Position 2 At logical left page limit with scaling On 3 At current cursor position with scaling On ESC pstV data Transfer Raster Data by Plane This command is used when the raster data is encoded by plane as specified by the Simple Color command or the Configure Image Data command The command sends each plane in the row except the last it Number of Raster Lines Y Offset Moves the cursor position down by the specified number of raster lines Table 2 22 Raster Graphics Continued Command Parameters Function Result ESC p4M 0 Uncoded Default 1 Run Length Encoded 2 Tagged Image File Format TIFF byte 3 Delta Row 5 Adaptive Compression 9 Replacement Delta Row 999 Zlib 1002 Group 4 1003 Group 3 one dimensional 1004 Group 3 two dimensional K 2 1005 Group 3 two dimensional K 4 1006 TIFF word 16 bit 1007 TIFF double word 32 bit 1008 Adaptive compression includes TIFF word and TIFF double word Set Raster Compression Mode Identifies the compression mode the host uses to transfer RIG data For instance this command can be run length encoding or TIFF encoding Note For further information see Raster Compre
86. Redial 0 to 14 5 SET only Note Status Readback commands return a when no SET command has modified the LFAXREDIAL variable For more information see Status Readback Commands on page 3 54 LFAXREDIALFREQUENCY Fax Redial 1 to 200 3 SET only Frequency Note Status Readback commands return a when no SET command has modified the LFAXREDIALFREQUENCY variable For more information see Status Readback Commands on page 3 54 LFAXTRANSMISSIONLOG Fax PRINT DONOTPRINT PRINTERROR PRINTERROR SET only ER Note Status Readback commands return a when 98 SET command has modified the LFAXTRANSMISSIONLOG variable For more information see Status Readback Commands on page 3 54 LFEEDERPAPERTYPE Envelope ENVELOPE CUSTOMTYPE1 CUSTOMTYPE2 ENVELOPE Feeder Paper CUSTOMTYPES CUSTOMTYPE4 CUSTOMTYPE5 Type CUSTOMTYPES name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types The text string is truncated to 24 characters LGLOSSYLOADING Glossy Paper OFF DUPLEX OFF Loading Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Function Selections Factory Default LGLOSSYOUTPUTBIN Assign Type UPPER LOWER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 UPPER Bin Glossy OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBINS OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBINS OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBINT OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBINS OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name is a variab
87. Removable 4 90 V Searchable 4 90 SearchOrder 4 90 V Type 4 90 V Writeable 4 90 C 23 Table C 6 Device Parameters Continued 4 Supported Printer Model X Not Supported NAT Page numbers reference parameter descriptions E 3 E o Key Page Device Parameters for the Parameters Device rom BlockSize 4 91 Free 4 91 4 91 4 InitializeAction 4 91 LogicalSize 4 91 V Mounted 4 91 PhysicalSize 4 91 V Removable 4 91 V Searchable 4 91 V SearchOrder 4 91 4 Type 4 91 4 Writeable 4 91 V Table C 7 PostScript Commands Message Keys Supported Model X Not Supported 5 Page numbers reference status message key and value descriptions 53 Key job 4 93 status 493 v Index A airflow requirement 7 1 altitude specifications 7 4 atmospheric pressure 7 4 attendance messages PJL 3 63 3 67 3 72 3 75 B bibliography 1 5 C clearance requirements 7 3 communications computer to printer 8 8 ports setting up 8 2 Windows 2000 8 4 Windows 95 98 Me 8 2 Windows NT 4 0 8 3 Windows XP 8 5 printer to computer 8 13 protocols 8 23 compatibility modes backward and forward Lexmark E323 2 9 2 14 Lexmark T634 2 9 compression description raster image graphics 2 60 raster compression mode command 2 60 set raster com
88. Required 3 63 30018 56 Standard Serial Disabled Standard Serial Disabled Intervention Required 3 64 30018 56 Serial slot gt Port Serial Option Disabled Disabled Intervention Required 3 64 30018 56 Std Parallel Port Disabled PJL Support Table B 10 PJL Messages for Auto Continuable Conditions Continued y Supported X Not Supported Page numbers reference message descriptions Message Status Code Return String Printer Model LE E Unformatted Disk Intervention Required 3 64 30018 56 Parallel Port Disabled x Parallel Port Disabled Intervention Required 3 64 30018 56 Parallel Port x Disabled x Parallel Port Error Intervention Required 3 64 30018 56 Standard USB Port Standard USB Disabled Disabled Intervention Required 3 64 30019 35 Res Save Off Deficient x Resource Save Off Memory Deficient Memory Intervention Required 3 64 30026 55 Insufficient Fax Buffer x Insufficient Fax Buffer Intervention Required 3 64 30027 54 Std Par ENA Connection x Std Par ENA Connection Lost Lost Intervention Required 3 64 30027 56 Std Parallel Port Disabled x Std Parallel Port Disabled Intervention Required 3 64 30029 36 Resolution Reduced x Resolution Reduced Intervention Required 3 64 30031 Print Jobs on Disk or x Print Jobs on Disk Request Print Jobs on Disk Go Stop Intervention
89. Set Macro ID 2 45 ESCQkK G Set Line Termination 2 41 ESC Set Horizontal Motion Index 2 38 ESCQK S Select Primary and Secondary Pitch 2 44 5 ka W Text Scale Mode 2 39 x ESC RHA Page Size 2 36 ESC amp RC Set Vertical Motion Index 2 38 ESC amp R D Set Line Spacing 2 39 ESC Set Top Margin 2 37 ESCg gp Set Text Length 2 38 ESC amp L G Set Output Bin 2 38 ESC Paper Source 2 36 ESCg Skip Perforation 2 38 ESC 040 Select Orientation 2 37 ESC amp 0 2 56 x ESC8 f gp Set Page Length 2 39 ESCa 5 Simplex Duplex Print 2 34 V ESCg Job Separation 2 37 x ESC 48 Long Edge Offset Registration 2 34 ESC amp f gx Number of Copies 2 34 ESCg 07 Short Edge Offset Registration 2 34 ESC8gn W operation Alphanumeric ID 2 40 4 string id ESCA n C Palette Control 2 52 A 3 PCL Support Table A 1 PCL Emulation Commands Continued Supported Printer X Not Supported Page numbers reference command descriptions LE command Function E ESCg n Palette Control ID 2 52 ESC amp p S Select Palette 2 52 5 Transparent Print Data 2 43 ESCQr F Flush All Pages 2 54 V ESC SHC End Of Line Text Wrap 2 55 4 ESC Text Parsing Method 2 44 ESCQ u D Unit of Measure 2 35 ESC
90. TIMED 3 60 PJL Support Table B 10 PJL Messages for Auto Continuable Conditions Supported X Not Supported Page numbers reference message descriptions Message Status Code Return String LE N E Std Parallel Port Disabled Intervention Required 3 63 30014 50 PPDS Font Error PPDS Font Error Intervention Required 3 63 30016 37 Insufficient Collation Insufficient Collation Area Area Intervention Required 3 63 30016 37 Insufficient Defrag Insufficient Defragment Memory Memory Intervention Required 3 63 30016 37 Insufficient Memory Insufficient Memory Intervention Required 3 63 30016 38 Memory Full Memory Full Intervention Required 3 63 30016 Held Jobs May Not Be Held Jobs May Not Be Restored Restored Intervention Required 3 63 30016 57 Configuration Change Configuration Change Intervention Required 3 63 30017 39 Complex Page Complex Page Intervention Required 3 63 30018 54 Standard Serial Error Standard Serial Error Intervention Required 3 63 30018 54 Serial Option slot gt Serial Option Error error Intervention Required 3 63 30018 54 Parallel Error Parallel Error Intervention Required 3 65 30018 54 Std Network Software Network Software Error Error Intervention Required 3 63 30018 54 Std Ser Fax Connection Standard Serial Fax Lost Connection Lost Intervention
91. Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages The following variables are unique to some Lexmark printers and are supported for both PCL emulation and PostScript emulation Therefore the co mmand modi f ier val ue parameter should not be specified To determine which variables your printer supports see Table B 2 Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages on page B 4 Function Selections Factory Default LACTIVEBINRESET Active Bin MANUAL AUTOMATIC MANUAL DEFAULT only neset LADVANCEDSTATUS Advanced ON OFF ON DEFAULT only Status ON enables parallel bidirectional support Port specific OFF disables parallel bidirectional support LALARMCONTROL Alarm Control OFF SINGLE CONTINUOUS SINGLE DEFAULT only LAUTOCRLF Auto CR after ON OFF OFF LF LAUTOLFCR Auto LF after ON OFF OFF CR LBLANKPAGES Blank Pages DONOTPRINT PRINT DONOTPRINT Note Some printers have a fixed value of DONOTPRINT LBONDLENGTH Bond Length NORMAL SHORT NORMAL DEFAULT only LBONDLOADING Bond Paper OFF DUPLEX OFF DEFAULT only Loading Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Function Selections Factory Default LBONDOUTBIN Assign UPPER LOWER DISABLED OPTIONALOUTBIN1 UPPER DEFAULT only Type Bin Bond OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBINS DISABLED y OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 Model speci
92. True False EthernetAddress string Read only The Ethernet address of the Ethernet internal print server Legal value Any string of 17 or fewer non null characters EtherTalkType string The type of the EtherTalk interface entity name This parameter also sets the LocalTalkType parameter to the same value The new value is returned by the appletalktype compatibility operator Legal value Any string of 32 or fewer non null characters Default value is LaserWriter Note Setting this variable does not affect the value for other physical internal print servers The statusdict string appletalktype is correct for the current job port EtherTalkZone string The zone of the EtherTalk interface entity name EtherTalkZone is read write only to RAM There is no NVRAM variable for EtherTalkZone Legal value Any string of 32 or fewer non null characters 4 77 PostScript Table 4 11 PostScript Emulation Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition Filtering name Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed Supported values are InterpreterBased None HasNames boolean Read only Always returns False Interpreter name Read only Supported values are PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS NodelD integer Read only On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data Supported values are True Data i
93. USCMYK EUROCMYK USCMYK US IMAGE CMYK Image EUROCMYK non US LMANUALENVELOPESIZE Manual 10 COM9 MONARCH DL C5 B5 COM10 DL Envelope OTHERENVELOPE Country specific default formatting size LMANUALENVELOPETYPE Manual ENVELOPE CUSTOMTYPE1 CUSTOMTYPE2 ENVELOPE Envelope Type CUSTOMTYPE3 CUSTOMTYPE4 CUSTOMTYPES CUSTOMTYPES name is a variable that allows for custom naming of custom print material types The text string is truncated to 24 characters LMANUALPAPERSIZE Manual Paper A3 A3 A4 A5 B4 BAPAPER B5PAPER LETTER A4 default CUSTOM EXECUTIVE FOLIO JISB4 JISB5 Country specific formatting size LEDGER LEGAL LETTER STATEMENT 11X17 LMANUALPAPERTYPE Manual Paper PLAIN COATED GLOSSY PHOTO PLAIN Type GREETINGCARD IRONON BOND CUSTOMTYPE3 TRANSPARENCY CARDSTOCK LABELS Model specific LETTERHEAD PREPRINTED COLORED ENVELOPE CUSTOMTYPE1 CUSTOMTYPE2 CUSTOMTYPE3 CUSTOMTYPE4 CUSTOMTYPE5 CUSTOMTYPES name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types The text string is truncated to 24 characters When queried the quotes are not returned around the string name The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name LMPFEEDERPAPERTYPE Multipurpose PLAIN COATED GLOSSY PHOTO CUSTOMTYPES Feeder Paper GREETINGCARD IRONON BOND CUSTOMTYPEA Type TRANSPARENCY CARDSTOCK LABELS CUSTOMTYPE6 LETTERHEAD PREPRINTED COLORE
94. a partition is defined this disk space is reserved for job buffering Enabling Job Buffering Once a partition is allocated job buffering to a disk may be enabled for each active link port You can enable job buffering from the operator panel menus if available or through MarkVision Professional You cannot enable a port before the partition is allocated When buffering is enabled from the printer operator panel a power on reset POR automatically occurs If buffering is enabled through MarkVision Professional you must perform a full power on reset before job buffering can occur Disabling Job Buffering When you disable job buffering it takes effect immediately on the port you disabled A POR is automatically performed when job buffering is disabled for any port from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional so the unused memory resources can be reallocated When buffering is disabled on a port any jobs on the disk are printed before normal processing of incoming jobs continues To delete or resize a job buffer partition first delete or print all jobs Then disable job buffering on all ports Finally delete or resize the job buffer partition Recovering from a Power Loss If the printer loses power the job being spooled to the disk may be lost Jobs already stored on the disk remain intact When power is restored you are asked if you want to print the jobs held in the buffer See your printer documentation
95. about PostScript emulation and explains PostScript emulation supplemental operators Chapter 5 Switching Languages Describes ways to switch printer languages and explains when you may want to choose one method over another Chapter 6 Flash Memory and Disk Provides information about using the flash memory and hard disk It describes how to manage printer memory store resources such as fonts and macros and manage files Introduction Chapter 7 Printer Specifications Lists printer specifications including information about hardware and environmental conditions Chapter 8 Printer Interfaces Provides information on printer interfaces including information about parallel and serial interface network support and communication protocols See the tables in the three appendixes to determine if your printer supports a particular PCL emulation PJL or PostScript emulation command The appendixes are Appendix A PCL Support Appendix B PJL Support Appendix C PostScript Support Introduction Navigational Tips If you are not familiar with PDF files the following tips may help you find the information you need To move forward and backward through this document Select an option under View in the menu bar at the top of the page Use the arrows in the toolbar at the top of the page or the up arrow and down arrow keys on the keyboard Press the Page Up and
96. all interface control signals and input data Interface conditions are based TTL levels printer outputs are totem pole TTL devices All printer input output I O are devices with an internal pull up resistor to 5 V Rise and fall times of each signal must be less than 1 500 nanoseconds ns without slope reversal Note For best results use the Lexmark 1 83 m 6 ft parallel cable part number 11K4078 The following illustration shows the pin assignments for connecting the 25 pin connector to the 36 pin connector The symbol indicates an active low signal The parallel interface consists of an 8 bit parallel data bus with the following characteristics Uses 17 of the 36 positions on the printer connector as follows The host system controls 12 lines which it uses to send data and com mands to the printer The printer controls five lines The printer uses two lines to notify the com puter when data is transferred successfully and three lines to report printer status e Controls synchronization with an externally supplied STROBE pulse Interfaces e Controls data flow control with BUSY and ACKNLG signals Does not carry out data transfer by ignoring the BUSY or ACKNLG signal The system can carry out data transfer to the printer only when the level of the BUSY signal is low and after confirming the ACKNLG signal is high Uses standard transistor transistor logic TTL levels for all interface c
97. alphanumeric characters in the ASCII printable range X 20 through X FE excluding the characters and Maximum length is 80 characters characters beyond 80 characters are truncated JobTimeout integer Number of seconds a print job executes before it is terminated and a PostScript emulation timeout error is generated Set to 0 to disable job timeout JobTimeout is initialized to the value of the JobTimeout system parameter at the beginning of each job Legal value Any non negative integer MaxDictStack integer Maximum elements in a dictionary stack Legal value Any integer between 40 and 255 inclusive MaxExecStack integer Maximum elements in the execution stack Legal value Any integer greater than or equal to 75 MaxFontltem integer Maximum number of bytes occupied by the pixel array of a single character in the font cache There is an upper limit dependent on the MaxFontCache system parameter and the amount of printer memory Legal values Any non negative integer MaxFormltem integer Maximum number of bytes occupied by a single cached form Legal value Any integer between zero and half of RamSize MaxLocalVM integer Maximum bytes occupied by values in local VM Legal value Any integer greater than or equal to 76800 or the amount of local VM currently in use plus a small margin PostScript Table 4 9 PostScript Emulation User Parameters Continued Key Type Def
98. and print area dimensions for all paper and envelope sizes the Lexmark C760 and C762 printer supports For more information about the printable areas and logical pages for PCL emulation see Printable Areas on page 2 3 Table 2 1 Lexmark C760 and C762 Paper and Envelope Dimensions Paper Envelope Selection Dimensions Dimensions by Area pels Page Size Parameters inches A B C D E F Paper 13 613 A5 148 x 210 5 83 x 8 27 3496 4960 3196 4720 142 118 0 100 100 12 45 612 JIS B5 Paper 182 x 257 7 2 x 10 1 4300 6070 4000 5830 150 120 O 100 100 26 626 4 198 mm 210 x 297 8 3 x 11 7 4960 7014 4676 6778 142 118 0 80 80 26 626 A4 203 mm 210 x 297 8 3 x 11 7 4960 7014 4800 6778 80 1118 0 80 80 1 601 Executive 184 x 267 7 25 x 10 5 4350 6300 4050 6060 150 120 O 100 100 2 602 Letter 216 x 279 8 5 x 11 5100 6600 4800 6360 150 120 O 100 100 3 603 Legal 216 x 356 8 5x 14 5100 8400 4800 8160 150 120 O 100 100 4 or 10 Folio 216 x 330 8 5 x 13 5100 7800 4800 7560 150 120 O 100 100 15 Statement 139 7 x 245 9 5 5x8 5 3300 5100 3000 4860 150 120 O 100 100 101 Universal 216 x 356 8 5x14 150 120 0 100 100 6 or 11 11x17 431 8 x 279 4 17x 11 6600 10200 6300 9960 150 120 0 100 100 Ledger Pel dimensions are for 6
99. and processed False Data is lost OutputDevice string Read only PCLSmartSwitch boolean Supported values are True PCL SmartSwitch is set to On False PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off For more information see Using SmartSwitch on page 2 1 PortLocation string Read only Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set Supported values are Standard Port Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2 Option Slot 3 Option Slot 4 4 73 PostScript Table 4 11 PostScript Emulation Device Parameters Continued Key Definition PSSmartSwitch boolean Supported values are True PS SmartSwitch is set to On False PS SmartSwitch is set to Off For more information see Using SmartSwitch on page 4 1 Type name Read only Always returns the value of Communications Device Parameters for the Communication Device Serial SerialA SerialB SerialC SerialD Serial_NV and Serial_Pending contain the same parameters Baud integer Returns the value of the Baud menu item CheckParity boolean Read only Designates whether parity checking is done on the incoming data Supported values are True Parity menu item set to Even or Odd False Parity menu item set to None or Ignore DataBits integer Returns the value of the Data Bits menu item DelayedOutputClose boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print jo
100. ashdevi ce File storage media flash flashl filename FILENAME fname OLDFILENAME fname NEWFILENAME fname is comprised of a filename a unique identifier for a file and a filetype which specifies the type of file The format is filename filetype Thefilename must be one of the following macro 10 PCL macros symbol set ID PCL symbol sets font ID PCL fonts actual filename data Type 1 fonts demo files case sensitive The fil et ype must be one of the following t1 PostScript font sFnt5 PCL scalable font bFnt5 PCL bitmap font MAC5 PCL macro data User Data typel PostScript font demo Demo p5scalable PCL scalable font p5bit map PCL bitmap font p5macro PCL macro p5symset PCL symbol set ppdsbm PPDS bitmap font xl macro PCL XL user stream All fname specifications must be enclosed in quotation marks and cannot exceed 127 characters If the file is password protected the password must be provided in order to unlock the file For additional information about passwords see File and Device Protection Commands on page 3 93 Table 3 22 Variables for Flash and Disk File and Password Commands Continued Parameter location Syntax Description START 1 on The location in the file to begin writing or reading Use an integer that represents an offset in bytes from the beginning of the file Optional for both LREADFILE and LWRITEFILE command
101. be turned off by using the USTATUS command on each variable Syntax P L USTATUSOFF lt CR gt lt LF gt Status Message Format The format of the returned information from the INFO STATUS USTATUS DEVICE and USTATUS TIMED commands is described in this section Information Messages Information messages are returned in this form CODE status code DISPLAY display string in double quotes ONLINE online status Table 3 12 PJL Information Messages Printer State Status Code Display String Online Status Ready 10001 Ready TRUE Ready 10001 RDYMSG TRUE Ready with Ink Low 10006 88 Ink Low TRUE Not Ready 10002 Not Ready FALSE In the Menus 10002 Not Ready FALSE Printer reset 10005 Resetting the Printer FALSE Ready with Toner Low 10006 88 Toner Low TRUE Ready with Toner Low 10006 88 Yellow Toner Low TRUE Ready with Toner Low 10006 88 Magenta Toner Low TRUE Ready with Toner Low 10006 88 Cyan Toner Low TRUE Ready with Toner Low 10006 88 Black Toner Low TRUE Ready with Toner Low 10006 88 Color Print Cartridge Low TRUE Ready with Toner Low 10006 88 Black Print Cartridge Low TRUE Ready with Toner Low 10006 88 Photo Print Cartridge Low TRUE Ready with Replace Toner 10006 Replace Toner TRUE Ready with Replace PC Kit 10006 Replace PC Kit TRUE Ready with Replace Fuser 10006 Replace Fuser TRUE x represents an input source code For more information on input source code
102. command that is the X in the UEL syntax must be immediately followed by the L of the next PUL command ENTER LANGUAGE Command This command causes the printer to enter the specified language such as PCL emulation PostScript emulation or PPDS Syntax PJL ENTER LANGUAGE language CR LF Notes e language ISPCL PCL3 PCLXL PostScript Or PPDS You can use uppercase lowercase or mixed case 8PJ L must be uppercase all others can be mixed or lowercase Example P L ENTER LANGUAGE PostScript CR LF enters PostScript emulation COMMENT Command This command lets you add descriptive comments to your PJL job Syntax 1 COMMENT words lt CR gt Notes When the printer receives this command it is ignored The words parameter can be any combination of printable characters spaces and horizontal tabs The COMMENT command is terminated by the line feed character lt LF gt Job Separation Commands Your printer supports the PJL JOB and EOJ commands When the printer receives a JOB command the print timeout is multiplied by 10 when the printer receives a PJL EOJ command the print timeout is reset to the user default The Waiting message appears on the printer operator panel display or through MarkVision Professional until an EOJ command is received or until the print timeout expires Your printer also supports the PASSWORD parameter for the PJL JOB command
103. common for PostScript emulation 3 51 environment 3 7 printer unique for all printer languages 3 19 printer unique for PCL emulation 3 49 W weight printer 7 3 whole page setting 2 6 X XON XOFF protocol 8 23 RS 232C 8 26 X 15
104. current cursor position For example ESCga 6C Move to horizontal cursor position column six ESCga 6C Move six columns to the right of the current position ESCs a 6C Move six columns to the left of the current position Linking Commands You can combine PCL emulation commands by linking them f the first 3 bytes of the commands are identical The combined short form sends the first 3 bytes only once in the string To combine commands Use the first 3 bytes characters of the command only once at the start of the command string Make the last letter of each command in the string lowercase Capitalize the last letter of the string For example notice that the first 3 bytes of these two commands are the same ESC Select 10 characters per inch F 7 s4099T Select Courier typeface To combine these two commands use this form ESC s10h4099T which is 3 bytes shorter than the long form ESC 51 0HESC s4099T You can combine more than two commands for example you can add Select Stroke Weight Bold 559 5 3B to the previous two commands ESC 810h3b4099T or in the long form ESC 51 OHESC s 3BESC s4099T PCL Emulation Commands See the following tables for a listing of the commands grouped by function To determine which commands your printer supports see Table A 1 PCL Emulation Commands on page A 1 PCL Emulation Commands by Function Table 2 11 Job Control Command Parameters Function
105. integer has no meaning Type name Read only Always returns the value of FileSystem Writeable boolean Read only Indicates if the files on the ROM can be opened for write access Always False PostScript Status and Error Messages Printers return PostScript emulation error messages and status information to the computer through any active interface To send information to the computer through the parallel interface configure the interface as bidirectional Tagged Binary Not Active Your printer responds and processes a Ctrl T x 14 command as a status query when The PostScript emulation interpreter is processing a print job The printer is idle and the PostScript emulation interpreter is the selected interpreter Your printer responds and processes a Ctrl T x 14 command as normal data and not a status query when Another interpreter is processing a print job The printer is idle and another interpreter is the selected interpreter Notes Status queries cannot be received while the printer is in an error state Your printer always selects the PostScript emulation interpreter and pro cesses a Ctrl T x 14 command as a status query when data is received through the LocalTalk interface Tagged Binary Active When Tagged Binary is active your printer always responds to a Ctrl T x 14 command as a status query and selects the PostScript emulation interpreter to process the curre
106. is a text string which is truncated to 20 characters A null value 55 indicates no station ID is specified If no station name is specified the default station name of the printer is used LDOWNLOADTARGET Command This command specifies which device is the target for downloaded files The target can be RAM flash or disk Syntax PJL SET LDOWNLOADTARGET variable CR LF File Commands for Flash or Disk Use the following commands to manage resources on flash and disk devices LOPENFILE LCLOSEFILE LREADFILE LWRITEFILE LRUNFILE LRENAMEFILE e LDELETEFILE LFORMAT LDEFRAG Syntax 1 LOPENFILE DEVI CE filedevice FILENAME f name ACCESS accesstype CR lt LF gt See Chapter 6 Flash Memory and Disk for more information 3 87 Table 3 22 lists the parameters used with most of the commands Additional parameters are noted in the description of each command Table 3 22 Variables for Flash and Disk File and Password Commands Parameter accesstype Syntax ACCESS accesstype Description One of the following access types must be specified when a file is opened RO Open for read only The file must already exist on the specified device WO Create a new file If the file already exists its contents will be discarded and a new file will be created RW Open for reading and writing The file must already exist AP Open for reading and writing and position the file po
107. is only valid when a hard disk is installed 200 Disk ESC s U Set Status Readback Location Unit 0 All Sets the status location unit to the specified value 1 eni LEE otherwise The location unit is used along with the location type to identify a location for the Inquire Status Readback Entity command 2 If download permanent otherwise next higher priority Note The unit value is interpreted differently depending on the location type specified Inquire Status Readback Entity 0 Font Returns the requested information set by Set Status Readback 1 Macro Location Type and Set Status Readback Location Unit 2 User defined pattern 3 Symbol set for unbound scalable fonts 4 Font extended ESC s1M Free Space Returns the total available memory and the largest available block of memory ESC amp rgF Flush All Pages 0 Flush all complete pages Holds print jobs in the print buffer until the current job finishes 1 Flush all pages printing ESC S X Echo 32767 to 32767 Returns back to host computer Table 2 25 Picture Frame Command Parameters Function Result ESC cHX Picture Frame Horizontal Size in Decipoints of Decipoints 0 to 32767 Specifies the horizontal dimension of the picture frame used when 1 Decipoint 1 720 inch printing a GL 2 plot ESC cHY Picture Frame Vertical Size in Decipoints of Decipoints 0 to 32767 Specifies the vertical dimension of the picture frame used when 1 Decipoint
108. is printed on the front side of a page sent from the new paper source When these operators are used it is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence lt lt PageSize x y I magingBBox null Policies lt lt PageSize 0 gt gt gt gt pagedevice where x y are the PageSize in points PostScript Table 4 2 Tray Selected with Tray Operators X Supported X Not Supported z 8 0 S 2 statementtray tray with statement size paper Tray Selected Operator Corresponding image size is set astray tray with A3 size paper x a4tray tray with A4 size paper abtray tray with A5 size paper V b4tray tray with B4 size paper x b5tray tray with B5 size paper V customtray tray with custom size paper x executivetray tray with executive size paper 4 foliotray tray with folio size paper ledgertray tray with ledger size paper x legaltray tray with legal size paper lettertray tray with letter size paper V x 11x17tray tray with 11 x 17 size paper 4 7 PostScript manualfeed manualfeed boolean def in statusdict indicates if a manual feed source has been selected The boolean value can be true prints from a manual feed source default false prints from an automatic feed source This boolean key can be redefined to affect manual feed for the current job If the value of the manualfeed operator or
109. list of available Ports Double click the communications port you want to configure ON CO OON Click the Properties button at the bottom of the screen The Communications Port Properties screen for this specific port displays For example if you select the COM1 port then the Communications Port COM1 Properties screen displays 9 Click the Port Settings tab 10 Fill out the fields for the following printer settings to make them match your printer settings Bits per second Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow Control Note For Flow Control select Hardware if you want DTR protocol or Xon Xoff for Xon Xoff protocol Interfaces 11 Click OK 12 Close all windows now that the port is set up Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows NT 4 0 In your Windows NT 4 0 application On the Menu bar click Start Click Settings Click Control Panel The Control Panel screen appears Double click the Ports icon The Ports screen appears Select the communications port you want to configure oo W N Click the Settings button The Settings screen for this specific port displays For example if you select the COM1 port then the Settings for COM1 screen displays 7 Fill out the fields for the following printer settings to make them match your printer settings Baud Rate Parity Stop bits Flow Control Note For Flow Control select Hardware if you want DTR protocol or Xo
110. more information Use RS 232C serial interface if the printer is more than 3 04 m 10 ft from the computer but less than 15 24 m 50 ft away You can also use a 6 1 m 20 ft Lexmark cable to connect a printer and a computer located up to 20 feet apart When using the serial interface your printer has the following differences from the serial interface on some other printers The printer returns XON XOFF with 2 stop bits in all cases The printer does not support DTR inversion Using the RS 232C Serial Interface This section describes how to use the RS 232C serial interface Interfaces How to Connect the RS 232C Serial Interface Use Lexmark serial cable P N 1038693 15 24 m or 50 ft to connect the serial interface RS 232C Serial Cable Pin Assignments The RS 232C serial cable appears as follows 25 Pin 25 Pin 13 25 D Shell D Shell 13 25 Male Female LT Lini Printer Computer Side Side Table 8 3 Dedicated Serial Connector Pin Assignments RS 232C Pin Signal Direction Description 1 GND Frame Ground 2 TXD Out Transmit Data The pin transmits data to your computer or terminal 3 RXD In Receive Data The pin receives data from your computer or terminal 4 RT
111. of the Parity menu item Supported values are Even Odd None Ignore If Parity is set to Ignore CheckParity is set to False and Parity becomes Even PCLSmartSwitch boolean Supported values are True PCL SmartSwitch is set to On False PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off For more information see Using SmartSwitch on page 2 1 PortLocation string Read only Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set Supported values are Standard Port Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2 Option Slot 3 PSSmartSwitch boolean Supported values are True PS SmartSwitch is set to On False PS SmartSwitch is set to Off For more information see Using SmartSwitch on page 4 1 RobustXon boolean Supported values are True RobustXon is set to On False RobustXon is set to Off SerialMode name Designates the serial communication configuration RS232C or RS422 Returns the value of the Serial RS 232 RS 422 menu item Supported values are RS232 RS422 Returns RS232 on a printer that is attached with a cable that does not support RS 422 4 75 PostScript Table 4 11 PostScript Emulation Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition StopBits integer Read only Supported values are 1 2 Type name Read only Always returns the value of Communications LocalTalkD Device Parameters for the Communication Device LocalTalk LocalTalkA LocalTalkB LocalTalkC
112. of the job 2 printing the second sides of the job When printing second sides of the job is specified a load manual duplex side 2 operator intervention condition will occur after the last page of the first sides is printed and prior to the first page of the second sides being printed While printing the second sides the printer s available paper sources are restricted to the automatic tray tray1 and the manual paper feeder for the remainder of the job or until the manual duplex mode value is changed Error stackunderflow typecheck setpapertray See page 4 8 PostScript setprintername string setprintername changes the PrinterName system parameter to the value of thestri ng The string value can be any string up to 32 characters This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence PrinterName string setsystemparams Errors invalidaccess limitcheck stackunderflow typecheck setquiet integer setquiet changes the user default setting of the PowerSave page device parameter The following integers are valid 0 Power Saver Off 110120 or1 to 240 Model specific Number of minutes elapsed after last page prints before Power Saver is invoked Any changes made by this operator are not active until the end of the print job Note Some printer models released in the year 2000 or later designated as Energy Star printers cannot have Power Saver disabled This oper
113. parameters will return their actual values when queried Legal Values 2 3 MaxDisplayAndSourceList integer Read only This value is always the same value as InstalledRam MaxDisplayList integer Read only See Table C 4 on page C 9 for the default value of your printer MaxFontCache integer Read only See Table C 4 on page C 9 for the default value of your printer MaxFormCache integer Maximum bytes occupied by the form cache Legal value Any non negative integer MaxlmageBuffer integer Read only See Table C 4 on page C 9 for the default value of your printer MaxOutlineCache integer Read only See Table C 4 on page C 9 for the default value of your printer MaxPatternCache integer Maximum bytes occupied by the pattern cache Legal value Any non negative integer MaxPermanentVM integer Read only See Table C 4 on page C 9 for the default value of your printer MaxRasterMemory integer Read only See Table C 4 on page C 9 for the default value of your printer MaxScreenStorage integer Read only See Table C 4 on page C 9 for the default value of your printer These parameters are Lexmark specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 2016 These parameters are available with the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010 3 These parameters are Lexmark specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010 P
114. setting Notice that a small border appears at the edges of the printed page and the image is slightly compressed Physical Page Edge Formatted Image with Fit to Page Printed Image with Fit to Page Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark C760 and C762 Your printer has 91 resident fonts in PCL emulation including 89 scalable fonts and two bitmapped fonts Several parameters are used to select a font from the data stream These include symbol set spacing point or pitch style weight and typeface number For scalable fonts you can vary the size of a font by specifying pitch or point size For bitmapped fonts you must choose the pitch or point size listed on the font sample pages You can print the font sample pages using PUL command see LPRINTPCLFONTS on page 3 83 or through MarkVision Professional network models only See your printer documentation for more information A symbol set defines which characters are available for a font and the code point for each of these characters Your printer supports 88 resident symbol sets The tables beginning on page 2 10 show the symbol sets available for each font in PCL emulation Not all fonts support all symbol sets You can select a font as the PCL emulation default through MarkVision Professional network models only See your printer documentation for more information The fonts are divided into three major groups The first 47 fonts RO to R46 shown on
115. text string that is truncated to 24 characters See Table B 2 Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages on page B 4 for the default value for your printer PLAIN CUSTOMTYPES3 Model specific LTRAY4PAPERTYPE Tray 4 Paper Type PLAIN COATED GLOSSY PHOTO GREETINGCARD IRONON BOND TRANSPARENCY CARDSTOCK LABELS LETTERHEAD PREPRINTED COLORED ENVELOPE CUSTOMTYPE1 CUSTOMTYPE2 CUSTOMTYPE3 CUSTOMTYPE4 CUSTOMTYPE5 CUSTOMTYPES name name is a text string that is truncated to 24 characters PLAIN CUSTOMTYPE4 Model specific LTRAYSPAPERTYPE Tray 5 Paper Type PLAIN COATED GLOSSY PHOTO GREETINGCARD IRONON BOND TRANSPARENCY CARDSTOCK LABELS LETTERHEAD PREPRINTED COLORED ENVELOPE CUSTOMTYPE1 CUSTOMTYPE2 CUSTOMTYPE3 CUSTOMTYPE4 CUSTOMTYPE5 CUSTOMTYPES name name is a text string that is truncated to 24 characters PLAIN CUSTOMTYPE5 Model specific LTRAY1RENUMBER Tray 1 Renumber OFF TRAY2 TRAY3 TRAY4 TRAY5 MPFEEDER OFF LTYPE1FONTS Enables Type 1 fonts for PCL emulation OFF ON ON LUSDEFAULTS DEFAULT only US non US defaults US NONUS US NONUS Country specific Common Variables for PCL Emulation Note The word common applies to those variables common to both your printer and the Hewlett Packard Company s LaserJet printers Use these variables only for PCL emulation The command mod
116. the tray to select if possible whether it is the best match or not Policies may be consulted to determine the selection For example assume there is legal size paper in Tray 1 and letter size paper in all the other trays and the Policy for the PageSize page device parameter is 1 The command PageSize 612 1008 MediaPosition 1 setpagedevice selects Tray 2 even though Tray 1 is a perfect match because the PageSize Policy of 1 allows the PageSize to be ignored MediaType string name Indicates the type of the current media The value of the string is arbitrary and or null may describe any attribute not already defined by size color or weight MediaWeight integer or Specifies the weight of the current media in g m The value is either null or a null number NumCopies integer or Specifies the number of copies of each page that should be printed If the value is null null the current value of copies determines the number of copies to print Nup boolean Determines if Nup is On or Off Use the Nup function to print multiple page images on a single page where the value of N refers to the number of pages For example 2 Up means two page images are printed on one page True Nup is On and the NupDetails parameters are active False Nup is Off For some printers the value of Nup is set through the Multipage Printing menu item For more information about multipage printing Nup see your printer documentation
117. the value of the DefaultPageSizePolicy key in the DeviceRenderingInfo dictionary If the SubstituteSize parameter from the DeviceRenderinglnfo dictionary is set to a value other than Off and an installed source has installed media which may be substituted for the requested media the effective policy executed is 3 If the SubstituteSize parameter from the DeviceRenderinglInfo dictionary is set to a value other than Off and a media substitution cannot be made the effective policy executed is the value of the DefaultPageSizePolicy key the DeviceRenderingInfo dictionary 4 PolicyNotFound is an integer that specifies which recovery action to use when a requested feature other than PageSize cannot be matched with any key in the Policies dictionary The actions are 0 Generate a configurationerror 1 Ignore the requested feature default 2 Interact with a person or print manager PolicyReport is a procedure that is called when a successful setpagedevice is finished The procedure consults policies to process unsatisfied feature requests if needed Default value is PostRenderingEnhance boolean Always True to indicate that PostRenderingEnhanceDetails is enabled PostScript Table 4 8 Page Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition PostRenderingEnhance dictionary Describes enhancements that are made to the output after the page has been Details held in memory REValue is an in
118. transfer parameter so that each data frame contains 7 or 8 data bits However your printer is an 8 bit printer characters controls and all points addressable APA graphics need 8 bits of data If you select 7 bit data transfer some unexpected characters might print Data Transmission The list of acceptable data transfer rates in bits per second can be accessed from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional See your printer documentation for more information Data Bits The printer sends or receives 7 or 8 data bits in each transmission frame depending on which one is selected Interfaces Start and Stop Bits The printer receives data with 1 start bit and either 1 or 2 stop bits The printer always sends 1 start and 2 stop bits Parity There are four possible parity settings Odd Even None and Ignore Odd The port expects to receive data frames with an odd number of logical 1 s per byte The printer transmits XOFF and XON with odd parity If the printer detects a parity error the port sends X 5F to the printer instead of the character sent by the host system Even The port expects to receive data frames with an even number of logical 1 s per byte The port transmits XOFF and XON with even parity If the port detects a parity error the port sends an inverted question mark to the printer instead of the character sent by the host system None The port expects no parity bit when it receives dat
119. 0 V TokenTalkType 4 81 V Type 4 81 V Zone 4 81 x Table C 6 Device Parameters Continued 4 Supported X Not Supported Page numbers reference parameter descriptions C 18 PostScript Support Printer Model T640 T642 T644 Key Device Parameters for the Communication Device AppSocket AppSocketA AppSocketB AppSocketD DelayedOutputClose 4 81 P4 Enabled 4 81 Filtering 4 81 HasNames 4 81 V Interpreter 4 81 V On 4 81 v PortLocation 4 81 V Type 4 81 Device Parameters for the Communication Device RemotePrinter RemotePrinterA RemotePrinterB RemotePrinterC RemotePrinterD DelayedOutputClose 4 82 Enabled 4 82 V Filtering 4 82 HasNames 4 82 V Interpreter 4 82 4 82 4 PortLocation 4 82 V Type 4 82 V Device Parameters for the Communication Device PrintServer PrintServerA PrintServerB PrintServerC PrintServerD DelayedOutputClose 4 83 P4 Enabled 4 83 V Filtering 4 83 4 HasNames 4 83 Interpreter 4 83 4 83 C 19 597741777 Table C 6 Device Parameters Continued 4 Supported Printer X Not Supported E nsn Page numbers reference parameter descriptions B LE PortLocation 4 83 V Type 4 83 4 Device Paramete
120. 00 dpi Page Size Parameters are explained in Table 2 12 on page 2 36 The width of the logical page for A4 paper can be changed from the printer operator panel or your software application 4 Paper ID 99 will be supported for backward compatibility with other Lexmark printers Paper ID 99 has the same logical paper size as ID 100 compatible with HP LaserJet 5Si 5SiMx but is 8 pels wider than the Lexmark 4039 Table 2 1 Lexmark C760 and C762 Paper and Envelope Dimensions Paper Envelope Selection Dimensions Dimensions by Area pels Page Size Parameters inches A B C D E F Envelope 90 DL 220 x 110 8 66 x 4 33 2598 5196 2314 4960 142 118 0 100 100 91 C5 229 x 162 9 02 6 38 3826 5408 2542 5172 142 118 0 100 100 994 100 B5 Envelope 250 x 176 9 84 x 6 93 4156 5904 3872 5668 142 118 O 100 100 600 Other 216 x 356 8 5x14 5100 8400 4800 8160 150 120 O 100 100 89 9 9 225 x 98 8 875 x 3 875 2326 5324 2024 5084 150 120 0 100 100 81 10 Com 10 241 x 105 9 5 4 125 2474 5700 2174 5460 150 120 0 100 100 80 7 3 4 2326 4500 2024 4260 150 120 0 100 100 1 Pel dimensions are for 600 dpi Page Size Parameters are explained in Table 2 12 on page 2 36 3 The width of the logical page for A4 paper can be changed from t
121. 098 2 898 2 098 2 uelBamson ysiueg 8 24 2 8 6 une 21 6988 OSI t 6 VIN23 une L 6988 OSI 86 une 0 5 Typeface Symbol Set SNNA TLNINA 4 8NVINOH PJL Value Symbol Set ID N N N N N N N N N N N N N gt N N N N 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 2141414141414141414141414141414141414141141141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141414141414 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 4141414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141 4 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141141411141414 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 414141414141414141414141414141414141411414141141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141141141141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141141 41141414 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141141 41141414 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 4141414141414141414141 41414141 414141414114141414 4141414141414141414141414141414141414114141141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 4141414141414
122. 1 JOBNAME 3 14 JOBOFFSET 3 15 LAAWIDTH 3 49 LACTIVEBINRESET 3 19 LADVANCEDSTATUS 3 19 LALARMCONTROL 3 19 LANG 3 15 LASSIGNFEEDER 3 49 LASSIGNMANUALENVELOPE 3 49 LASSIGNMANUALPAPER 3 49 LASSIGNMPFEEDER 3 49 LASSIGNTRAY1 3 50 LASSIGNTRAY2 3 50 LASSIGNTRAYS 3 50 LASSIGNTRAY4 3 50 LASSIGNTRAY5 3 50 LAUTOCRLF 3 19 LAUTOLFCR 3 19 LBITMAPROUNDING 3 50 LBLANKPAGES 3 19 LBONDLENGTH 3 19 LBONDLOADING 3 19 LBONDOUTBIN 3 20 LBONDTEXTURE 3 20 LBONDWEIGHT 3 20 LBWLOCK 3 20 LCANCEL 3 20 LCARDSTOCKLENGTH 3 20 LCARDSTOCKLOADING 3 20 LCARDSTOCKOUTBIN 3 21 LCARDSTOCKTEXTURE 3 21 LCARDSTOCKWEIGHT 3 21 LCOLLATION 3 21 LCOLORCORRECTION 3 21 LCOLOREDLENGTH 3 21 LCOLOREDLOADING 3 22 LCOLOREDOUTBIN 3 22 LCOLOREDTEXTURE 3 22 LCOLOREDWEIGHT 3 22 LCOLOREXTENSIONS 3 50 LCOLORMODEL 3 22 LCUSTOMPAPERFEED 3 23 LCUSTOMPAPERHEIGHT 3 23 LCUSTOMPAPERUNITS 3 22 LCUSTOMPAPERWIDTH 3 22 LCUSTOMTYPE1LENGTH 3 23 LCUSTOMTYPE1LOADING 3 23 LCUSTOMTYPE1MEDIA 3 23 LCUSTOMTYPE1NAME 3 23 LCUSTOMTYPE1OUTBIN 3 24 LCUSTOMTYPE1TEXTURE 3 24 LCUSTOMTYPE1WEIGHT 3 24 LCUSTOMTYPE2LENGTH 3 24 LCUSTOMTYPE2LOADING 3 24 LCUSTOMTYPE2MEDIA 3 24 LCUSTOMTYPE2NAME 3 25 LCUSTOMTYPE2OUTBIN 3 25 LCUSTOMTYPE2TEXTURE 3 25 LCUSTOMTYPE2WEIGHT 3 25 LCUSTOMTYPESLENGTH 3 25 LCUSTOMTYPES3LOADING 3 25 LCUSTOMTYPESMEDIA 3 26 LCUSTOMTYPE3NAME 3 26 LCUSTOMTYPESOUTBIN 3 26 LCUSTOMTYPESTEXTURE 3 26 LCUSTOMTYPE3WEIGHT 3 26 X 11 LCUSTOMTYPE4LENGTH 3 26 LCUSTOMTYPE4LOADING 3 27 L
123. 1414141414141414141414114141414 2141414141414141414141414141414141414141141141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141414141414 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 4141414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141 4 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 414141414141414141414141414141414141411414141141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141414141414 4141414141414141414141414141414141414141 41141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141414141141414 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 4141414141414141414141414141414141414114141141414 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141141 41141414 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141141141141414 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141414141141414 Times New Roman Times New Roman Italic Times New Roman Bold Times New Roman Bold Italic Arial Italic Arial Bold Arial Bold Italic Letter Gothic Letter Gothic Italic Letter Gothic Bold Univers Condensed Medium Univers Condensed Medium Italic Univers Condensed Bold Univers Condensed Bold Italic Garamond Antiqua Garamond Kursiv Garamond Halbfett Garamond Kursiv Halbfett 4 Indicates Typefac
124. 14141414141414141414141414114141414 4141414141414141414141414141414141414114141141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141414141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141141 41141414 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141141141141414 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141414141141414 Typeface Symbol Set PJL Value Symbol Set ID CG Omega Italic CG Omega Bold CG Omega Bold Italic Antique Olive Antique Olive Italic Antique Olive Bold Albertus Medium Albertus Extra Bold Clarendon Condensed Bold Marigold Coronet Helvetica Helvetica Italic Helvetica Bold Helvetica Bold Italic Helvetica Narrow Helvetica Narrow Italic Helvetica Narrow Bold Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic Palatino Roman 4 Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set X Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set 2 17 Table 2 5 PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Continued Latin 1 SN Banus 1213 0131 1991 3191 eIn u A ys q 1x91 1 Sd UOISU9 X3 UBUIOH 6 g uewoy dWOOISV jebnyog izeig dINODIaV 2 50 v00l Od 9IpJON 98 Od u2u814 ueiIpeue 98 2 198 2
125. 1414141414141414141414141414141141414 Palatino Italic Palatino Bold Palatino Bold Italic ITC Bookman Light ITC Bookman Light Italic ITC Bookman Demi ITC Bookman Demi Italic ITC Avant Garde Book ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique ITC Avant Garde Demi ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique Century Schoolbook Roman Century Schoolbook Italic Century Schoolbook Bold Century Schoolbook Bold Italic ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic CourierPS CourierPS Oblique CourierPS Bold CourierPS Bold Oblique 4 Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set X Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set Latin 1 5 PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Continued Table 2 SN Banus 1213 0131 1991 3191 eIn u A ys q 1x91 1 Sd UOISU9 X3 UBUIOH 6 g uewoy dWOOISV jebnyog izeig dINODIaV 2 50 v00l Od 9IpJON 98 Od u2u814 ueiIpeue 98 2 198 2 098 2 898 2 098 2 uelBamson ysiueg 8 24 2 8 6 une 21 6988 OSI t 6 VIN23 une L 6988 OSI 86 une 0 5 Typeface Symbol Set SNNA TLNINA 4 8NVINOH PJL Value Symbol Set ID
126. 21 1 or 2 byte characters interpreted as 1 byte or 2 byte character codes 31 1 or 2 byte characters 38 1 or 2 byte characters 1008 1 2 or 3 byte characters UTF 8 ESCA KHS Select Primary and Secondary Pitch 0 10 00 cpi Selects the pitch for the primary and secondary font 2 16 66 cpi 4 12 00 cpi Table 2 16 User Defined Symbol Set Command Parameters Function Result ESC c R Symbol Set ID Code Symbol Set ID 0 32767 Sets the symbol set identification for the symbol set downloaded Default 0 ESC fstW data Define Symbol Set number of data bytes Contains the data for the user defined symbol sets ESC estS Symbol Set Control 0 Delete all temporary and permanent Manages user defined symbol sets 1 Delete all temporary 2 Delete current ID 4 Make current temporary 5 Make current permanent Table 2 17 Font Creation Command Parameters Function Result number of data bytes mic Set Font ID Font ID 0 32767 Sets the identification number for the font being downloaded Default 0 ESC s Widata Load Font Header Downloads soft font header information Note Set Font ID before using this command number of data bytes Caution Font Control 0 Delete all temporary and permanent Manages soft fonts 1 Delete all temporary 2 Delete previous font ID 3 Delete previous specified character 4 Make previous font ID te
127. 24 characters Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on custom type 6 paper A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type Bin Custom Type 6 setting returns Assign Type Bin DINQUIRE or Custom Type 6 INQUIRE value setting Standard Bin UPPER Bin 1 OPTIONALOUTBIN1 Bin 2 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 Bin3 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 Bin 4 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 Bin5 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 Bin 6 OPTIONALOUTBING Bin 7 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 Bin 8 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 Bin 9 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 Bin 10 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Function Selections Factory Default LCUSTOMTYPE6TEXTURE Custom 6 SMOOTH NORMAL ROUGH NORMAL DEFAULT only LCUSTOMTYPE6WEIGHT Custom Type 6 LIGHT NORMAL HEAVY NORMAL DEFAULT only Weight LDOWNLOADTARGET Download RAM FLASH FLASH1 DISK DISK1 RAM SET only Target If the device specified as the download target is write or read write password protected the download target will not be changed LDRYTIMEDELAY Dry Time Delay 0 3 30 OFF AUTO OFF LDUPLICATEHELDJOBS Delete or Save DELETE SAVE DELETE Print and Hold Jobs LENVELOPEENHANCE Envelope ON OFF ON DEFAULT only Enhance LENVELOPELENGTH Envelope NORMAL SHORT NORMAL DEFAULT only Length LENVELOPEOUTBIN Assign UPPER LOWER DISABLED OPTIONALOUTBIN1 UPPER DEFAULT only Type Bin OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBI
128. 2dn C760 dtn C762 dtn Printer Side Left side 609 6 mm 24 in 609 6 mm 24 in Right side 381 mm 15 in 381 mm 15 in Front 508 mm 20 in 508 mm 20 in Rear 304 8 mm 12 in 304 8 mm 12 in Above 1066 8 cm 42 in 863 6 mm 34 in Note When installing the MFP leave enough room to access the paper tray s the multipurpose feeder the left side door and the rear exit door 7 4 Specifications Environmental Conditions Note When shipping or storing printers always pack the printer supplies cartridges and photoconductors for example separately Table 7 3 Temperature Ranges Printer Model Operating Value Shipping Storage Value C760 C762 15 6 32 2 60 90 F 40 43 3 C 40 to 110 Table 7 4 Humidity Ranges Printer Model Operating Value Shipping Storage Value C760 C762 8 80 8 80 Altitude Specifications Table 7 5 Printer Altitude Specifications Printer Model Altitude Above Sea Level C760 C762 0 3 048 m 10 000 feet Atmospheric Pressure 74 6 401 3 kPa 560 760 mmHg Interfaces CHAPTER 8 Printer Interfaces Interfaces connect your printer to other devices such as a computer The Lexmark C510 has a standard parallel connector also referred to as a Centronics type interface and or a USB connector The Lexmark X422 has an internal print server and a USB connector Some printers also offer a parallel interface option See your pr
129. 3 73 Remove Paper linked set name 3 73 Remove Paper All Output Bins 3 73 Remove Paper Output Bin bin 8 3 73 Remove Paper Standard Bin 3 73 paper jams 200 Paper Jam 3 76 201 Paper Jam 3 76 202 Paper Jam 3 76 203 Paper Jam 3 76 204 Paper Jam 3 76 205 Paper Jam 3 76 206 Paper Jam 3 76 207 Paper Jam 3 76 208 Paper Jam 3 76 X 8 251 Paper Jam 3 77 252 Paper Jam 3 77 253 Paper Jam 3 78 254 Paper Jam 3 78 255 Paper Jam 3 78 256 Paper Jam 3 78 257 Paper Jam 3 78 258 Paper Jam 3 78 259 Paper Jam 3 78 260 Paper Jam 3 78 261 Paper Jam 3 78 271 Paper Jam 3 78 272 Paper Jam 3 78 273 Paper Jam 3 78 27z Paper Jam 3 78 280 Paper Jam 3 78 281 Paper Jam 3 79 282 Paper Jam 3 79 283 Paper Jam 3 79 284 Paper Jam 3 79 285 Paper Jam 3 79 286 Paper Jam 3 79 287 Paper Jam 3 79 288 Paper Jam 3 79 289 Paper Jam 3 79 290 Paper Jam 3 79 291 Paper Jam 3 79 292 Paper Jam 3 79 293 Paper Jam 3 79 294 Paper Jam 3 80 295 Paper Jam 3 80 220 Paper Jam 3 76 221 Paper Jam 3 76 222 Paper Jam 3 76 230 Paper Jam 3 76 231 Paper Jam 3 76 232 Paper Jam 3 77 241 Paper Jam 3 77 242 Paper Jam 3 77 243 Paper Jam 3 77 244 Paper Jam 3 77 245 Paper Jam 3 77 246 Paper Jam 3 77 247 Paper Jam 3 77 248 Paper Jam 3 77 Priming Failed Retry 3 71 Reattach Bins bin x bin y gt 3 69 Reattach Envelope Feeder 3 69 Reattach MP Feeder 3 69 Reattach Output Bin bin gt 3 69 Replace Fuser 3 71 Replace Oil Coating Roll 3 71 Replace
130. 32 x LHOLEPUNCHALARM 3 32 x LHOLEPUNCHMODE 3 32 x LHONORINIT 3 32 LIMAGEBRIGHTNESS 3 32 x LIMAGECONTRAST 3 32 x LIMAGEENHANCE 3 32 v LIMAGEENHANCETYPE 3 33 LIMAGEORIENTATION 3 33 LIMAGESMOOTHING 3 33 x LINFEEDER x LINFEEDERSIZE 3 33 x LINKALERT 3 33 x LINMPFEEDERSIZE 3 33 LJAMRECOVERY 3 33 LLABELSLENGTH 3 33 x LLABELSLOADING 3 33 LLABELSOUTBIN 3 34 x LLABELSTEXTURE 3 34 LLABELSWEIGHT 3 34 LLEFTMARGINOFFSET 3 34 LLETTERHEADLENGTH 3 34 x B 8 PJL Support Table B 2 Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued 4 Supported Printer Model X Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions and are listed for supported variables only Default values are listed for exceptions only E Variable LLETTERHEADLOADING 3 34 x LLETTERHEADOUTBIN 3 35 x LLETTERHEADTEXTURE 3 35 LLETTERHEADWEIGHT 3 35 LMANUALCOLORRGBTEXT 3 35 x LMANUALCOLORRGBGRAPHICS 3 35 x LMANUALCOLORRGBIMAGE 3 35 x LMANUALCOLORCMYKTEXT 3 35 x LMANUALCOLORCMYKGRAPHICS 3 35 x LMANUALCOLORCMYKIMAGE 3 36 x LMANUALENVELOPESIZE 3 36 LMANUALENVELOPETYPE 3 36 LMANUALPAPERSIZE 3 36 LMANUALPAPERTYPE 3 36 LMAXSTATUSMSG x LMPFEEDERPAPERTYPE 3 36 x LMULTIPAGEBORDER 3 36 LMULTIPAGEORDER 3 36 LMULTIPAGEPRINT 3 37 LMULTI
131. 40037 31 PerfectFinish Missing FALSE PerfectFinish missing Intervention required 40037 87 PerfectFinish Empty FALSE PerfectFinish empty Intervention required 40038 84 Black Photo Dev Life Warning FALSE photo developer nearly exhausted Intervention required 40038 84 Color Photo Dev Life Warning FALSE photo developer nearly exhausted Intervention required 40038 84 All Photo Devs Exhausted FALSE color photo developer exhausted Intervention required 40038 84 Black Photo Dev Exhausted FALSE black photo developer exhausted Intervention required 40038 88 Toner Low FALSE toner low Intervention required 40038 88 Yellow Toner Low FALSE toner low Intervention required 40038 88 Magenta Toner Low FALSE toner low Intervention required 40038 88 Cyan Toner Low FALSE toner low Intervention required 40038 88 Black Toner Low FALSE toner low Intervention required 40038 88 Yellow Toner Empty FALSE toner empty Intervention required 40038 88 Cyan Toner Empty FALSE toner empty Intervention required 40038 88 Magenta Toner Empty FALSE toner empty Intervention required 40038 88 Black Toner Empty FALSE toner empty Intervention required 40038 88 Color Print Cartridge Low FALSE toner low Intervention required 40038 88 Black Print Cartridge Low FALSE toner low Intervention required 40038 88 Photo Print Cartridge Low FALSE toner low XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK where CMYK denotes Cyan Magenta Yellow an
132. 5 lt x lt 65355 These parameters are Lexmark specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 2016 These parameters are available with the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010 3 These parameters are Lexmark specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010 4 71 PostScript Device Parameters The currentdevparams operator returns a dictionary of the current values of the system parameters The setdevparams operator sets the values of the specified device parameters This operator requires a password if one is set Values supplied to setdevparams that are outside the range or limits for the specified integer parameter do not cause rangecheck or limitcheck errors The appropriate value is used Values supplied to setdevparams that do not match the type of the specified parameter cause typecheck errors e If a parameter name is not known an undefined error occurs Anattempt to change the value of a read only parameter has no effect on the parameter To specify the parameters for a specific communications channel use the appropriate suffix For example the serial channels are SerialA SerialB SerialC SerialD For some printers no A channel exists If Serial is specified it refers to the channel where the print job is sent For additional information on flash memory and disk see Chapter 6 Flash Mem
133. 6 gt 66 Computer Side 5 Side 7 6 8 amp gt 88 DATA 7 9 9 ACKNLG 10 10 36 Pin BUSY 25 Pin Connector 11 11 Connector PE 12668 12 12 SLCT eee gt Note Lexmark IEEE 1284 compliant cables 14 lt q 14 are supported up to 20 feet Cable lengths 32 ERROR 5 greater than 20 feet are not supported The INIT cable drawing to the left is a functional 31 4 16 representation of the Lexmark cables it does 36 lg 2786 17 not reflect correct pairing of leads or unused GND irs 15 17 19 30 1825 CHASSIS GND Frame Frame Interfaces The parallel interface consists of an 8 bit parallel data bus with the following characteristics Uses 17 of the 36 positions on the printer connector as follows The host system controls 12 lines which it uses to send data and com mands to the printer The printer controls five lines The printer uses two lines to notify the com puter when data is transferred successfully and three lines to report printer status e Controls synchronization with an externally supplied STROBE pulse e Controls data flow control with BUSY and ACKNLG signals Does not carry out data transfer by ignoring the BUSY or ACKNLG signal The system can carry out data transfer to the printer only when the level of the BUSY signal is low and after confirming the ACKNLG signal is high Uses standard transistor transistor logic TTL levels for
134. 6 x 729 4 210 0 297 0 8 27 11 7 595 842 executivepage 184 2 x 266 7 7 25 x 10 5 522 x 756 5 148 0x 210 0 5 83 x 8 27 419 x 595 v b4 257 x 364 10 12 x 14 33 729 x 1032 x a3 297 x 420 11 7 x 16 54 842 x 1191 x a3 328 x 453 12 91 x 17 83 930 x 1284 x 11x17 279 4 x 431 8 11x17 792 x 1224 x ledger 431 8 x 279 4 17 x 11 1224 x 792 x folio 216 x 330 8 5 x 13 612 x 936 v statement 140 x 216 5 5x8 5 396 x 612 custom 215 9 355 6 8 5 14 0 612 1020 4 custom 297 x 431 8 11 7 x 17 842 x 1224 x custom 320 x 559 12 6 x 22 908 x 1584 x custom 297 x 914 11 7 x 36 842 x 2592 x B5isa Japanese Industry Standard JIS paper size The same B5 designation is used by JIS and International Standards Organization ISO for different paper sizes The Lexmark C510 n supports this size media only with an optional legal tray PostScript currentuniversalsize currentuniversalsize integer integer integer string queries the current settings for the Universal paper size Three i ntegers and one string are returned on the stack Universal Width Universal Height Universal Feed Direction Custom Universal Prompt String Error stackoverflow ignoresize ignoresize integer queries whether or not text is being oriented based on page size Ani nteger value is returned on the stack 0 perform automatic orientation of text based on page size 1 treat the page size as an envelope 2 tre
135. 79 639 v 4 125x9 5envelope 104 8 241 3 4 125x9 5 297 684 110x220envelope 110 x 220 4 33 x 8 66 312 624 162 229 162 229 6 38 9 01 459 649 176x250envelope 176 x 250 6 93 x 9 84 499 708 612 996 otherenvelope Other 841 842 x For other envelopes the page is formatted to 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 in unless a size is specified by your software program PostScript The literal names in Table 4 4 are supported as PostScript emulation compatible operators Table 4 4 Literal Names Supported 4 Supported X Not Supported Literal Names Literal Name Compatible Literal Name monarcenvelope 3 875x7 5envelope 10 4 125 9 dlenvelope 110x220envelope c5envelope 162x229envelope b5envelope 176x250envelope x Note Duplexing is not supported on any envelope size If duplex printing is requested and one of the envelope size operators is sent to the printer duplexing is suspended until a paper size is requested that is supported for duplex printing PostScript Envelope Tray Support If manualfeed in statusdict and the ManualFeed page device parameter are f al se when the printer receives one of the envelopetray operators listed in Table 4 5 Envelopetray Operator Selections on page 4 12 the printer Sets the PageSize Polic
136. 8 LBYPASSPASSWORD KEY C 1 ELIGE APPENDIX C PostScript Support The following tables list PostScript commands and identify printers that support them For detailed information about PostScript emulation see PostScript Emulation on page 4 1 Table C 1 Supplemental Operators X Supported Printer Model X Not Supported EEA Page numbers reference operator descriptions P LE Operator Name appletalktype 4 13 4 buildtime 4 13 V byteorder 4 13 checkpassword 4 14 4 currentfilenameextend 4 14 currentmanualduplexmode 4 14 x currentuniversalsize 4 3 V defaulttimeouts 4 15 4 deletefile 4 15 4 devcontrol 4 16 devdismount 4 17 4 devforall 4 18 devformat 4 18 4 devmount 4 19 V devstatus 4 19 V diskonline 4 20 4 diskstatus 4 21 displayoperatormsg 4 21 4 doidlefonts 4 21 V dojamrecovery 4 22 4 Table C 1 Supplemental Operators Continued y Supported Printer X Not Supported Page numbers reference operator descriptions LE LE doprinterrors 4 22 V doret 4 22 dostartpage 4 23 dosysstart 4 23 V duplexer 4 23 4 duplexmode 4 24 enginesync 4 24 file 4 25 4 filenameforall 4 25 V
137. 89 84 n PostScript Table 4 8 Page Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition NupDetails dictionary Border specifies the type of border to draw around the individual Nup pages continued Supported values are 0 No border 1 A solid black line Order is an integer that specifies how the Nup pages are placed on the printed page Supported values are as follows with first the value the orientation and the description 0 H The first page is placed at the upper left corner of the printed page and subsequent pages are placed across and then down 1 V The first page is placed at the upper left corner of the printed page and subsequent pages are placed down and then across 2 RH The first page is placed at the upper right corner of the printed page and subsequent pages are placed across and then down 3 RV The first page is placed at the upper right corner of the printed page and subsequent pages are placed down and then across Type is a constant value To find the value of Type for your printer see Table C 2 on page C 4 LandscapeOverride is a boolean which specifies the orientation of Nup pages Supported values are False Orientation is specified by the PageSize parameter True Orientation is assumed to be Landscape regardless of the orientation specified by the PageSize parameter Note The PostScript emulation interpreter has to know the orientati
138. AM serial number field is Set by printer READ only identifier returned manufacturer The NVRAM serial number field is set to the printer serial number In order to guarantee that a unique identifier exists in this field the printer writes a random alphanumeric string into this field whenever the critical byte area in NVRAM is re initialized FORMLINES Lines per page 1 to 255 60 64 Note If a value greater than 255 is specified by a SET Country specific or DEFAULT command the value is changed to 255 HOLD Print and Hold ON OFF STORE PROOF OFF SET only The HOLD variable interacts with the HOLDKEY and HOLDTYPE variables For more information see HOLDTYPE on page 3 14 HOLDKEY Print and Hold PIN PIN NULL SET only PIN is a text string consisting of exactly four numerals no PIN Only the numerals 1 through 6 are valid Note A null string is an acceptable value and indicates no PIN is specified The HOLDKEY variable interacts with the HOLD and HOLDTYPE variables For more information see HOLDTYPE as follows Table 3 3 Common Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Variable Function Selections Factory Default HOLDTYPE Print and Hold PUBLIC PRIVATE PUBLIC SET only Type The HOLD HOLDKEY and HOLDTYPE variables interact with each other as follows When HOLD is set to On HOLDKEY is set to a valid PIN and HOLDTYPE is set to Private Confide
139. ANUALPAPERSIZE 3 36 LMANUALPAPERTYPE 3 36 LMPFEEDERPAPERTYPE 3 36 LMULTIPAGEBORDER 3 36 LMULTIPAGEORDER 3 36 LMULTIPAGEPRINT 3 37 LMULTIPAGEVIEW 3 37 LNPAP 3 37 LOPTIONALOUTBIN1NAME 3 37 LOPTIONALOUTBIN2NAME 3 37 LOPTIONALOUTBINS3NAME 3 37 LOPTIONALOUTBINANAME 3 37 LOPTIONALOUTBINSNAME 3 37 LOPTIONALOUTBIN6NAME 3 38 LOPTIONALOUTBIN7NAME 3 38 LOPTIONALOUTBIN8NAME 3 38 LOPTIONALOUTBIN9NAME 3 38 LOPTIONALOUTBIN10NAME 3 38 LOUTBINCONFIG 3 38 LOVERFLOWOUTBIN 3 39 LOVERFLOWTIMER 3 39 LOWTONER 3 15 LPAGECOUNT 3 39 LPAGEMODE 3 39 LPAPERSOURCE 3 39 LPICTUREGRADE 3 40 3 52 LPLAINLENGTH 3 40 LPLAINOUTBIN 3 40 X 12 LPLAINTEXTURE 3 40 LPLAINWEIGHT 3 40 LPOWERSAVER 3 40 LPPDS 3 41 LPPDSFORMLINES 3 41 LPPDSLINESPERINCH 3 41 LPREPRINTEDLENGTH 3 41 LPREPRINTEDLOADING 3 41 LPREPRINTEDOUTBIN 3 42 LPREPRINTEDTEXTURE 3 42 LPREPRINTEDWEIGHT 3 42 LPRINTBUFFER 3 42 B 9 LPRINTERUSAGE 3 42 LPRINTHEADIDLETIME 3 42 LPRINTMENUSBUTTON 3 42 B 9 LPRINTQUALITY 3 43 LPSFONTPRIORITY 3 52 LPUNCH 3 43 LREAROUTBINNAME 3 43 LREPEATLIMIT 3 43 LRESET 3 43 LRESOURCESAVE 3 43 B 10 LRIGHTMARGINOFFSET 3 43 LRWLOCK 3 53 LSCREENING 3 43 LSEPARATORSHEETS 3 43 LSEPARATORSOURCE 3 43 LSTANDARDOUTBINNAME 3 44 LSTAPLE 3 44 LSTAPLESEMPTYALARM 3 44 LSTAPLETESTBIN 3 44 LSTAPLETESTSOURCE 3 44 LSTROKEWIDTH 3 44 LSUBSTITUTESIZE 3 44 LTHINCOAT 3 44 LTOPBINROTATE 3 44 LTOPMARGINOFFSET 3 44 LTRANSPARENCYLENGTH 3 44 LTRANSPARENCYOUTBIN 3 45 LTRANSPARENCYT
140. AYSAUTOSIZE Auto Size ON OFF ON Sensing for DEFAULT only Tray 3 LTRAY4AUTOSIZE Auto Size ON OFF ON Sensing for DEFAULT only Tray 4 LTRAYSAUTOSIZE Auto Size ON OFF ON Sensing for DEFAULT only Tray 5 LTRAY1PAPERTYPE Tray 1 Paper PLAIN COATED GLOSSY PHOTO PLAIN Type GREETINGCARD IRONON BOND TRANSPARENCY CARDSTOCK LABELS LETTERHEAD PREPRINTED COLORED ENVELOPE CUSTOMTYPE1 CUSTOMTYPE2 CUSTOMTYPES3 CUSTOMTYPE4 CUSTOMTYPES5 CUSTOMTYPES name name is a text string that is truncated to 24 characters 3 47 Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued 21111911 LTRAY2PAPERTYPE Function Tray 2 Paper Type Selections PLAIN COATED GLOSSY PHOTO GREETINGCARD IRONON BOND TRANSPARENCY CARDSTOCK LABELS LETTERHEAD PREPRINTED COLORED ENVELOPE CUSTOMTYPE1 CUSTOMTYPE2 CUSTOMTYPES3 CUSTOMTYPE4 CUSTOMTYPES5 CUSTOMTYPES name name is a text string that is truncated to 24 characters See Table B 2 Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages on page B 4 for the default value for your printer Factory Default PLAIN CUSTOMTYPE2 Model specific LTRAYSPAPERTYPE Tray 3 Paper Type PLAIN COATED GLOSSY PHOTO GREETINGCARD IRONON BOND TRANSPARENCY CARDSTOCK LABELS LETTERHEAD PREPRINTED COLORED ENVELOPE CUSTOMTYPE1 CUSTOMTYPE2 CUSTOMTYPES3 CUSTOMTYPE4 CUSTOMTYPES5 CUSTOMTYPES name name is a
141. Bin 8 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 Bin 9 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 Bin 10 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name LCUSTOMTYPE2TEXTURE Custom Type 2 SMOOTH NORMAL ROUGH NORMAL DEFAULT only Texture LCUSTOMTYPE2WEIGHT Custom Type 2 LIGHT NORMAL HEAVY NORMAL DEFAULT only Weight LCUSTOMTYPESLENGTH Custom Type 3 NORMAL SHORT NORMAL DEFAULT only Length LCUSTOMTYPES3LOADING Custom Type 3 OFF DUPLEX OFF DEFAULT only Paper Loading Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued LCUSTOMTYPESMEDIA DEFAULT only Function Custom Type 3 Media Selections PAPER COATED GLOSSY TRANSPARENCY LABELS CARDSTOCK ENVELOPE COTTONPAPER Factory Default PAPER LCUSTOMTYPESNAME DEFAULT only Custom Type 3 Name name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types The text string is truncated to 24 characters When queried the quotes are not returned around the string name The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name CUSTOMTYPES LCUSTOMTYPES3OUTBIN DEFAULT only Assign Type Bin Custom Type 3 UPPER LOWER DISABLED OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBINS OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBINS OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBINQ OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is trun
142. CE device filename filetype is required LRESOURCE variables See the table Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables on page 3 53 Values for device filename filetype are device flash flashl disk ordisk1 case insensitive filename A unique identifier for a file such as the macro ID for a PCL macro the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set the font ID for a PCL font and so on Thefilename is case sensitive filetype An identifier that categorizes the file such as p5 macro for PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets See Table 3 22 Variables for Flash and Disk File and Password Commands on page 3 87 for a complete list of the supported file types The filetype is case sensitive variable value The supported variables and values are listed in the tables beginning on page 3 12 Note Variables may be modified by the DEFAULT command except those marked Read Only Some variables may only be modified using the PUL SET command These variables cannot be modified using the DEFAULT command They are marked Set Only SET Command This command modifies the current setting for the specified environment variable The new setting is active immediately and remains active until the next occurrence of a PJL reset condition Use the SET command to modify any currently defined environment variable that cannot be set using the desired printer language For example use the PUL SET command to set Print Quality Enhancement Technology
143. CR lt LF gt Response Syntax QPJL INFO category lt CR gt lt LF gt one or more lines of printable characters spaces or tabs CR LF FF category Table 3 10 lists the supported categories Table 3 10 INFO Category Parameter Values Category Values Description ID Returns the model name or the model number stored in the printer NVRAM CONFIG Returns the printer configuration including paper sources paper sizes and installed options MEMORY Returns the printer available memory PAGECOUNT Returns the printer page count STATUS Returns the printer current status VARIABLES Returns the printer environment variables and values USTATUS Returns the printer unsolicited status variables and values 3 57 INFO CONFIG Response Syntax An Example PJL INFO CONFIG lt CR gt lt LF gt IN TRAYS 2 ENUMERATED lt CR gt lt LF gt INTRAY1 lt CR gt lt LF gt INTRAY2 lt CR gt lt LF gt MANUAL FEED lt CR gt lt LF gt OUT TRAYS 1 ENUMERATED lt CR gt lt LF gt UPPER FACEDOWN lt CR gt lt LF gt PAPERS 13 ENUMERATED lt CR gt lt LF gt LETTER lt CR gt lt LF gt LEGAL lt CR gt lt LF gt A4 lt CR gt lt LF gt A5 lt CR gt lt LF gt B5PAPER lt CR gt lt LF gt EXECUTIVE lt CR gt lt LF gt COM10 lt CR gt lt LF gt COM9 lt CR gt lt LF gt MONARCH lt CR gt lt LF gt DL lt CR gt lt LF gt C5 lt CR gt lt LF gt B5 lt CR gt lt LF gt lt
144. CUSTOMTYPEAMEDIA 3 27 LCUSTOMTYPEANAME 3 27 LCUSTOMTYPEAOUTBIN 3 27 LCUSTOMTYPEATEXTURE 3 27 LCUSTOMTYPEAWEIGHT 3 27 LCUSTOMTYPESLENGTH 3 28 LCUSTOMTYPESLOADING 3 28 LCUSTOMTYPESMEDIA 3 28 LCUSTOMTYPESNAME 3 28 LCUSTOMTYPESOUTBIN 3 28 LCUSTOMTYPESTEXTURE 3 28 LCUSTOMTYPESWEIGHT 3 29 LCUSTOMTYPE6LENGTH 3 29 LCUSTOMTYPE6MEDIA 3 29 LCUSTOMTYPE6NAME 3 29 LCUSTOMTYPE6OUTBIN 3 29 LCUSTOMTYPE6TEXTURE 3 30 LCUSTOMTYPE6WEIGHT 3 30 LDESCRIPTION 3 53 LDOWNLOADTARGET 3 30 LDRYTIMEDELAY 3 30 LDUPLICATEHELDJOBS 3 30 LENVELOPEENHANCE 3 30 LENVELOPELENGTH 3 30 LENVELOPEOUTBIN 3 30 LENVELOPETEXTURE 3 31 LENVELOPEWEIGHT 3 31 LESCCHAR 3 31 LFAXREDIAL 3 31 LFAXREDIALFREQUENCY 3 31 LFAXRESOLUTION 3 31 LFAXTRANSMISSIONLOG 3 31 LFEEDERPAPERTYPE 3 31 LFONTCOMPATIBILITY 3 51 LFONTPRIORITY 3 51 LGLOSSYLOADING 3 31 LGLOSSYOUTPUTBIN 3 32 LGLOSSYTEXTURE 3 32 LGLOSSYWEIGHT 3 32 LHOLEPUNCHALARM 3 32 LHOLEPUNCHMODE 3 32 LHONORINIT 3 32 LIMAGEBRIGHTNESS 3 32 LIMAGECONTRAST 3 32 LIMAGEENHANCE 3 32 LIMAGEENHANCETYPE 3 33 LIMAGEORIENTATION 3 33 LIMAGESMOOTHING 3 33 LINFEEDERSIZE 3 33 LINKALERT 3 33 LINMPFEEDERSIZE 3 33 LJAMRECOVERY 3 33 LLABELSLENGTH 3 33 LLABELSLOADING 3 33 LLABELSOUTBIN 3 34 LLABELSTEXTURE 3 34 LLABELSWEIGHT 3 34 LLASTTRAYRENUMBER 3 34 LLEFTMARGINOFFSET 3 34 LLETTERHEADLENGTH 3 34 LLETTERHEADLOADING 3 34 LLETTERHEADOUTBIN 3 35 LLETTERHEADTEXTURE 3 35 LLETTERHEADWEIGHT 3 35 LMANUALENVELOPESIZE 3 36 LMANUALENVELOPETYPE 3 36 LM
145. Cartridge or Close Door Intervention required 40021 Close Cover A FALSE close toner box cover Intervention required 40021 31 Defective Print Cartridge FALSE defective print cartridge or defective 31 Defective Cartridge XXXX ink cartridge Intervention required 40021 32 Unsupported Print Cartridge FALSE unsupported print cartridge Intervention required 40021 32 Unsupported XXXX Cartridge FALSE unsupported print cartridge Intervention required 40021 32 Unsupported Cartridge FALSE unsupported cartridge Intervention required 40021 Change Cartridge Invalid Refill FALSE change cartridge invalid refill Intervention required 40021 Cartridge Life Expired XXXX FALSE cartridge life expired XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK where CMYK denotes Cyan Magenta Yellow and Black cartridges respectively For this message the values for XXXX are returned to indicate which ink cartridges are defective 2 lt d gt represents a one letter designator for each door labeled on the printer 3 c represents a one letter designator for each cover labeled on the printer Note The Display String is returned in the current language A display string that is returned is truncated to the DISPLAY CHARACTER SIZE returned in INFO CONFIG Table 3 14 PJL Message for Attendance Conditions Printer State Status Code Display String Online Status Intervention required 40021 Cartridge Life Warning XXXX
146. Close Duplex Door FALSE duplex cover open Intervention required 40096 Insert Duplex Option FALSE insert duplex option Intervention required 40101 Load Staples FALSE load staples represents a subset of letters CMYK where denotes Cyan Magenta Yellow and Black cartridges respectively For this message the values for XXXX are returned to indicate which ink cartridges are defective d represents one letter designator for each door labeled on the printer 3 lt c gt represents a one letter designator for each cover labeled on the printer Note The Display String is returned in the current language A display string that is returned is truncated to the DISPLAY CHARACTER SIZE returned in INFO CONFIG Operator Intervention Paper Handling When a Load lt tray gt Load Manual or Change lt tray gt message appears on the printer operator panel display or through MarkVision Professional a message is returned to the host computer indicating the paper source and size for the prompt Attendance operator intervention messages are returned in this form CODE status code DISPLAY display string in double quotes ONLINE online status The display string is the first line of the message that displays 3 73 To determine which messages your printer supports see Table B 12 PUL Messages for Paper Handling on page B 25 Table 3 15 PJL Messages for Paper Handling
147. Color Component Two Indicates the second primary color specified by the Assign Color Index command ESC y HC 32767 0 to 32767 0 Color Component Three Indicates the third primary color specified by the Assign Color Index command ESC y Palette Index 0 to 2 1 Palette Index Assign Color Index Designates the three current color components to the specified palette index number n represents the number of bits per index 5 5 Palette Index 0 to 2 1 Palette Index Foreground Color Sets the foreground color to the specified index in the current palette n represents the current palette size ESC yitWIdata Configure Image Data Creates programmable palettes ESC i W Viewing Illuminant 8 Data Designates the relative white point used in determining a viewing illuminant condition Table 2 24 Status Readback Command Parameters Function Result Default 0 ESC S T Set Status Readback Location Type 0 Invalid location Default Sets the status location type to the specified value Hu selected location The 5 value for Cartridge may be specified but since your printer AT does not support font cards or cartridges the command is ignored 3 Internal resident 4 Downloaded entity The 7 value for User installable flash is only valid when flash 5 Cartridge memory is installed 7 User installable flash The 200 value
148. D PLAIN ENVELOPE CUSTOMTYPE1 CUSTOMTYPE2 CUSTOMTYPES3 CUSTOMTYPE4 CUSTOMTYPES5 CUSTOMTYPES name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types The text string is truncated to 24 characters When queried the quotes are not returned around the string name The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name Model specific Order REVVERTICAL LMULTIPAGEBORDER Multipage NONE SOLID NONE Border LMULTIPAGEORDER Multipage HORIZONTAL VERTICAL REVHORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL 3 37 Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Variable Function Selections Factory Default LMULTIPAGEPRINT Multipage OFF 2UP 3UP 4UP 6UP 9UP 12UP 16UP OFF Printing LMULTIPAGEVIEW Multipage View AUTO SHORTEDGE LONGEDGE AUTO LNPAP NPA Protocol ON OFF AUTO AUTO READ only Setting Port specific LOPTIONALOUTBIN1NAME Optional Output name OPTIONAL DEFAULT only Bin 1 Name OUTBIN1 This value is reported for the interface link that the command is received name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters When queried the quotes are not returned around the string name The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name LOPTIONALOUTBIN2NAME Optional Output name OPTIONAL DEFAULT only Bin 2 Name OUTBIN2 name
149. Devs Exhausted x 84 All Photo Devs Exhausted Intervention Required 3 70 40038 84 Black Photo Dev x 84 Black Photo Dev Exhausted Exhausted Intervention Required 3 71 40038 88 Cartridge Low x Cartridge Low lt CMYK gt Intervention Required 3 71 40038 Replace PC Kit x Replace PC Kit Intervention Required 3 71 40038 Replace PC Kit To Continue x Replace PC Kit To Continue Intervention Required 3 71 40038 Replace Toner Cartridge x Replace Toner Cartridge Intervention Required 3 71 40038 Replace Toner To Continue x Replace Toner Cartridge To Continue 1 XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK where CMYK denotes Cyan Magenta Yellow and Black cartridges respectively PJL Support PJL Support Table B 11 PJL Messages for Attendance Conditions Continued Printer Model 4 Supported X Not Supported Page numbers reference message descriptions Message Status Code Return String Intervention Required 3 71 40038 Replace Oil Coating Roll Replace Oil Coating Roll Intervention Required 3 71 40039 89 Cartridge Empty Cartridge Empty lt CMYK gt Intervention Required 3 71 40040 Load Staples Load Staples Intervention Required 3 71 40041 Priming Failed Retry Priming Failed Retry Intervention Required 3 71 40048 OPMSG message OPMSG Inter
150. Diagonal grid User Defined Patterns User Defined Pattern ID Area Fill ID Selects pattern used to fill a rectangular area Note This command is also used to set the user defined pattern ID ESC V N Source Transparency Mode 0 Transparent Default Affects copying of white pixels from the source onto the destination 1 Opaque image ESC y 0 Pattern Transparency Mode 0 Transparent Default Affects copying of white pixels from the pattern onto the destination 1 Opaque image ESC 0 0 Logical Operation logical operation value 0 to 255 Defines boolean operations to be performed on data already printed Default 252 and data about to be printed ESC Q R Pixel Placement 0 Grid Intersection Default Determines how pixels are placed for a rectangular area fill and GL 2 1 Grid Centered objects Pixel Placement does not affect text or raster images ESC ygrT Select Current Pattern 0 Solid Black Default Selects pattern used when printing text and raster images 1 Solid White 2 Gray Shading Pattern 3 Cross Hatch Pattern 4 User Defined Pattern 9 True gray Level Fill Table 2 20 User Defined Pattern Command Parameters Function Result ESC ostWIdata User Defined Pattern number of data bytes Downloads binary pattern data ESC n R Set Pattern Reference Point 0 Rotate with print Default Sets the pattern reference point to the current cursor position for user 1 Fixed defin
151. EXTURE 3 45 LTRANSPARENCYWEIGHT 3 45 LTRAY1AUTOSIZE 3 46 LTRAY1PAPERTYPE 3 46 LTRAY1RENUMBER 3 47 LTRAY1SENSEDTYPEPAPER 3 45 LTRAY1SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY 3 45 LTRAY2AUTOSIZE 3 46 LTRAY2PAPERTYPE 3 47 LTRAY2SENSEDTYPEPAPER 3 45 LTRAY2SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY 3 45 LTRAYSAUTOSIZE 3 46 LTRAYSPAPERTYPE 3 47 LTRAYSSENSEDTYPEPAPER 3 46 LTRAYSSENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY 3 46 LTRAY4AUTOSIZE 3 46 LTRAYAPAPERTYPE 3 47 LTRAYASENSEDTYPEPAPER 3 46 LTRAYASENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY 3 46 LTRAY5AUTOSIZE 3 46 LTRAY5PAPERTYPE 3 47 LTYPE1FONTS 3 47 LUSDEFAULTS 3 47 LWLOCK 3 53 MANUALFEED 3 15 MEDIATYPE 3 15 MPTRAY 3 15 ORIENTATION 3 15 OUTBIN 3 16 PAGEPROTECT 3 16 PAPER 3 16 PARALLEL 3 17 PASSWORD 3 17 PERSONALITY 3 17 PITCH 3 48 POWERSAVE 3 17 POWERSAVETIME 3 18 PRTPSERRS 3 51 PTSIZE 3 48 QTY 3 18 REPRINT 3 18 RESOLUTION 3 18 RESOURCESAVE 3 18 RET 3 18 SYMSET 3 48 TIMEOUT 3 18 USERNAME 3 19 WIDEA4 3 19 printer languages selecting MarkVision Professional 2 1 methods 5 1 operator panel 2 1 4 1 PCL emulation 2 1 X 13 Printer Job Language PJL 3 3 setting for different interfaces 5 2 SmartSwitch 5 1 software program 2 2 switching 5 1 printer specifications airflow requirement 7 1 altitude 7 4 atmospheric pressure 7 4 clearance requirements 7 3 dimensions 7 3 electrical 7 2 environmental conditions 7 4 flash memory and disk retrieval speeds 6 13 interfaces 8 1 noise emission levels 7 1 power requirements 7 2 size 7 3 wei
152. Faxes on Disk FALSE disk operation failed faxes on disk Intervention required 32002 52 Flash Full FALSE flash full Note The Display String is returned in the current language A display string longer than one line shows only the first line of the message Table 3 13 PJL Messages for Auto Continuable Conditions Continued Status Printer State Code Display String Online Status Intervention required 32002 62 Disk Full FALSE disk full Intervention required 32015 Disk Corrupted Reformat FALSE disk corrupted Intervention required 32030 58 Too Many Flash Options FALSE too many flash options installed Intervention required 32052 53 Unformatted Flash FALSE unformatted flash Intervention required 32052 63 Unformatted Disk FALSE unformatted disk Intervention required 32052 64 Unsupported Disk Format FALSE unsupported disk format Intervention required 32056 51 Defective Flash FALSE defective flash Intervention required 32056 61 Defective Disk FALSE defective disk Intervention required 35075 80 Scheduled Maintenance FALSE scheduled maintenance Intervention required 35075 81 Scheduled Maintenance FALSE scheduled maintenance Intervention required fuser maintenance 40038 80 Fuser Maintenance FALSE Intervention required fuser maintenance 40038 80 Fuser Life Warning FALSE Intervention required belt maintenance 40038 80 Belt Life Warning FALSE Intervention required
153. H HUNGARIAN TURKISH CZECH Country specific LOWTONER DEFAULT only Toner Alarm ON OFF CONTINUE STOP A value of ON or CONTINUE indicates the Toner Alarm setting is set Off The value of OFF or STOP indicates the Toner Alarm setting is Single INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of the Toner Alarm as follows f Toner Alarm is set to Off CONTINUE is returned f Toner Alarm is set to Single STOP is returned f Toner Alarm is set to Continuous STOP is returned ON CONTINUE Model specific MANUALFEED READ only Manual feed selection OFF Printer always returns OFF MEDIATYPE Default paper source default formatting size PLAIN COATED GLOSSY PHOTO GREETINGCARD IRONON BOND TRANSPARENCY CARDSTOCK LABELS LETTERHEAD PREPRINTED COLORED ENVELOPE CUSTOMTYPE1 CUSTOMTYPE2 CUSTOMTYPES3 CUSTOMTYPE4 CUSTOMTYPES5 CUSTOMTYPES name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of custom print material types The text string is truncated to 24 characters PLAIN MPTRAY DEFAULT only Multipurpose feeder configuration CASSETTE MANUAL FIRST Sets the configuration of the Multipurpose Feeder CASSETTE ORIENTATION Print orientation PORTRAIT LANDSCAPE This variable does not affect PostScript emulation PORTRAIT Table 3 3 Common Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued 21111911 OUTBIN Functio
154. Indicates the setting of the Jam Recovery menu item True Jam Recovery is set to On False Jam Recovery is set to Off or Auto model specific HWhResolution integer Indicates the resolution of the printer in pixels per inch along the x and y dimensions of the device space x and y are always equal The following resolutions are supported 300 dpi 600 dpi 1200 dpi PostScript Table 4 8 Page Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition ImagingBBox array or null Defines a rectangle that lies within the boundaries of the page specified by PageSize ImagingBBox may be either a value of null or an array of four numbers A value of null indicates the bounding box is the largest imageable area possible for a given page size InputAttributes dictionary Contains information about the various installed input sources There is a numeric key which is a dictionary for each installed input source Input sources The numeric keys are Key Source Tray 1 Tray 2 Envelope feeder Tray 3 Multipurpose feeder Tray 4 Tray 5 The entries in each input source dictionary describe the media that is currently available in the source The allowable keys in each source dictionary are PageSize MediaColor MediaType See AutoMediaType on page 4 50 MediaWeight MatchAll InputLocation Read only string which indicates the physical tray corresponding to the source
155. K 12K 350 Note MB represents 1 048 576 bytes K represents 1024 bytes N A means non applicable Interfaces Table 8 6 Input Buffer Sizes in Bytes Continued Serial Network Memory Size Parallel Buffer Size Buffer Size Buffer Size LocalTalk USB Fax 8 10 or 12MB 48K 24K 48K 48K 24K 350K 16 18 or 20MB 48K 1MB if no optional adapter is installed 24K 1MB 1MB 24K 1MB 24 28 32 or 34MB 192K 1MB if no optional adapter is installed 150K 1MB 1MB 150K 1MB 36 38 or 40MB 384K 1MB if no optional adapter is installed 300K 1MB 1MB 300K 1MB 44MB or larger 2MB 300K 2MB 2MB 300K 1MB Note MB represents 1 048 576 bytes K represents 1024 bytes N A means non applicable Note When using serial communication the printer signals the host computer to stop transmitting bytes when the serial input buffer is within 640 bytes In addition when XON XOFF protocol is used the printer signals the host computer to stop transmitting when the serial input buffer is 384 256 and 128 bytes from full A 1 PCL Support APPENDIX A PCL Support Table A 1 lists PCL emulation commands and identifies printers that support them For detailed information about PCL emulation commands and how to select them see PCL Emulation on page 2 1 Table A 2 on page A 6 identifies printer support for the GL 2 commands Table A 1 PCL Emulation Commands
156. LCUSTOMTYPE2MEDIA Custom Type 2 PAPER COATED GLOSSY TRANSPARENCY PAPER DEFAULT only Media LABELS CARDSTOCK ENVELOPE COTTONPAPER Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Variable Function Selections Factory Default LCUSTOMTYPE2NAME Custom Type 2 CUSTOMTYPE2 DEFAULT only name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types The text string is truncated to 24 characters When queried the quotes are not returned around the string name The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name LCUSTOMTYPE2OUTBIN Assign UPPER LOWER DISABLED OPTIONALOUTBIN1 UPPER DEFAULT only Type Bin OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBINS DISABLED y Custom Type 2 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBINS Model specific OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBINQ OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on custom type 2 paper A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type Bin Custom Type 2 setting returns Assign Type Bin DINQUIRE or Custom Type 2 INQUIRE value setting Standard Bin UPPER Bin 1 OPTIONALOUTBIN1 Bin 2 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 Bin 3 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 Bin 4 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 Bin 5 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 Bin 6 OPTIONALOUTBING Bin 7 OPTIONALOUTBIN7
157. LOCK password parameters Recovering Lost Passwords Use the LQUERYSEED and LBYPASSPASSWORD commands to recover lost passwords Syntax 089 L LQUERYSEED CR LF PJL LBYPASSPASSWORD KEY key CR lt LF gt Use the following steps to retrieve lost passwords 1 Send the LQUERYSEED command to the printer by one of the host computer interfaces This command causes a value the seed to display on the printer operator panel through MarkVision Professional or if there isn t an LCD panel to print on the Menu Settings Page The value of the seed determines the key Obtain the key from the Lexmark Customer Support Center You must have the seed value Send the PJL LBYPASSPASSWORD command to the printer by any port If the correct key is specified a modified version of the directory is produced The directory indicates the appropriate passwords for the flash or disk PostScript CHAPTER 4 PostScript Emulation This section explains PostScript emulation supplemental operators in detail For more information refer to the PostScript Language Reference Manual Third Edition by Adobe Systems Inc To determine which commands your printer supports see Appendix C PostScript Support on page C 1 Selecting PostScript Emulation Using SmartSwitch When SmartSwitch is enabled for both printer languages on an interface the printer automatically switches to the printer language being sent by
158. LSE paper jam Intervention required 4222x 222 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4230x 230 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4231x 231 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover The door or cover needs to be opened x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer y represents the tray number Z represents the bin number See your printer documentation for more information on printer messages 3 77 Table 3 19 PJL Messages for Paper Jams Continued Printer State Status Code Display String Online Status Intervention required 4232x 232 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4233x 233 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4234x 234 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 424yx 24y Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4241 wy 241 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4242wy 242 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4243w 243 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4244wy 244 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4245w 245 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4246w 246 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4247 247 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4248w 248 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4249w 249 Paper Ja
159. NS DISABLED y Envelope OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBINS5 Model specific OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBINQ OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on envelopes A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type Bin Envelope setting returns Assign Type Bin DINQUIRE or Envelope setting INQUIRE value Standard Bin UPPER Bin 1 OPTIONALOUTBIN1 Bin 2 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 Bin 3 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 Bin 4 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 Bin 5 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 Bin 6 OPTIONALOUTBING Bin 7 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 Bin 8 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 Bin 9 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 Bin 10 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Function Selections Factory Default LENVELOPETEXTURE Envelope SMOOTH NORMAL ROUGH NORMAL DEFAULT only LENVELOPEWEIGHT Envelope LIGHT NORMAL HEAVY NORMAL DEFAULT only Weight LESCCHAR ESC Character 0 to 255 27 READ only Substitution Port specific LFAXRESOLUTION Fax Resolution STANDARD FINE SUPERFINE ULTRAFINE STANDARD SET only Note Status Readback commands return a when no SET command has modified the LFAXRESOLUTION variable For more information see Status Readback Commands on page 3 54 LFAXREDIAL Fax
160. ON signals to the host computer to indicate that the serial port is ready to receive additional data The signals continue as long as one of the following conditions exist No data has been received across the serial port in the last second The last XON was accepted by the host computer The printer is ready to receive data See your printer documentation for more information about selecting the protocol from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional Interfaces Protocol RS 232C Table 8 4 shows the state or function of each serial interface signal in the three data flow control protocols when the Honor DSR setting is On Table 8 4 Serial Link All Protocols with Honor DSR On Protocol DTR Protocol DTR DSR Protocol Printer Honor DSR On Honor DSR On Honor DSR On DTR Always active Flow control to computer Flow control to computer DSR Data validity Data validity Flow control transmit mode to computer receive mode CTS Ignored Flow control from computer Ignored Table 8 5 shows the state of each serial interface signal in the three data flow control protocols when the Honor DSR setting is Off Table 8 5 Serial Link All Protocols with Honor DSR Off XON XOFF Protocol DTR Protocol DTR DSR Protocol Printer Signal Honor DSR Off Honor DSR Off Honor DSR Off DTR Output Always active Flow control to Flow control to computer computer DSR
161. ORY Prints both the flash and disk directory listings If neither flash memory or a disk is installed the command is ignored LPRINTTESTPAGE Prints the test page LPRINTMENUS Prints the menu settings page LPRINTPCLFONTS Prints the PCL font listing LPRINTPSFONTS Prints the PostScript font listing For example to print a menu settings page Syntax QPJL LPRI NTMENUS lt CR gt lt LF gt LESCAPECHAR Command This command modifies the code point of the escape character for the host computer specified by the PORT parameter The escape character is mapped to code point Ox1B for each host interface port Syntax GPJL LESCAPECHAR CHAR byte PORT port CR LF CHAR parameter The byte value for the CHAR parameter is the code point of the ASCII character used for the escape character For example at the factory the printer uses Ox1B character Esc for the escape character If CHAR 65 is specified with this command the printer uses 0x41 character A as the escape character for the host interface port specified via the PORT parameter PORT parameter The following ports are valid parameters for LESCAPECHAR INA INA1 NA2 e INA3 LOCALTALK1 LOCALTALK2 e LOCALTALKS PARALLEL PARALLEL1 PARALLEL2 PARALLEL 3 USB e USB1 USB2 USB3 e SERIAL SERIAL1 SERIAL2 e SERIALS IR R1 e R3 LFAX PHONENUMBER Command This command
162. PAGEVIEW 3 37 v LNPAP 3 37 v LOPTIONALOUTBIN1NAME 3 37 x LOPTIONALOUTBIN2NAME 3 37 x LOPTIONALOUTBIN3NAME 3 37 x LOPTIONALOUTBIN4NAME 3 37 x LOPTIONALOUTBINSNAME 3 37 x LOPTIONALOUTBIN6NAME 3 38 x LOPTIONALOUTBIN7NAME 3 38 x PJL Support Table B 2 Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued 4 Supported Printer Model X Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions and are listed for supported variables only Default values are listed for exceptions only E Variable LOPTIONALOUTBIN8NAME 3 38 x LOPTIONALOUTBIN9NAME 3 38 x LOPTIONALOUTBIN10NAME 3 38 x LOUTBINCONFIG 3 38 x LOVERFLOWOUTBIN 3 39 x LOVERFLOWTIMER 3 39 x LPAGECOUNT 3 39 LPAGEMODE 3 39 LPAPERSOURCE 3 39 LPICTUREGRADE 3 40 LPLAINLENGTH 3 40 x LPLAINOUTBIN 3 40 x LPLAINTEXTURE 3 40 v LPLAINWEIGHT 3 40 LPOWERSAVER 3 40 LPPDS 3 41 LPPDSFORMLINES 3 41 LPPDSLINESPERINCH 3 41 LPREPRINTEDLENGTH 3 41 x LPREPRINTEDLOADING 3 41 x LPREPRINTEDOUTBIN 3 42 x LPREPRINTEDTEXTURE 3 42 LPREPRINTEDWEIGHT 3 42 LPRINTBUFFER 3 42 LPRINTHEADIDLETIME 3 42 x LPRINTERUSAGE 3 42 x LPRINTMENUSBUTTON 3 42 x LPRINTQUALITY 3 43 x PJL Support Table B 2 Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued 4 Supp
163. PC Kit 3 71 Replace PC Kit To Continue 3 71 Replace Toner Cartridge 3 71 Replace Toner Cartridge To Continue 3 71 Replace Transfer Kit 3 71 STMSG message 3 71 auto continuable messages 3 63 249 Paper Jam 3 77 34 Short Paper 3 64 24y Paper Jam 3 77 35 Res Save Off Deficient Memory 3 64 3 250 Paper Jam 3 77 65 36 Resolution Reduced 3 64 37 Insufficient Collation Area 3 63 3 65 37 Insufficient Defrag Memory 3 63 37 Insufficient Memory 3 63 38 Memory Full 3 63 39 Complex Page 3 63 50 PPDS Font Error 3 63 51 Defective Flash 3 64 3 66 52 Flash Full 3 64 3 65 53 Unformatted Flash 3 64 3 66 54 Network x Software Error 3 65 54 Par x ENA Connection Lost 3 65 54 Parallel Error 3 63 54 Ser x Fax Connection Lost 3 65 54 Serial Option 1 Error 3 63 54 Serial Option x Error 3 65 54 Standard Serial Error 3 63 54 Std Network Software Error 3 63 54 Std Par ENA Connection Lost 3 64 54 Std Ser Fax Connection Lost 3 63 55 Insufficient Fax Buffer 3 64 56 Parallel Port Disabled 3 64 56 Parallel Port x Disabled 3 65 56 Serial Port 1 Disabled 3 64 56 Serial Port x Disabled 3 65 56 Standard Parallel Port Disabled 3 64 56 Standard Serial Disabled 3 63 56 Standard USB Port Disabled 3 64 56 Std Parallel Port Disabled 3 64 56 USB Port x Disabled 3 65 57 Configuration Change 3 63 58 Too Many Flash Options 3 66 61 Defective Disk 3 64 3 66 61 Unformatted Disk 3 64 62 Disk Full 3 64 3 66 63 Unformatted Disk 3 66 64 Unsupported Di
164. PLED ROTATESTAPLEDANDENVELOPES ROTATEALL 2 ROTATEPAPER if an optional finisher is installed LIMAGESMOOTHING Image ON OFF OFF Smoothing for PostScript LINFEEDERSIZE Envelope 10 COM9 MONARCH DL C5 B5 COM10 DL feeder installed OTHERENVELOPE Country specific size default formatting size LINKALERT Ink Alert ON OFF OFF Displays a printer attendance message when an ink cartridge is low LINMPFEEDERSIZE Multipurpose Paper A3 A4 A5 JISB4 B5PAPER JISB5 LETTER A4 feeder installed CUSTOM EXECUTIVE FOLIO LEDGER LEGAL Country specific size default LETTER STATEMENT 11X17 formatting size Envelopes COM10 COM9 MONARCH DL C5 B5 OTHERENVELOPE LJAMRECOVERY Jam Recovery ON OFF AUTO AUTO LLABELSLENGTH Labels Length NORMAL SHORT NORMAL DEFAULT only LLABELSLOADING Labels Paper OFF DUPLEX OFF DEFAULT only Loading Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Selections Factory Default LLABELSOUTBIN Assign UPPER LOWER DISABLED OPTIONALOUTBIN1 UPPER DEFAULT only Type Bin OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBINS DISABLED y Labels OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBINS5 Model specific OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBINS9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text stri
165. PQET or Page Protect which cannot be set within a printer language such as PCL emulation Syntax QPJL SET command modifier value variabl e value CR LF where command modifier value The command modifier value parameter specifies the type of PJL variables to be modified The variables supported are listed in the tables beginning on page 3 12 e A command modifier value is not required for variables listed in the tables Common Variables for Both Printer Languages on page 3 12 and Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages on page 3 19 LPARM PCL is used with variables specific to PCL emulation See the tables Common Variables for PCL Emulation on page 3 48 and Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation on page 3 49 LPARM POSTSCRIPT is used for variables specific for PostScript emulation See the tables Common Variables for PostScript Emulation on page 3 51 and Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation on page 3 52 LRESOURCE device filename filetype is required for LRESOURCE variables See Table 3 9 Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables on page 3 53 Values for device filename filetype are device flash 1 disk ordisk1 case insensitive filename A unique identifier for a file such as the macro ID for a PCL macro the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set the font ID for a PCL font and so on The filename is case sensitive filetype An identi
166. R Country specific y formatting size LEGAL LETTER 11X17 STATEMENT INTRAYASIZE Tray 4 installed A3 4 5 B4 BAPAPER B5PAPER JISB4 LETTER A4 SET only size default JISB5 CUSTOM EXECUTIVE FOLIO LEDGER Country specific y formatting size LEGAL LETTER 11X17 STATEMENT INTRAYSSIZE Tray 5 installed A3 A4 5 B4 BAPAPER B5PAPER JISB4 LETTER A4 SET only size default JISB5 CUSTOM EXECUTIVE FOLIO LEDGER Country specific y formatting size LEGAL LETTER 11X17 STATEMENT JOBNAME Print and Hold jobname NULL SET only jobname is a text string truncated to 24 characters jobname Note A null string is an acceptable value and indicates no Print and Hold Jobname is specified Table 3 3 Common Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued 11111911 JOBOFFSET Function Offset Pages Selections ON OFF BETWEENJOBS BETWEENCOPIES INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of Offset Pages as follows If Offset Pages is set to Off OFF is returned f Offset Pages is set to Between Jobs or Between Copies ON is returned Offset refers to stacking entire print jobs or copies of the same print job in two separate groups in an output bin Factory Default OFF LANG DEFAULT only Default display language DANISH GERMAN ENGLISH SPANISH FRENCH ITALIAN DUTCH NORWEGIAN SWEDISH PORTUGUESE FINNISH JAPANESE RUSSIAN POLIS
167. REDLENGTH DEFAULT only Colored Paper Length NORMAL SHORT NORMAL Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Selections Factory Default LCOLOREDLOADING Colored Paper OFF DUPLEX OFF DEFAULT only Loading LCOLOREDOUTBIN Assign UPPER LOWER DISABLED OPTIONALOUTBIN1 UPPER DEFAULT only Type Bin OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBINS DISABLED y Colored Paper OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBINS Model specific OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBINY OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on colored paper A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type Bin Colored Paper setting returns Assign Type Bin DINQUIRE or Colored Paper INQUIRE value setting Standard Bin UPPER Bin 1 OPTIONALOUTBIN1 Bin 2 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 Bin3 OPTIONALOUTBINS3 Bin 4 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 Bin 5 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 Bin 6 OPTIONALOUTBING6 Bin 7 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 Bin 8 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 Bin 9 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 Bin 10 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name LCOLOREDTEXTURE Colored Paper SMOOTH NORMAL ROUGH NORMAL DEFAULT only Texture LCOLOREDWEIGHT Colored Paper LIGHT NORMAL HEAVY NORMAL DEFAULT only Weight LCOLORMODEL Color Model CMYK RGB BLACK RGB CMYK Model specific
168. RITY 3 51 PJL Support Table B 5 Common Variables for PostScript Emulation Supported Printer Model X Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions E are listed for supported variables only e Variable JAMRECOVERY 3 51 P4 PRTPSERRS 3 51 P4 ADOBEMBT Table B 6 Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation Supported Printer Model X Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions E 3 LE Variable LPICTUREGRADE 3 52 P4 LPSFONTPRIORITY 3 52 P4 Table B 7 Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables X Supported Printer Model X Not Supported d Page numbers reference variable descriptions E Variable LDESCRIPTION 3 53 P4 LRWLOCK 5 LWLOCK lass v PJL Support Table B 8 Status Readback Commands Supported Printer X Not Supported Page numbers reference command descriptions E Command Name E Dinquire 3 54 3 55 Info 3 56 Inquire 3 58 4 Ustatus 3 59 Ustatusoff 3 60 Table 9 USTATUS Unsolicited Status Variables Supported Printer Model X Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions E 2 Variable DEVICE 3 60 JOB 3 60 V PAGE 3 60
169. R_A LPR_B LPR_C LPR_D LPR_NV and LPR_Pending contain the same parameters Enabled boolean Read only Supported values are True False Filtering name Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed Supported values are InterpreterBased None HasNames boolean Read only Always returns False Interpreter name Read only Supported values are PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data Supported values are True Data is sent and processed False Data is lost PortLocation string Read only Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set Supported values are Standard Port Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2 Option Slot 3 Type name Read only Always returns the value of Communications Device Parameters for the Communication Device LexLink LexLinkA LexLinkB LexLinkC LexLinkD LexLink_NV and LexLink_Pending contain the same parameters DelayedOutputClose boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job Supported values are True An end of file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs finish printing False An end of file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the interpreter whether or not that job has finished printing This value i
170. Required 3 64 30031 Restore Held Jobs Go x Restore Held Jobs Go Stop Stop Intervention Required 3 64 30034 34 Short Paper V Short Paper Intervention Required 3 64 30035 52 Flash Full x Flash Full Intervention Required 3 64 30035 62 Disk Full x Disk Full Intervention Required 3 64 30036 51 Defective Flash x Defective Flash Intervention Required 3 64 30036 53 Unformatted Flash x Unformatted Flash Intervention Required 3 64 30036 61 Defective Disk x Defective Disk Intervention Required 3 64 30036 63 Unformatted Disk x B 17 PJL Support Table B 10 PJL Messages for Auto Continuable Conditions Continued y Supported X Not Supported Page numbers reference message descriptions Message Status Code Return String Printer Model LE E Disk Operation Failed Jobs on Disk Disk Intervention Required 3 65 30075 80 Scheduled Maintenance V Scheduled Maintenance Intervention Required 3 65 30076 35 Res Save Off Deficient V Resource Save Off Memory Deficient Memory Intervention Required 3 65 30076 37 Insufficient Collation x Insufficient Collation Area Area Intervention Required 3 65 30107 Empty Hole Punch Box x Empty Hole Punch Box Intervention Required 3 65 30107 Empty Box M x Empty Box M Intervention Required 3 65 30107 Insert Box M x Insert Box M Intervention Required
171. Run Length Encoded Data Run Length Encoded Data is interpreted in pairs of bytes The first byte Acts as a counter or control byte Indicates how many times to repeat the data in the second byte Can be from 0 no repetition to 255 The second byte is the data byte Example ESC p300x 600Y ESCK b1M ESC r 1A 211 07 x 5 61170080 0500 0001 5 61170080 0500 0001 5 61170080 0500 0001 21 07 x ESC r B Tagged Image File Format Move cursor to 1 x 2 Set compression to Run Length Start raster graphics at current position Run Length 8x FF x 1x 80 x 6x 00 x 1x 01 x 1x 80 x 6x 00 x 1x 01 x 1x 80 x 6x 00 x 1 01 8x FF x End graphics TIFF Packbits contain a control byte a signed number that indicates whether the raster data bytes are to be repeated up to 127 times or printed as encoded data For control values of 0 through 127 the next Control 1 byte s is uncoded e For control values of 1 through 127 FF x 81 x the next byte is repeated Abs Control 1 times Example ESC p300x 900Y ESC 2 M ESC r 1A h2 W F9FF x EsckhoW 0080 FB00 0001 x Esc b9W 078000000000000001 x Es b6W 0080 FB00 0001 x ESCK h2 W F9FF x ESC r B Move cursor to 1 x 3 Set compression to TIFF Start Raster Graphics at current position TIFF 8x FF x 1 80 x 6x 00 x 1 01 x or
172. S Out Request to Send The printer sets this signal high and the signal remains high while the printer is on 5 CTS In Clear to Send This pin is optionally used for serial data flow control protocol when in serial mode 6 DSR In Data Set Ready This pin is optionally used for data validation depending on the Honor DSR setting or flow control depending on the Serial Protocol setting 7 GND Logic Ground 20 DTR Out Data Terminal Ready This pin is optionally used for serial data flow control protocol when in serial mode Interfaces Using an IBM Compatible Personal Computer with Serial Interface RS 232C Note These instructions are for connecting the printer to an IBM compatible personal computer using a dual asynchronous adapter or an external print server If you are using any of the above products or if your computer has a 9 pin D shell connector that conforms to the IBM designed 9 pin serial port use a 9 pin to 25 pin cable such as IBM Part Number 6450242 254 mm or 10 in Null modem cables such as Lexmark part number 1038693 15 24 m 50 ft will connect the converter cable to the printer The illustration below represents the 25 pin connectors for the RS 232C cable 1038693 13 25 m 6888868608688 6868888888888 1 14 The following illustration shows the pin assignments for the 9 pin to 25 pin IBM EIA RS 232C serial cables 9 to 25 Pin Cable Adapter
173. Setting Up the Communications 8 2 Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 95 98 8 2 Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows NT 4 0 8 3 Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 2000 8 4 Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows XP 8 5 Deciding Which Interface to Use aui metn Bex 8 6 Parallel angie 8 7 Standard Parallel 2 lt 8 8 Using the INIT Signal to retro 8 8 Computer to Printer 8 8 Printer to Computer Communication Advanced Status 8 13 Parallel Mode 8 14 Eu eic C 8 15 Signal Descriptions Tct m 8 15 Using the RS 232C Serial Interface ene eterne rtr 8 18 Network 8 28 Input Buffer 8 29 PEL GUDD ONI oria A 1 m B 1 is 1 Introduction CHAPTER 1 Introduction Overview The following edition of the
174. Slot 2 Option Slot 3 Type name Read only Always returns the value of Parameters 4 86 PostScript Table 4 11 PostScript Emulation Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition Device Parameters for the Parameters Device EthernetPhysical EthernetPhysicalA EthernetPhysicalB EthernetPhysicalC EthernetPhysicalD EthernetAddress string Read only On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data Supported values are True Data is sent and processed False Data is lost PortLocation string Read only Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set Supported values are Standard Port Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2 Option Slot 3 Type name Read only Always returns the value of Parameters Device Parameters for the Parameters Device TokenRingPhysical TokenRingPhysicalA TokenRingPhysicalB TokenRingPhysicalC TokenRingPhysicalD Address string Read only On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data Supported values are True Data is sent and processed False Data is lost PortLocation string Read only Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set Supported values are Standard Port Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2 Option Slot 3 Speed integer Supported values are 4 16 Type name R
175. Status Code Printer State Display String Online Status Intervention required 30034 34 Wrong Paper Size in Tray x wrong paper size in tray x Intervention required 30034 34 Wrong Paper Size Manual Feed FALSE wrong paper size manual feed Intervention required 40019 Remove Paper Standard Bin FALSE remove paper standard bin Intervention required 40019 Remove Paper Output Bin lt bin gt FALSE remove paper output bin Intervention required 40019 Remove Paper All Output Bins FALSE remove paper all output bins Intervention required 40019 Remove Paper lt linked set bin name gt FALSE remove paper Intervention required 4100x Check lt source gt Paper Guide FALSE check lt source gt paper guide Intervention required 41 34 Incorrect Media FALSE incorrect media Intervention required 41xyy Load lt source gt FALSE load request lt Custom Type Name gt lt Custom String gt lt size gt lt type gt lt size gt Intervention required 41 Load Manual FALSE load manual request Custom Type Custom String gt size type size Intervention required 41 Change lt source gt FALSE change request Custom Type Name gt Custom String gt size type lt size gt Intevention required 412yy Insert Duplex Pages amp Press Go FALSE insert duplex pages amp press Go Intervention requir
176. T DEFAULT See Table 3 5 Common Variables for PCL Emulation on page 3 48 for more information about these commands Forward and Backward Compatibility Modes for the Lexmark C760 and C762 Your PCL emulation has forward and backward compatibility modes The forward compatibility mode is used to emulate the fonts in the Hewlett Packard Company s LaserJet 4050 The backward compatibility mode is used for compatibility with the Hewlett Packard Company s LaserJet 5 and the Lexmark family of printers Standard PCL Emulation Fonts The following table lists the font selection commands for forward and backward compatibility mode for each of the 47 standard PCL emulation fonts Since the font selection commands for the forward and backward compatibility modes are identical they are listed together in the table Table 2 2 Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode Standard PCL Emulation Font Name Spacing Style Weight Typeface Courier 0 0 0 4099 Courier Italic 0 1 0 4099 Courier Bold 0 0 3 4099 Courier Bold Italic 0 1 3 4099 CG Times 1 0 0 4101 CG Times Italic 1 1 0 4101 CG Times Bold 1 0 3 4101 CG Times Bold Italic 1 1 3 4101 Univers Medium 1 0 0 4148 Univers Medium Italic 1 1 0 4148 Univers Bold 1 0 3 4148 Univers Bold Italic 1 1 3 4148 Times New Roman 1 0 0 16901 Times New Roman Italic 1 1 0 16901 Times New Roman Bold 1 0
177. Technical Reference contains information about printer commands and printer languages supported by the Lexmark C760 and C762 printers To determine which commands and languages your printer supports see the appendixes in the back of this document or see your printer documentation If your printer is not included in this edition of the Technical Reference it may be available in another version Visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com publications for more information Introduction Printed documentation is also available for some Lexmark printers Obtain the correct part number from the following table call 1 800 553 9727 and select option 1 to order a Technical Reference for your printer Table 1 1 Technical Reference Documentation Available in Hard Copy If you need a Technical Reference for the Order Lexmark part number Optra 1144079 Optra N 1149979 Optra SC 11C0905 Optra E310 12A2194 The Technical Reference is divided into the following Chapter 2 PCL Emulation Shows how to select PCL emulation and discusses PCL emulation commands GL 2 commands and resident font and symbol set support Chapter 3 Printer Job Language Contains detailed information about certain commands that cause the printer to enter PCL emulation PostScript emulation and Personal Printer Data Stream PPDS and many other types of commands Chapter 4 PostScript Emulation Provides information
178. Universal Height number of Decipoints Sets the height of the Universal size in decipoints 1 Decipoint 1 720 inch Table 2 12 Page Control Continued Command Parameters Function Result ESC amp fHO 0 Short edge 1 Long edge Set Universal Feed Direction Sets the feed direction of Universal size Feed direction means which side of the print media either the short edge or the long edge feeds through the printer first ESCaf W custom name number of bytes in the custom name Set Universal Custom Name Sets the user specified custom name for the Universal paper size being used ESC amp LHO 0 Portrait Default 1 Landscape 2 Reverse Portrait 3 Reverse Landscape Select Orientation Specifies the position of the logical page with respect to the physical page Note This setting resets margins the number of printable lines per page and the cursor position 5 amp Degrees 0 90 180 270 Default 0 Print Direction Rotates the coordinate system counter clockwise in 90 increments with respect to the current orientation Note Margins are not rotated or cleared ESC amp HT 0 Horizontal Printing 1 Vertical Rotated Printing Character Text Path Direction Vertically rotates text for use in vertical writing such as printing Japanese text ESC amp a L Set Left Margin Default Logical Page Width Column Sets the left mar
179. XEL 3 12 x CLEARABLEWARNINGS 3 12 x CONTEXTSWITCH x COPIES 3 12 CPLOCK 3 13 P4 DENSITY 3 13 DISKLOCK DUPLEX 3 13 ECONOMODE 3 13 P4 FORMATTERNUMBER 3 13 FORMLINES 3 13 PJL Support Table B 1 Common Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued 4X Supported X Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions and are listed for supported variables only Printer Default values are listed for exceptions only Model Ke E Variable Name HOLD 3 13 x HOLDKEY 3 13 x HOLDTYPE 3 14 x IMAGEADAPT 3 14 x INTRAY1 x INTRAY2 3 14 x INTRAY3 3 14 x INTRAY4 3 14 x INTRAY5 3 14 x INTRAY1SIZE 3 14 INTRAY2SIZE 3 14 INTRAY3SIZE 3 14 x INTRAY4SIZE 3 14 x INTRAYSSIZE 3 14 x IOBUFFER x IOSIZE x JOBATTR x JOBNAME 3 14 x JOBOFFSET 3 15 x LANG 3 15 4 LOWTONER 3 15 MANUALFEED 3 15 MEDIASOURCE x MEDIATYPE 3 15 MPTRAY 3 15 x ORIENTATION 3 15 OUTBIN 3 16 PJL Support Table B 1 Common Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued 4X Supported X Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions and are listed for supported variables only Printer Default values are listed for exceptions only LE Varia
180. Y 3 46 x LTRAY4SENSEDTYPEPAPER 3 46 x LTRAY4SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY 3 46 x LTRAY1AUTOSIZE 3 46 x LTRAY2AUTOSIZE 3 46 x LTRAY3AUTOSIZE 3 46 x LTRAY4AUTOSIZE 3 46 x LTRAYSAUTOSIZE 3 46 x LTRAY1PAPERTYPE 3 46 LTRAY2PAPERTYPE 3 47 LTRAY3PAPERTYPE 3 47 x LTRAY4PAPERTYPE 3 47 x LTRAYSPAPERTYPE 3 47 x LTRAY1RENUMBER 3 47 LTYPE1FONTS 3 47 LUSDEFAULTS 3 47 Table B 3 Common Variables for PCL Emulation Y Supported Printer X Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions 3 Variable Name E FONTNUMBER 3 48 P4 FONTSOURCE 3 48 P4 PITCH 3 48 PJL Support Table B 3 Common Variables for PCL Emulation Continued 4 Supported Printer Model X Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions E 3 LE Variable PTSIZE 3 48 SYMSET 3 48 4 Table B 4 Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation Supported Printer Model X Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions E 3 Variable LA4WIDTH 3 49 LASSIGNFEEDER 3 49 x LASSIGNMANUALENVELOPE 3 49 P4 LASSIGNMANUALPAPER 3 49 V LASSIGNMPFEEDER 3 49 x LASSIGNTRAY1 3 50 LASSIGNTRAY2 3 50 LASSIGNTRAY3 3 50 x LASSIGNTRAY4 3 50 x LASSIGNTRAY5 3 50 x LBITMAPROUNDING 3 50 LCOLOREXTENSIONS 3 50 LFONTCOMPATIBILITY 3 51 LFONTPRIO
181. YPE6 LTRAY1SENSEDTYPE Detected TRANSPARENCY CUSTOMTYPE5 TRANSPARENC TRANSPARENCY for Transp Y arency Tray 1 LTRAY2SENSEDTYPE Detected Type PLAIN BOND GLOSSY CARDSTOCK LABELS PLAIN PAPER for Paper LETTERHEAD PREPRINTED COLORED CUSTOMTYPE2 Tray 2 CUSTOMTYPE1 CUSTOMTYPE2 CUSTOMTYPE3 CUSTOMTYPE4 CUSTOMTYPE6 LTRAY2SENSEDTYPE Detected TRANSPARENCY 5 TRANSPARENC TRANSPARENCY for Trans Y parency Tray 2 Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Function Selections Factory Default LTRAYSSENSEDTYPE Detected Type PLAIN BOND GLOSSY CARDSTOCK LABELS PLAIN PAPER for Paper LETTERHEAD PREPRINTED COLORED CUSTOMTYPES3 Tray 3 CUSTOMTYPE1 CUSTOMTYPE2 CUSTOMTYPES CUSTOMTYPE4 CUSTOMTYPE6 LTRAYSSENSEDTYPE Detected TRANSPARENCY 5 TRANSPARENC TRANSPARENCY for Trans Y parency Tray 3 LTRAYASENSEDTYPE Detected Type PLAIN BOND GLOSSY CARDSTOCK LABELS PLAIN PAPER for Paper LETTERHEAD PREPRINTED COLORED CUSTOMTYPE4 Tray 4 CUSTOMTYPE1 CUSTOMTYPE2 CUSTOMTYPES CUSTOMTYPE4 CUSTOMTYPE6 LTRAY4SENSEDTYPE Detected TRANSPARENCY 5 TRANSPARENC TRANSPARENCY for Trans Y parency Tray 4 LTRAY1AUTOSIZE Auto Size ON OFF ON Sensing for DEFAULT only Tay LTRAY2AUTOSIZE Auto Size ON OFF ON Sensing for DEFAULT only Tray 2 LTR
182. YPESLENGTH Custom Type 5 NORMAL SHORT NORMAL DEFAULT only Length LCUSTOMTYPESLOADING Custom Type 5 OFF DUPLEX OFF DEFAULT only Paper Loading LCUSTOMTYPE5MEDIA Custom Type 5 PAPER COATED GLOSSY TRANSPARENCY PAPER Media LABELS CARDSTOCK ENVELOPE COTTONPAPER LCUSTOMTYPESNAME Custom Type 5 name CUSTOMTYPES5 DEFAULT only Deme name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types The text string is truncated to 24 characters When queried the quotes are not returned around the string name The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name LCUSTOMTYPESOUTBIN Assign UPPER LOWER DISABLED OPTIONALOUTBIN1 UPPER DEFAULT only Type Bin OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBINS DISABLED y Custom Type 5 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBINS Model specific OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBINT OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBINS OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on custom type 5 paper A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type Bin Custom Type 5 setting returns Assign Type Bin DINQUIRE or Custom Type 5 INQUIRE value setting Standard Bin UPPER Bin 1 OPTIONALOUTBIN1 Bin 2 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 Bin 3 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 Bin 4 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 Bin 5 OPTIONALOUTBINS Bin 6 OPTIONALOUTBING Bin 7 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 Bin 8 OPTIONALOUTBIN8
183. a The port transmits XON and XOFF without parity bits Ignore The port expects a parity bit when the port receives a data frame The port ignores the parity bit The port uses even parity when it transmits XON and XOFF Some printers post a 54 Standard Serial Error or a 54 Serial Option x Error x represents the number of the serial port the first time they detect a transmission error parity overrun or framing The 54 Standard Serial Error or the 54 Serial Option x Error can be reset from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional See your printer documentation for more information If repeated serial errors occur power the printer off and then back on to restore proper serial operation Interfaces Data Flow Control Data flow control is accomplished through the following lines Data Set Ready DSR Data Terminal Ready DTR Five data flow control protocols are available e DTR pacing DTR DSR XON XOFF XON XOFF DTR XON XOFF DTR DSR Your printer supports two modes in which both hardware and software data flow control protocols are performed In XON XOFF DTR mode the printer uses both XON XOFF and DTR pacing When XON XOFF DTR DSR mode is active the printer uses both XON XOFF and DTR DSR pacing Robust XON may be selected when the data flow control protocol for the serial port is set to XON XOFF XON XOFF DTR or XON XOFF DTR DSR pacing The printer sends a continuous stream of X
184. a International Typeface Corporation Arial The Monotype Corporation plc ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation Candid Agfa Corporation Joanna MT The Monotype Corporation plc CG Omega Product of Agfa Corporation Marigold Arthur Baker CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license Monaco Apple Computer Inc from The Monotype Corporation plc is a New York Apple Computer Inc product of Agfa Corporation Oxford Arthur Baker Chicago Apple Computer Inc Palatino Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiarie Clarendon Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Stempel Garamond Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiarie Eurostile Nebiolo Taffy Agfa Corporation Geneva Apple Computer Inc Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc TrueType Apple Computer Inc Helvetica Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Univers Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiarie Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry Wingdings Microsoft Corporation ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation AppleTalk EtherTalk LocalTalk and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc registered in the United States and other countries PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett Packard Company PCL 3 PCL 5 and PCL 6 are Hewlett Packard Company s designations of a set of printer commands language and functions included in its printer products These printers are intended to be compatible with the PCL 3 PCL 5 and PCL 6 l
185. ackward compatibility modes 2 9 standard protocol 8 1 1 status messages attendance conditions 3 67 auto continuable conditions 3 63 information messages 3 61 operator intervention paper handling 3 72 operator intervention paper jams 3 75 X 14 PostScript emulation 4 93 switching printer languages MarkVision Professional 2 1 methods 5 1 operator panel 2 1 4 1 PCL emulation 2 1 PostScript emulation 4 1 Printer Job Language PJL 3 3 setting for different interfaces 5 2 SmartSwitch 5 1 software program 2 2 4 2 Symbol Set Tables locating ID values 2 32 symbol sets printing directory list flash memory or disk 6 3 selecting Lexmark E323 2 14 Lexmark T630 2 14 Lexmark T632 2 14 Lexmark T634 2 14 setting password protection 3 93 storing on flash memory or disk 6 3 support ISO fonts 2 29 syntax commands PCL emulation 2 31 Printer Job Language 3 1 I test page printing from PJL flash memory and disk directory 3 83 6 4 menu settings page 3 83 PostScript emulation font list 3 83 printer test page 3 83 trays PCL emulation page size 2 36 paper source 2 36 PostScript emulation automatic size sensing search order 4 4 operators 4 6 Printer Job Language PJL paper size 3 14 paper source 3 39 status message codes 3 74 Type 1 fonts description 2 11 forward backward compatibility modes 2 11 U Universal Exit Language 3 2 V variables PJL common for all printer languages 3 12 common for PCL emulation 3 48
186. action the value is returned when the parameter is read 1 Indicates that the current file system should be deleted and a new one of PhysicalSize created the flash must be formatted already The flash must first be mounted otherwise an ioerror results Reformats the entire flash before creating a new file system of PhysicalSize 3 or greater has the same effect as the value 2 and also tests the flash x 2 times N Legal value Any non negative integer LogicalSize integer This parameter is not used for InitializeAction InitializeAction always formats to PhysicalSize regardless of what is specified in LogicalSize A query returns the current size in pages of the file system on the device A value of 0 zero indicates that the device is not mounted Legal value Any non negative integer including O zero The value of LogicalSize must be less than or equal to the value of PhysicalSize A rangecheck error occurs if you try to set a larger value or set the value to 0 zero Mounted boolean True System attempts to mount the flash False System attempts to dismount the flash When a device is mounted it becomes known to the system and is readable depending on the nature of the device A device must contain a valid file system or it will not mount successfully To verify if the device is currently mounted query this parameter immediately after setting it PhysicalSize integer Read only Indi
187. age 2 55 Note The values of 1 2 and 3 are not supported by any of the printers included in this document 12345 Universal Exit Language UEL Start of PUL 2 35 Table A 2 lists GL 2 commands and identifies the printers that support them Table A 2 GL 2 Commands 4 Supported Page numbers reference command Printer X Not Supported descriptions Model Command Function AA Arc Absolute 2 57 4 AC Anchor Corner 2 59 AD Define Alternate Font 2 58 4 AR Arc Relative 2 57 4 AT Arc Absolute Three Point 2 57 BR Bezier Relative 2 57 4 BZ Bezier Absolute 2 57 4 CF Character Fill 2 58 4 CI Circle 2 57 Comment 2 56 Character Plot 2 58 4 A 7 PCL Support Table A 2 GL 2 Commands Continued y Supported Page numbers reference command Printer X Not Supported descriptions 1 LE o E Command Function CR Color Range 2 59 DF Default 2 56 DI Absolute Direction 2 58 DR Relative Direction 2 58 Define Label Terminator 2 58 DV Define Variable Text Path 2 58 Edge Rectangle Absolute 2 57 4 EP Edge Polygon 2 57 ER Edge Rectangle Relative 2 57 5 Extra Space 2 58 EW Edge Wedge 2 57 Fl Pr
188. age space For example if you have an 840MB hard disk installed you must partition a minimum of 84MB of the disk for job buffering You must define the size of the job buffer area before you enable buffering for any link ports For minimum acceptable job buffering performance the hard disk should be able to read and write files at a sustained rate of 600Kb sec The Lexmark hard disk option supports this requirement Some advantages of job buffering include The printer accepts print jobs more quickly The printer accepts print jobs from all ports as long as the disk is not filled The printer continues to print even after the host computer network connection or printer server goes down Buffered jobs print when power is restored after a printer power loss The printer manages print jobs from multiple sources Keep in mind that job buffering may also Slow system performance Restrict the amount of memory available on the disk for other uses ncrease the time required for a printer reset or recovery after a power loss Reprint jobs after a power on reset POR Creating a Partition Before job buffering is enabled for a port you must allocate a portion of the disk for job buffering functions The minimum size for a job buffering partition is 10 percent of the disk storage space When a new partition is created the entire disk is formatted and all resources previously downloaded to the disk are lost Once
189. alue after execution of the PJL RESET command Syntax 1 RESET lt CR gt LF Common Variables for Both Printer Languages Note The word common applies to those variables common to both your printer and the Hewlett Packard Company s LaserJet printers The following common variables are supported for both PCL emulation and PostScript emulation unless otherwise noted Therefore the command modifier value parameter should not be specified To determine which variables your printer supports see Table B 1 Common Variables for Both Printer Languages on page B 1 Table 3 3 Common Variables for Both Printer Languages MEET AUTOCONT DEFAULT only Function Selections Factory Default 0 5 to 255 OFF ON 0 A value of 0 or OFF indicates Auto Continue is disabled A value of ON indicates Auto Continue is set to 30 INQUIRE or DINQUIRE on the Auto Continue variable returns a numeric value Auto Continue Note If a value greater than 255 is specified by a SET or DEFAULT command the value is changed to 255 BINDING Duplex Bind LONGEDGE SHORTEDGE LONGEDGE BITSPERPIXEL Image Enhancement Technology and Image Enhancement Technology Type 1 2 4 Auto A value of 1 indicates the Image Enhancement Technology setting is set to Off A value of 2 or 4 indicates the Image Enhancement Technology setting is set to On INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of Image Enhancement Technolog
190. ample Wednesday DayOfWeekNum integer Supported values are 0 6 0 Sunday DayOfWeekShort string Short day name for example Wed Device Parameters for the lODevice Device disk1 BlockSize integer Read only Free integer Read only Indicates the amount of free space available in pages on the disk Valid only if the disk is mounted mounted is set to True A value of 0 zero indicates that either the disk is not mounted or is full HasNames boolean Read only Indicates if the disk supports named files Valid only if the disk is mounted mounted is set to True If the disk is not mounted the parameter has a value of False 4 89 PostScript Table 4 11 PostScript Emulation Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition InitializeAction integer Specifies an action for initializing the disk Supported values are 0 Indicates no action the value returned when the parameter is read 1 Indicates that the current file system if any should be deleted and a new one of LogicalSize created the disk is assumed to have been formatted already The disk must first be mounted otherwise an ioerror results 2 Reformats the entire disk before creating a new file system of size LogicalSize 3 or greater has the same effect as the value 2 and also tests the disk x 2 times Note The current file system refers to FileSystem See Type as follows for more information LogicalSize inte
191. an returns a boolean with the same value as the system parameter DoStartPage The DoStartPage system parameter must be present for the compatibility operator dostartpage to be present Error stackoverflow dosysstart dosysstart boolean returns the current value of the StartupMode system parameter A boolean value is returned true StartupMode set to 1 or 11 false StartupMode other than 1 or 11 This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence currentsystemsparams StartupMode get Error stackoverflow duplexer duplexer boolean queries if a duplex unit is installed A boolean value is returned on the stack true duplex unit is installed false duplex unit is not installed Note For printers that do not support duplexing this value is always f al se Error stackoverflow PostScript duplexmode duplexmode boolean queries the current value for the Duplex page device parameter true printing mode is duplex false printing mode is simplex Note For printers that do not support duplexing this value is always f al se This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation Sequence currentpagedevice Duplex get Error stackoverflow enginesync enginesync boolean indicates if the printer waits for the last page of a job to print before returning a Ctrl D to the host computer Error stackoverflow PostScript file f
192. and to modify any of these variables forces a write to flash or disk if resource collection mode is set to On before the command is executed The DEFAULT command causes a PJL Reset To determine which variables your printer supports see Table B 7 Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables on page B 13 Table 3 9 Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables Factory Variable Function Selections Default LDESCRIPTION Macro or Symbol alphanumeric string NULL DEFAULT Set Description The description is limited to 16 characters and must be enclosed in 1 tion only double quotes If more than 16 characters are specified by the DEFAULT command the first 16 characters are used and PJL parser warning is issued The DINQUIRE command can be used to query the file description The description is returned in the response LRWLOCK Read Write Lock alphanumeric string DEFAULT password foran This variable can be used with other PJL commands only entire device or a particular on DEFAULT command NULL ina 2 the device The Read Write password is limited to eight characters If more no om than eight characters are specified by the PJL DEFAULT password command the password is truncated and a PJL warning is issued If a null password is given password protection is removed from the specified device or file DINQUIRE or INQUIRE commands NOTSET Use these commands to determine if a password has been specified for a device or specific fil
193. angle Size in PCL Units 2 47 4 Set Font ID 2 45 5 Set Character Code 2 45 Font Control 2 45 4 ESC estG Area Fill ID 2 46 2 48 ESC c H Horizontal Rectangle Size in Decipoints 2 47 GL 2 Horizontal Plot Size in Inches 2 55 4 GL 2 Vertical Plot Size in Inches 2 55 ESC cHP Fill Rectangular Area 2 48 ESC cH Q Pattern Control 2 47 ESC c R Symbol Set ID Code 2 44 ESC CHS Symbol Set Control 2 44 ESC eOT Set Picture Frame Anchor Point 2 55 ESC c V Vertical Rectangle Size in Decipoints 2 47 4 ESC oitW data User Defined Pattern 2 47 Picture Frame Horizontal Size in Decipoints 2 55 4 ESC cHY Picture Frame Vertical Size in Decipoints 2 55 ESC 0 0 Logical Operation 2 46 ESC Q R Pixel Placement 2 46 2 ESC f W data Color Lookup Tables 2 52 ESC m W data Download Dither Matrix 2 52 ESC o M b Print Quality 2 56 x ESC o W data Driver Configuration Command 2 52 ESC n P Push Pop Palette 2 52 5 Set Pattern Reference Point 2 47 A 5 PCL Support Table A 1 PCL Emulation Commands Continued 4 Supported Printer X Not Supported Page numbers reference command descriptions 5 N 5 E Function ESC n X Horizontal Cursor Position in PCL Units 2 40 ESC pgyY Vertical Cursor Position in PCL Units 2
194. anguages This means these printers recognize PCL 3 PCL 5 and PCL 6 commands used in various application programs and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated PostScript is Adobe Systems designation of a set of printer commands language and functions included in its software products These printers are intended to be compatible with the PostScript language This means these printers recognize PostScript commands used in various application programs and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands Other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Safety Information Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible CAUTION Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the power cord or telephone during a lightning storm Refer service or repairs other than those described in the operating instructions to a professional service person This product is designed tested and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific Lexmark components 1998 2005 Lexmark International Inc All rights reserved UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RIGHTS This software and any accompanying documentation provided under this agreement are commercial computer software and documentation developed ex
195. arallel interface is using open collector drivers to transmit data to the printer Parallel Mode 1 should be set to Off to increase reliability of data transfer Turning this mode Off equalizes all parallel interface signal impedances On some printer models you can set Parallel Mode 1 to Off from the printer operator panel through MarkVision Professional or through a PJL command See your printer documentation for more information Interfaces Parallel Mode 2 Parallel Mode 2 is a feature available for many Lexmark printers The factory default setting is On The timing required by the printer is clearly indicated in Standard Protocol Data Transfer Sequence on page 8 11 This is the classic Centronics interface timing By setting Parallel Mode 2 to Off from the printer operator panel through MarkVision Professional or through a PJL command the printer changes when data is valid Once Parallel Mode 2 is set to Off the printer takes data from the host computer at the trailing edge of STROBE This is the last possible host driven transition where data should be valid Note You may find this feature helpful when having data transfer reliability problems Signal Descriptions STROBE Receiver for the Lexmark T640x The following diagram illustrates the STROBE receiver for the Lexmark T640x Connector Pin 74LVC161284 470 10 GND Interfaces AUTOFD Receiver for the Lexmark T640x The following d
196. are Do not staple the print job Staple each set in the front position Staple each set in the rear position Staple each set according to the Auto setting Staple each set in the dual position The format for setting the Staple key is Staple n setpagedevice TraySwitch boolean Indicates tray linking is always active When the media in one input source is depleted other input sources are searched to determine if the same media can be found in another source If another source is found the alternate source is selected The media in both input sources must be the same size and type for tray linking to occur PostScript Table 4 8 Page Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition Tumble boolean Indicates the orientation of the second side of a duplexed page with respect to the first side Supported values are True Causes pages to print as if they are to be bound across the top of the page image is rotated 180 on the back side of the page False Causes pages to print as if they are to be side bound as in a book UniversalDetails dictionary Controls the variable Universal paper size feature The entries are as follows Type is a constant value To find the value of Type for your printer see Table C 2 on page C 4 PageSize is an array of two numbers real or integer that defines the x and y values in points for Universal Orientation is an integer that d
197. at the page size as paper Error stackoverflow setignoresize integer setignoresize overrides the automatic page orientation selected by the printer to support custom media sizes This operator determines whether or not to adjust the text based on the page size integer value may be 0 perform automatic orientation of text based on page size default 1 treat the page size as an envelope 2 treat the page size as paper A value set by this operator takes effect on a subsequent setpagedevice only if PageSize Policy is set to 7 Errors rangecheck stackunderflow typecheck PostScript setuniversalsize integer integer integer string setuniversalsize changes the current settings for the Universal paper size Each parameter on the stack indicates Universal Width minimum to maximum width in points Universal Height minimum to maximum height in points Universal Feed Direction 0 short edge 1 long edge Custom Universal Prompt String String must be 16 characters or less Error rangecheck stackunderflow typecheck Paper Tray Support When the printer receives one of the operators listed in Table 4 2 Tray Selected with Tray Operators on page 4 6 it performs the actions listed as follows This paper tray selection process ends as soon as a suitable paper source is chosen and paper is fed from this tray The printer checks the value of manualfeed in statusdict and the ManualFeed page device parameter If eith
198. ata to all filenames referenced when using PostScript emulation file operators To prevent the data extension from being added issue the following PostScript emulation command statusdict begin false setfilenameextend end To add the data extension automatically again issue statusdict begin true setfilenameextend end The following example shows how to remove a file for the font myfont from the disk The PostScript emulation resource collection filename is myf ont typel1 The PostScript emulation command to remove the file is statusdict begin false setfilenameextend disk myfont typel deletefile true setfilenameextend end For other file types see page 6 6 Note We recommend that you enable setfilenameextend as soon as possible after you disable it For example the following PostScript emulation commands generate an undefinedfilename error disk iconimage w file dup 0 0606060686c6ff writestring closefile statusdict begin false setfilenameextend end disk iconimage r file Error undefinedfilename OffendingCommand file This occurs because the filename actually written to disk is iconimage data When setfilenameextend is enabled the default all PostScript emulation file operators treat filename operands as filename data when disabled they treat filename operands literally If you receive unexpected undefinedfilename or similar errors try toggling setfilenameexten
199. ation change Intervention required 30017 39 Complex Page FALSE complex page Intervention required 30018 54 Standard Serial Error FALSE standard serial error Intervention required serial option error 30018 54 Serial Option 1 Error FALSE Intervention required 30018 54 Parallel Error FALSE parallel error Intervention required 30018 54 Std Network Software Error FALSE network software error Intervention required 30018 54 Std Ser Fax Connection Lost FALSE standard serial fax connection lost Intervention required 30018 56 Standard Serial Disabled FALSE standard serial disabled Note The Display String is returned in the current language A display string longer than one line shows only the first line of the message Table 3 13 PJL Messages for Auto Continuable Conditions Continued Status Printer State Code Display String Online Status Intervention required 30018 56 Serial 1 Port Disabled FALSE serial option disabled Intervention required 30018 56 Standard Parallel Port Disabled FALSE standard parallel port disabled Intervention required 30018 56 Parallel Port Disabled FALSE parallel port disabled Intervention required 30018 56 Parallel Port x Disabled FALSE parallel port error Intervention required 30018 56 Standard USB Port Disabled FALSE standard USB port disabled Intervention required 30019 35 Res Save Off Deficient Memory FALSE resource save
200. ator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence Go into exitserver or startjob context lt lt PowerSave integer gt gt setpagedevice Errors rangecheck stackunderflow typecheck PostScript setresolution integer setresolution changes the resolution for the current print job and discards unprinted data See your printer documentation for a list of supported resolutions The following integers are valid 300 300 dpi is set to On 600 600 dpi is set to On 1200 1200 dpi is set to On Notes Forsome printers the resolution value returns to the user default setting for the Print Resolution menu item at the end of the print job The printer waits for the paper path to clear before changing the resolution Ifthe resolution is changed for the back side of a duplexed sheet the printer ejects a blank back page changes the resolution and prints the information for the page where the resolution was changed on the front side of the next sheet This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence lt lt HWResolution xres yres gt gt setpagedevice where xres yres Errors rangecheck stackunderflow typecheck setsccbatch integer integer integer setsccbatch supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019 4029 and 4039 It is parsed and three integers are removed from the stack and discarded Error stackunderflow
201. ault PJL password disables the use of PJL DEFAULT and INITIALIZE commands See DEFAULT Command on page 3 8 and INITIALIZE Command on page 3 11 EOJ Command The EOJ command signifies the end of a print job Syntax QPJL EOJ NAME job name lt CR gt LF Note Only use the EOJ command in conjunction with the JOB command Parameter NAME job name Use the NAME parameter to assign a character string name to a particular job The name may be any combination of printable characters spaces or horizontal tabs up to a maximum of 80 characters spaces or tabs The NAME string may be different from the NAME string specified in the JOB command The j ob name must be enclosed in double quotes 3 7 Environment Commands and Variables This section describes the printer environment variables and the PJL commands used to modify or query the variables Note The word common applies to those variables common to both your printer and the Hewlett Packard Company s LaserJet printers Table 3 2 Environment Variable Categories Beginning Categories Common Variables for Both Printer Languages 3 12 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages 3 19 Common Variables for PCL emulation 3 48 Printer Unique Variables for PCL emulation 3 49 Common Variables for PostScript emulation 3 51 Printer Unique Variables for PostScript emulation 3 52 Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables 3 53
202. ay 4 13 25 A5 Paper tray 5 and envelope feeder x 44 Notes 27 When the printer receives the page size command any partially 12 45 B5 formatted pages printed and the cursor position and margins 46 are reset 101 C 2 Uni Duplex printing is not supported on any envelope The size loaded in the active source is checked to see if it matches the requested size If the multipurpose feeder is configured as Envelopes Cassette or Manual the same applies however if the multipurpose feeder is configured as First and media is loaded in the 80 Monarch 7 3 4 multipurpose feeder then regardless of media size it is the source 81 Commercial 10 d until it is 89 Commercial 9 USSO Mpy 90 DL 91 C5 99 100 B5 Envelope 600 Other Envelope ESC Paper Source 0 Active Source or Eject Page Selects the paper feed source 1 ee d Note If the paper source is changed for the back of a duplexed page 3 Pinus eel e d a blank back page prints the paper source changes and the 1 4 NVE Ope meg information for the back side of the page is printed on the front side of 5 Tray 3 a page sent from the new paper source 6 Optional Envelope Feeder 7 Auto Select 8 Multipurpose Feeder 20 Tray 4 21 Tray 5 62 Optional Paper Source Set Universal Width number of Decipoints Sets the width of the Universal size in decipoints 1 Decipoint 1 720 inch ESC AEF Set
203. b Supported values are True An end of file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs finish printing False An end of file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the interpreter whether or not that job has finished printing This value is set independently for each port Enabled boolean Read only Supported values are True False Filtering name Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed Supported values are InterpreterBased None FlowControl name Designates the serial flow control method between the host computer and the device Returns a value corresponding to the Serial Protocol menu item Supported values are Dtr DtrDsr XonXoff XonXoffDtr XonXoffDtrDsr HasNames boolean Read only Always returns False HonorDSR boolean Serial Honor DSR Supported values True Honor DSR is set to On False Honor DSR is set to Off 4 74 PostScript Table 4 11 PostScript Emulation Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition Interpreter name Read only Supported values are PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data Supported values are True Data is sent and processed False Data is lost Parity name Designates the parity to be used between the host computer and the device Returns the value
204. ber representation matches the application real number representation and compensates if necessary Error stackoverflow renamefile oldfilename newfilename renamefile renames the oldfilename to the newfilename This operator is in systemdict Errors invalidfileaccess ioerror stackunderflow typecheck undefinedfilename Note An undefinedfilename error occurs if the file does not exist PostScript resolution resolution integer queries the resolution for the current print job An integer is returned on the stack 300 300 is set to On 600 600 dpi is set to On 1200 1200 dpi is set to On This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence currentpagedevice HWResolution get 0 get Error stackoverflow revision revision integer queries the Revision system parameter An integer is returned on the stack to indicate the revision level Error stackoverflow PostScript sccbatch channel sccbatch baud option returns the user default settings for serial communication parameters channel has the following valid integer values 9 25 If only one serial interface port is available on the printer both 9 and 25 return the same values Baud and option values are returned on the stack baud returns the value of the Baud menu item opti on returns an 8 bit value as defined in the following illustration 7 6 5 Stop Bits Data Style Flow Control S
205. ble B 4 Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation on page B 12 Table 3 6 Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation Function Selections Factory Default LA4WIDTH A4 Width in 198 203 198 millimeters LASSIGNFEEDER Tray Renumber OFF 0 to 199 OFF Assign Envelope Variable used with PUL SET or DEFAULT Feeder command OFF 0 to 199 NONE OFF Variable used with PUL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command LASSIGNMANUALENVELOPE Tray Renumber OFF 0 to 199 OFF 2 Manual Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT METER command OFF 0 to 199 NONE OFF Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command LASSIGNMANUALPAPER Tray Renumber OFF 0 to 199 OFF Assign Manual Paper Variable used with PIL SET or DEFAULT command OFF 0 to 199 NONE OFF Variable used with PUL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command LASSIGNMPFEEDER Tray Renumber OFF 0 to 199 OFF Assign Multipurpose Variable used with PUL SET or DEFAULT Feeder command OFF 0 to 199 NONE OFF Variable used with PUL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command Table 3 6 Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation Continued gt LASSIGNTRAY1 Function Tray Renumber Assign Tray 1 Selections OFF 0 to 199 Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT command Factory Default OFF OFF 0 to 199 NONE Variable used with PUL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command LASSIGNTRAY2 Tray Renumber Assign Tray 2 OFF 0 to 199 Variable us
206. ble Name PAGEPROTECT 3 16 4 PAPER 3 16 PARALLEL 3 17 x PASSWORD 3 17 PERSONALITY 3 17 POWERSAVE 3 17 POWERSAVETIME 3 18 PRINTQUALITY x QTY 3 18 x RENDERMODE x REPRINT 3 18 RESOLUTION 3 18 RESOURCESAVE 3 18 RESOURCESAVESIZE x RET 3 18 x TIMEOUT 3 18 USERNAME 3 19 x WIDEA4 3 19 x PJL Support Table B 2 Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages Supported Printer Model X Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions and are listed for supported variables only Default values are listed for exceptions only N 7 Lr Variable LACTIVEBINRESET 3 19 x LADVANCEDSTATUS 3 19 LALARMCONTROL 3 19 x LAUTOCRLF 3 19 LAUTOLFCR 3 19 LBLANKPAGES 3 19 LBONDLENGTH 3 19 x LBONDLOADING 3 19 x LBONDOUTBIN 3 20 x LBONDTEXTURE 3 20 LBONDWEIGHT 3 20 LBWLOCK 3 20 x LCANCEL 3 20 LCARDSTOCKLENGTH 3 20 x LCARDSTOCKLOADING 3 20 x LCARDSTOCKOUTBIN 3 21 x LCARDSTOCKTEXTURE 3 21 LCARDSTOCKWEIGHT 3 21 LCOLLATION 3 21 LCOLORCORRECTION 3 21 x LCOLOREDLENGTH 3 21 x LCOLOREDLOADING 3 22 x LCOLOREDOUTBIN 3 22 x LCOLOREDTEXTURE 3 22 V LCOLOREDWEIGHT 3 22 V LCOLORMODEL 3 22 x LCUSTOMPAPERUNITS 3 22 4 PJL Support Table B 2 Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printe
207. bleFastProcs integer This bit field allows precompiled PostScript procedures to be selectively disabled These precompiled procedures speed the execution time of some application generated print jobs by substituting PostScript procedures in the job s ProcSet with fast functions that are built into the printer firmware These parameters are Lexmark specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 2016 2 These parameters are available with the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010 3 These parameters are Lexmark specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010 4 67 PostScript Table 4 10 PostScript Emulation System Parameters Continued Key Type Definition DoPrintErrors boolean Specifies whether to print an error page using a built in error handler when a PostScript emulation error occurs True Print PS Error user default value is set to On False Print PS Error user default value is set to Off DoStartPage boolean Read only Always returns False EnableExtraFonts boolean True All 75 resident fonts are enabled False Original 39 PostScript fonts are available Note Changes to this parameter take effect when PostScript is restarted EngineBoot string Read only Specifies the version of the boot code EngineCode string Read only Specifies the version of the engine code EngineSpeed integer Read only Maximum speed of the print engine
208. cated to 24 characters Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on custom type 3 paper A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type Bin Custom Type 3 setting returns DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value Assign Type Bin Custom Type 3 setting Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 name UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN 1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBINS5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name UPPER DISABLED Model specific LCUSTOMTYPE3TEXTURE DEFAULT only Custom Type 3 Texture SMOOTH NORMAL ROUGH NORMAL LCUSTOMTYPESWEIGHT DEFAULT only Custom Type 3 Weight LIGHT NORMAL HEAVY NORMAL LCUSTOMTYPEALENGTH DEFAULT only Custom Type 4 Length NORMAL SHORT NORMAL 3 27 Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued MERE LCUSTOMTYPE4LOADING DEFAULT only Function Custom Type 4 Paper Loading Selections OFF DUPLEX Factory Default OFF LCUSTOMTYPE4MEDIA DEFAULT only Custom Type 4 Media PAPER COATED GLOSSY TRANSPARENCY LABELS CARDSTOCK ENVELOPE COTTONPAPER PAPER LCUSTOMTYPE4NAME DEFAULT only Custom Type 4 Name name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types The text string is truncated to 24 characters When que
209. cates the size of the flash in pages for a flash that is mounted A value of 0 indicates that the device is not mounted Removable boolean Read only Indicates if the drive supports removable flash Searchable boolean Read only Indicates if the flash participates in searches in file system operations that specify a filename without specifying a device SearchOrder integer Read only If the Searchable parameter is True indicates the priority at which the flash is searched for a file in operations where no device has been specified A lower integer indicates a high priority If the Searchable parameter is False the value of this integer has no meaning Type name Read only This constant always returns the value of FileSystem Writeable boolean Read only Indicates if the files on the flash can be opened for write access A write protected flash returns False When the flash is not mounted this parameter indicates if the device supports writeable media PostScript Table 4 11 PostScript Emulation Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition Device Parameters for the lODevice rom BlockSize integer Read only Free integer Read only Indicates the amount in pages of free space available in ROM Valid only if the ROM is mounted mounted is set to True A value of 0 zero indicates that either the ROM is not mounted or it is full
210. ch Envelope Feeder x Reattach Envelope Feeder Intervention Required 3 69 40028 Install Env Feed or Cancel x Install Env Feeder or Job Cancel Job Intervention Required 3 69 40028 Reattach MP Feeder x Reattach MP Feeder Intervention Required 3 69 40029 Reattach Output Bin bin gt x Reattach Output Bin 1 XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK where CMYK denotes Cyan Magenta Yellow and Black cartridges respectively PJL Support Table B 11 PJL Messages for Attendance Conditions Continued 4 Supported Printer X Not Supported resp Page numbers reference message descriptions Status Code Return String Intervention Required 3 69 40029 Reattach Bins bin x bin x Reattach Bins ity Intervention Required 3 69 40029 Install Bin x or Cancel Job x Install Bin x or Cancel Job Intervention Required 3 69 40029 Check Finisher Installation x Check Finisher Installation Intervention Required 3 69 40029 Check Mailbox Installation x Check Mailbox Installation Intervention Required 3 69 40030 33 Tray x Config Error x Tray Config Error Intervention Required 3 69 40030 58 Input Config Error x Input Config Error Intervention Required 3 69 40030 58 Many Trays Attached x Too Many Trays Attached Intervention Required 3 69 40030 58 Too Many Bins Attached x Too Many Bins
211. clusively at private expense The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious Lexmark is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts Your product uses a laser CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure Your product uses a printing process that heats the print media and the heat may cause the media to release emissions You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions TOC 1 Contents Contents seid C 1 1 qu 1 1 Navigational 1 4 Printing 1 4 Bibliography annie 1 5 149 mur e 2 1 Selecting PCL Emulation 2 1 Using SIM aL WING ue 2 1 Using the Operator Panel or MarkVision 2 1 Using Your Software Program 2 2 Page Formatting c 2 3 Printable APG aS Me
212. coded raster scan data 1 Data sizeH L Size of Run length encoded data high low 2 Data sizeH L Size of Tagged Image File Format TIFF data high low 3 Data SizeH L Size of Delta Row data high low 4 NumberH L of empty None rows 5 NumberH L of duplicate None rows 254 Data SizeH L TIFF word 255 Data SizeH L TIFF double word Example ESC p300x 1500Y Move cursor to 1 x 5 ESC p 5 M Set the compression to Adaptive Compression p 2 9 W Raster Data 29 bytes follow 03 0009 x EOFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF x Delta Row 8 at 0 FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFh x 01 0006 x 0080 00 0001 x Run Length 1 80 x 6x 00 x 1 01 x 05 0035 x Duplicate rows 61 times 02 0002 x FOFF TIFF 8x FF x ESC End graphics Zlib Zlib is a generic compression method It refers to a standard for compression as well as the library that implements the standard The zlib compression method uses the deflate algorithm This same algorithm is used by more widely known compression utilities such as PKZIP and GZIP Compressed data is a series of variably sized blocks An encoder determines how to break the data into blocks and finds the best compression method to use for each block An encoder works based on the following principles The encoder creates a dictionary containing different characters in a set of data Short strings of bits represent more commonly occurring characters and long strings of bits represent less frequently used characters
213. compatibility mode to enable a Hewlett Packard Company s driver to select the forward compatibility fonts The Lexmark PCL driver uses the backward compatibility mode and temporarily switches the printer to this mode The PCL PJL commands to switch the default compatibility modes are Forward 500 12345 L DEFAULT LPARM PCL LFONTCOMPATI BI LI TYzPCL6O QPJL RESET ESC 12345X Backward sc 12345X PJL DEFAULT LPARM PCL LFONTCOMPATIBI LI TYzPCLS5 QPJL RESET ESC 12345X Specialty PCL Fonts The following table lists the font selection commands for forward and backward compatibility mode for each of the five specialty PCL fonts Since the font selection commands for the forward and backward compatibility modes are identical they are listed together in the table These fonts are supported only in PCL 5 not in PCL XL Table 2 4 Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode Standard PCL Emulation Font Name Spacing Style Weight Typeface C39 Narrow 1 0 0 32774 C39 Regular 1 0 0 32772 C39 Wide 1 0 0 32777 0 0 0 23584 0 0 0 23590 This font is not implemented in the Hewlett Packard Company s LaserJet 4050 Symbol Sets for the Lexmark C760 and C762 ing Select To determine if a font or typeface supports a symbol set see the complete listing of PCL emulation fonts and symbol s
214. cts how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job Supported values are True An end of file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs finish printing False An end of file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the interpreter whether or not that job has finished printing This value is set independently for each port Enabled boolean Read only Supported values are True False Filtering name Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed Supported values are InterpreterBased None Note Setting this variable changes the value of the corresponding RemotePrinter device HasNames boolean Read only Always returns False Interpreter name Read only Supported values are PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data Supported values are True Data is sent and processed False Data is lost PortLocation string Read only Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set Supported values are Standard Port Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2 Option Slot 3 Type name Read only Always returns the value of Communications 4 84 PostScript Table 4 11 PostScript Emulation Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition Device Parameters for the Communication Device LPR LP
215. d Black cartridges respectively For this message the values for XXXX are returned to indicate which ink cartridges are defective 2 d represents a one letter designator for each door labeled on the printer 3 lt c gt represents a one letter designator for each cover labeled on the printer Note The Display String is returned in the current language A display string that is returned is truncated to the DISPLAY CHARACTER SIZE returned in INFO CONFIG 3 71 Table 3 14 PJL Message for Attendance Conditions Printer State Status Code Display String Online Status Intervention required 40038 88 Cartridge Low FALSE cartridge low lt CMYK gt Intervention required 40038 Replace PC Kit FALSE replace photoconductor kit Intervention required 40038 Replace PC Kit To Continue FALSE replace photoconductor kit to continue Intervention required 40038 Replace Toner Cartridge FALSE replace toner cartridge Intervention required 40038 Replace Toner To Continue FALSE replace toner cartridge to continue Intervention required 40038 Replace Oil Coating Roll FALSE replace oil coating roll Intervention required 40039 89 Cartridge Empty FALSE cartridge empty lt CMYK gt Intervention required 40040 Load Staples FALSE load staples Intervention required 40041 Priming Failed Retry FALSE priming failed retry Intervention required 40048 Message specified b
216. d Image File Format TIFF Byte 3 Delta Row 5 Adaptive Compression 9 Replacement Delta Row 999 Zlib 1002 Group 4 1003 Group 3 one dimensional 1004 Group 3 two dimensional K 2 1005 Group 3 two dimensional K 4 1006 TIFF word 16 bit 1007 TIFF double word 32 bit 1008 Adaptive Compression includes TIFF word and TIFF double word Descriptions and examples of the different parameters appear on the following pages Each example draws the same square outline 64 bits 8 bytes wide by 64 scan lines long Uncoded Data Uncoded Data is not compressed Only those bytes needed to form the image are sent Each bit represents a single dot In the first byte bit 7 corresponds to the first dot in the raster row bit 5 to the third dot and so forth Example ESC p300x 300Y Esckt 100R ESCK r QF b ESCK 1A b 8 W ESC b 8 W ESCK b 8 W ESCx b 8 W ESC r B 80 80 80 FE FF 00 00 00 FF FF 00 00 00 FF FF 00 00 00 FF FF 00 00 00 FF FF 00 00 00 FF FF 00 00 00 FF FF x 01 x 01 x 01 x FF x Move the cursor to 1 x 1 1 in from top margin and 1 in from left edge of logical page Set resolution to 100 dots per inch Rotate image to match current orientation Set compression mode to Uncoded Start raster graphics at current position Raster data uncompressed Repeat to provide 64 total scan lines End graphics
217. d Kingdom 00 ISO 6 ASCII 0S ISO 11 Swedish for Names 01 ISO 15 Italian 28 ISO 17 Spanish 1G ISO 21 German 00 ISO 60 Norwegian Version 1 1F ISO 69 French 2U ISO 2 IRV International Ref Version ISO 25 French 0G ISO HP German ISO 14 JIS ASCII Table 2 8 ISO PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Continued Symbol Set ID Symbol Set Typeface 2K ISO 57 Chinese 3S ISO 10 Swedish 1S ISO HP Spanish 6S ISO 85 Spanish 4S ISO 16 Portuguese 5S ISO 84 Portuguese 1D ISO 61 Norwegian Version 2 Command Structure This section introduces the different types of PCL emulation commands and their structure or syntax It also demonstrates how you can link commands to abbreviate them Control Codes Control Codes are single character instructions Table 2 9 Control Codes Code Dec Hex Function Result BS 8 08 Backspace Moves the cursor toward the left margin one horizontal space equal to the last printed character HT 9 09 Horizontal Tab Moves the cursor to the next defined tab stop LF 10 0A Line Feed Advances the cursor to the same horizontal position on the following line as determined by either the Vertical Motion Index VMI or Set Line Spacing command FF 12 0C Form Feed Advances the cursor to the same horizontal position at the top margin of the next page CR 13 00 Carriage Return Moves the cursor to the left ma
218. d and sending your print job again Device Search Order If you are using the PostScript emulation operators run file renamefile status or eexec you do not need to specify the device If you omit the device name devices are searched in the default order disk and then flash memory If the following PostScript emulation code is encountered myfile w file the file on disk is used since disk occurs before flash memory in the default search order and files cannot be created in ROM The operator deletefile searches only the first device in the default search order if a device is not specified Use the PostScript emulation operators devmount devdismount to change the order The default search order is determined by the order the devices are mounted For example if you want to place the disk device after the flash memory in the default search order use the following command sequence Sdisk devdismount Sdisk devmount To change the order so the devices are searched as disk flash memory and then ROM use the following PostScript emulation command sequence rom devdismount flash devdismount 415 devdismount di sk devmount 514510 devmount rom devmount If the device is already mounted the following operators may change the search order initializedisk devformat e InitializeAction setdevparams Sending these operators has the following effect on the devices in the search order
219. d on a file with an accesstype of RW location 0 is assumed e If START location is greater than file size and the accesstype is RW it positions the file pointer at the end of the file If the LENGTH is omitted from a LWRITEFILE command an END DATA must be placed at the end of the data All data up to in PJL END DATA is written to the file The command requires either the LENGTH parameter or the PJL END DATA be specified but not both LRUNFILE Command Use this command to load and execute a file on a storage device For example use this command to run the resident demo file or a demo file stored on flash or disk Syntax QPJL LRUNFILE DEVICE filedevice FILENAME fname CR LF LRENAMEFILE Command Use this command to rename a file on a storage device The command is ignored if the filename specified as OLDFILENAME doesn t exist on the device or if the filename specified as NEWFILENAME already exists on the device Syntax PJL LRENAMEFILE DEVICE filedevice OLDFILENAME fname NEWFI LENAME fname lt CR gt lt LF gt LDELETEFILE Command Use this command to delete a file on a storage device The command is ignored if the file doesn t exist on the device Syntax P L LDELETEFILE DEVICE filedevice FILENAME fname CR lt LF gt LFORMAT Command Use this command to format a device for storage Syntax 089 L LFORMAT DEVICE filedevice lt CR gt lt LF g
220. dCopies 4 62 Collation Collated Copies QTY value HalftoneMode 4 63 0 IdiomRecognition 4 63 true P4 JobName 4 63 JobTimeout 4 63 JobTimeout system parameter MaxDictStack 4 63 255 P4 MaxExecStack 4 63 10015 MaxFontltem 4 63 12500 MaxFormltem 4 63 100000 MaxLocalVM 4 63 2147483647 C 9 dE Table C 3 User Interpreter Parameters Continued Supported X Not Supported ORAS Page numbers reference parameter descriptions le 3 E Default MaxOpStack 4 64 100000 MaxPatternltem 4 64 20000 MaxScreenltem 4 64 48000 P4 MaxSuperScreen 4 64 1024 MaxUPathltem 4 64 5000 MinFontCompress 4 64 2147483647 PageCount 4 64 0 UseOldcopypage 4 64 false VMReclaim 4 64 0 VMThreshold 4 64 25000 per MB of RAM WaitTimeout 4 64 WaitTimeout system parameter Table C 4 System Interpreter Parameters 4 Supported Printer Model X Not Supported Si Page numbers reference parameter descriptions Default values are listed q BuildTime 4 65 ByteOrder 4 65 CurDisplayList 4 65 CurFontCache 4 65 CurFormCache 4 65 CurlnputDevice 4 66 CurOutlineCache 4 66 CurOutputDevice 4 66 Table C 4 System Interpreter Parameters Continued
221. de For more information on size codes see Table 3 17 Media Size Codes on page 3 74 ww represents the bin code For more information on bin codes see Table 3 18 Output Bin Codes on page 3 75 Note The Display String is returned in the current language A display message longer than one line shows only the first line of the message Auto Continuable Conditions These status messages are returned independent of the state of the Auto Continue menu item Auto continuable messages are returned in this form CODE status code DISPLAY display string in double quotes ONLINE online status To determine which messages your printer supports see Table B 10 PUL Messages for Auto Continuable Conditions on page B 15 Table 3 13 PJL Messages for Auto Continuable Conditions Status Printer State Code Display String Online Status Intervention required 30014 50 PPDS Font Error FALSE PPDS font error Intervention required 30016 37 Insufficient Collation Area FALSE insufficient collation area Intervention required 30016 37 Insufficient Defrag Memory FALSE insufficient defragment memory Intervention required 30016 37 Insufficient Memory FALSE insufficient memory Intervention required 30016 38 Memory Full FALSE memory full Intervention required 30016 Held Jobs May Not Be Restored FALSE held jobs may not be restored Intervention required 30016 57 Configuration Change FALSE configur
222. e Any integer or string of 32 or fewer non null characters An integer is converted to a string StartupMode integer Controls the system start file Sys Start during PostScript emulation initialization Also controls the job start file Job Start before each print job 0 Disable use of Sys Start file and Job Start file 1 Sys Start file executes if present on disk or flash 10 Job Start file executes before each user job 11 Both files run a combination of 1 and 10 Legal Values 0 lt x lt 255 Values other than the four listed are equivalent to 0 Note If both flash and disk have a Sys Start file and Job Start file the value of the SearchOrder for the two devices determines which file is executed StaticRamSize integer Read only Amount of static memory in bytes on the controller board These parameters are Lexmark specific are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 2016 These parameters are available with the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010 3 These parameters are Lexmark specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010 4 70 PostScript Table 4 10 PostScript Emulation System Parameters Continued Key Type Definition SystemParamsPassword string Write only Controls the ability of setsystemparams to change the values of system parameters and setdevparams to change the values of device parameters Legal value A
223. e PCL Units 2 47 status readback echo 2 54 flush all pages 2 54 free space 2 54 inquire status readback entity 2 54 set status readback location type 2 54 set status readback location unit 2 54 user defined symbol set define symbol set 2 44 symbol set control 2 44 symbol set ID code 2 44 control codes 2 31 font and symbol set support Lexmark X422 2 7 GL 2 Language 2 56 linking commands 2 32 paper and envelope dimensions Lexmark 510 2 4 password protection 3 93 saving files on flash memory or disk 6 3 selecting MarkVision Professional 2 1 operator panel 2 1 SmartSwitch 2 1 software program 2 2 SmartSwitch 2 1 specialty fonts 2 13 standard fonts 2 9 Type 1 fonts 2 11 variables PJL common 3 48 printer unique 3 49 physical page PCL emulation 2 3 physical page border 2 5 physical specifications 7 3 ports communication 8 2 Windows 2000 8 4 Windows 95 98 Me 8 2 Windows NT 4 0 8 3 Windows XP 8 5 PostScript emulation accessing files 6 9 device names 6 9 device parameters 4 71 device search order 6 12 envelope size support 4 9 filenames 6 9 interpreter parameters 4 62 page device parameters 4 48 paper size commands currentuniversalsize 4 3 ignoresize 4 3 setignoresize 4 3 setuniversalsize 4 4 paper tray commands manualfeed 4 7 papertray 4 7 setpapertray 4 8 paper tray support 4 4 password protecting Type 1 fonts on flash memory or disk 3 93 saving fonts on flash memory or disk 6 3 selecting language 4 1 SmartS
224. e The response is one of the following NOTSET The password has not been set or has been reset to zero SET The password is defined and active EXPIRED The password is reset to zero flash memory only The LDECLARE command can be used to temporarily unlock access to a device or particular file See File and Device Protection Commands on page 3 93 for additional information about using passwords on these devices LWLOCK Write Lock alphanumeric string NULL DEFAULT pe au for an Same as LRWLOCK except the password limits write only access 1524 d only entire device OF instead of read write access particular file on the device 1 The macro or symbol set description is printed in the Description field of the Print Directory listing 2 To password protect a device the command modi fi should be LRESOURCE double quotes must specified device The colon and Status Readback Commands Applications can request configuration and status information from the printer using the Status Readback commands In addition the printer can also be instructed to send unsolicited status information back to the host computer when asynchronous events occur such as a memory error or a paper jam To determine which commands your printer supports see Table B 8 Status Readback Commands on page B 14 DINQUIRE Command This command is used to query the default setting NVRAM of the spec
225. e Demi Oblique 1 1 3 61471 Century Schoolbook Roman 0 Notice the values for forward and backward compatibility modes differ slightly for Bold This font is not implemented in the Hewlett Packard Company s LaserJet 4050 3 This font is not implemented in the Lexmark family of printers Table 2 3 Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands Continued Forward Compatibility Mode Backward Compatibility Mode Type 1 Font name Spacing Style Weight Typeface Spacing Siyle Weight Typeface 1 1 0 61463 61463 61463 61483 Century Schoolbook Italic Century Schoolbook Bold Century Schoolbook Bold Italic k ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic CourierPS CourierPS Oblique CourierPS Bold CourierPS Bold Oblique 3 Times Roman Times Italic 3 Times Bold 3 Times Bold Italic 1 0 3 61444 1 1 3 61444 1 0 5 61444 1 1 5 61444 Helvetica Light 2 Helvetica Light Oblique Helvetica Black Helvetica Black Oblique SymbolPS 3 ITC Zapf Dingbats Notice the values for forward and backward compatibility modes differ slightly for Bold This font is not implemented in the Hewlett Packard Company s LaserJet 4050 3 This font is not implemented in the Lexmark family of printers Your Lexmark printer defaults to the forward
226. e Olive Italic Letter Gothic Letter Gothic Bold Letter Gothic Italic Letter Gothic Slanted Marigold Univers Bold Error none PS3fonts PS3fonts restores the font compatibility to PostScript 3 Error none quiet quiet integer queries the PowerSave page device parameter An integer is returned on the stack 0 Power Saver is Off 110120 or1 to 240 Model specific Number of minutes elapsed after last page prints before Power Saver is invoked Power Saver reduces power consumption when the printer is idle When qui et is enabled it takes longer to print the first page after the printer has been idle PostScript Note Some printer models released in the year 2000 or later designated as Energy Star printers cannot have Power Saver disabled This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence currentpagedevice PowerSave get Error stackoverflow ramsize ramsize integer queries the current setting of the RamSize system parameter An integer is returned on the stack showing total RAM in bytes This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence currentsystemparams RamSize get Error stackoverflow realformat realformat boolean returns a boolean with the same value as the RealFormat system parameter It indicates the printer microprocessor native real number representation A query determines if the printer real num
227. e supports the specified Symbol Set X Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set Table 2 5 PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Continued Latin 1 SN SNNA BEND dol 7 5 OIN Sd LXALSd 11511159 4 6 8 8NVINOH jeuoneuJd81u diWODISV jebnuog Izeig dINOOIEV 0 50 001 9IPJON S98 9d u9u814 UBIPEUBD 98 Od 92 198 24 098 2 898 2 jenBuininiy 098 2 8 Lev 8 6 une 91 6988 OSI 7 47 fe L 6988 OSI ue 86 SMOPUIM une 076 SMOPUIM 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 2141414141414141414141414141414141414141141141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141414141414 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 4141414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141 4 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 414141414141414141414141414141414141411414141141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141414141414 4141414141414141414141414141414141414141 41141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141414141141414 4141414141414
228. e that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on card stock A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type Bin Card Stock setting returns Assign Type Bin Card Stock setting Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 name DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBINS OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBINS5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name Factory Default UPPER DISABLED Model specific LCARDSTOCKTEXTURE DEFAULT only Card Stock Texture SMOOTH NORMAL ROUGH NORMAL LCARDSTOCKWEIGHT DEFAULT only Card Stock Weight LIGHT NORMAL HEAVY NORMAL LCOLLATION Collation Mode ON OFF If Collation is ON the pages of the print job are collated For example if the job contains three pages and two copies are requested collated output prints pages 1 2 3 1 2 3 If collation is set to OFF uncollated output prints pages 1 1 2 2 3 3 OFF LCOLORCORRECTION Indicates which color target the printer emulates NONE DISPLAY SWOP OFF AUTO VIVID DUOTONE MANUAL See Table B 2 Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages on page B 4 for the default value of your printer AUTO VIVID Model specific LCOLO
229. ead only Always returns the value of Parameters Device Parameters for the Parameters Device Engine BSizeStandard name Read only Value of JIS 4 87 PostScript Table 4 11 PostScript Emulation Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition Darkness real Print Darkness and Toner Saver Setting Designates the print darkness and toner saver setting model specific Legal value Any non negative real number from 0 0 to 1 0 inclusive For queries the Print Darkness setting is returned as a real value Print Darkness Toner Saver Darkness Value Setting Setting Value Returned Lightest On 0 1 Lighter On 0 2 Normal On 0 3 Darker On 0 4 Darkest On 0 5 Lightest Off 0 6 Lighter Off 0 7 Normal Off 0 8 Darker Off 0 9 Darkest Off 1 0 When the Darkness value is changed the following ranges determine the Print Darkness and Toner Saver setting values Darkness Value Print Darkness Toner Saver Setting Value Setting Value 0 0 lt value lt 0 15 Lightest On 0 15 lt value lt 0 25 Lighter On 0 25 lt value lt 0 35 Normal On 0 35 lt value lt 0 45 Darker On 0 45 lt value lt 0 55 Darkest On 0 55 lt value lt 0 65 Lightest Off 0 65 lt value lt 0 75 Lighter Off 0 75 lt value lt 0 85 Normal Off 0 85 lt value lt 0 95 Darker Off 0 95 lt value lt 1 0 Darkest Off Print Darkness Setting Designates the print darkness model specific Legal value Any non negative real number from 0 0 to 1 0 inc
230. eation character code 2 45 font control 2 45 font descriptor 2 45 font ID 2 45 load character 2 45 font selection height primary 2 42 height secondary 2 42 pitch primary 2 42 X 4 pitch secondary 2 42 primary and secondary pitch 2 44 select default font primary 2 43 select default font secondary 2 43 select download font primary 2 43 select download font secondary 2 43 spacing primary 2 42 spacing secondary 2 42 stroke weight primary 2 43 stroke weight secondary 2 43 style primary 2 42 style secondary 2 42 symbol set primary 2 42 symbol set Secondary 2 42 text parsing method 2 44 transparent print data 2 43 typeface selection primary 2 43 typeface selection secondary 2 43 underline disable 2 43 underline enable 2 43 job control job separation 2 37 long edge offset registration 2 34 number of collated copies 2 34 number of copies 2 34 output bin 2 38 printer reset 2 34 short edge offset registration 2 34 simplex duplex print 2 34 unit of measure 2 35 Universal Exit Language 2 35 macros macro control 2 45 macro ID 2 45 miscellaneous commands display functions off 2 56 display functions on 2 55 end of line wrap 2 55 paper type 2 56 print quality 2 56 print test page 2 56 page control character text path 2 37 clear horizontal margins 2 37 duplex page side selection 2 39 horizontal motion index 2 38 left margin 2 37 line spacing alternati
231. ects pages printed when using PCL emulation If Whole Page is selected the PCL language sets the logical page area equal to the physical page dimensions Since the logical page dimensions and the physical page dimensions are the same in theory the cursor may be positioned anywhere on the page However the PCL language clips the image to the printable area So the Whole Page setting is useful for printing scanned images that extend from edge to edge of a page Some printers offer the Fit to Page setting When Fit to Page is selected PCL emulation or PostScript emulation formats a page using a printable area equal to the physical page which is from one edge of the page to the other edge of the page If you use this setting no clipping occurs In Fit to Page the PCL emulation logical page dimensions are equal to the physical page dimensions as in the Whole Page setting The printer holds this formatted image in memory but when the page prints the image is compressed a small amount in both horizontal and vertical directions and then centered on the physical page for letter size paper only This process creates a small margin around the image This artificial margin prevents printing from one edge to the other since doing so could contaminate the printer and cause printing problems The following illustrations show an image held in memory for printing from one edge to the other and how the image would actually print based on the Fit to Page
232. ed T640 T642 T644 Intervention Required 3 66 40038 80 Fuser Belt Exhausted x Fuser Belt Exhausted Intervention Required 3 66 40038 83 ITU Maintenance x ITU Maintenance Table B 11 PJL Messages for Attendance Conditions Supported X Not Supported st em e Page numbers reference message descriptions Status Message Code Return String Intervention Required 3 67 40010 30 Coating Roll Missing x 30 Coating Roll Missing Intervention Required 3 67 40010 30 Print Unit Missing x 30 Print Unit Missing Intervention Required 3 67 40010 Insert Hole Punch Box x Insert Hole Punch Box Intervention Required 3 67 40010 Insert PC Cartridge x Insert PC Cartridge Intervention Required 3 67 40021 Cartridge Life Expired XXXX x Cartridge Life Expired Intervention Required 3 68 40021 Cartridge Life Warning XXXX x Cartridge Life Warning Intervention Required 3 67 40021 Cover Open Close Top Printer Upper Door Open Covers Close Door or Insert Cartridge XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK where CMYK denotes Cyan Magenta Yellow and Black cartridges respectively PJL Support Table B 11 PJL Messages for Attendance Conditions Continued 4 Supported X Not Supported Page numbers reference message descriptions Message Status Code Return String Printer Model
233. ed 4300x Insert Tray source gt FALSE insert tray request X represents an input source code For more information see Table 3 16 Tray Codes on page 3 74 yy represents a media size code For more information see Table 3 17 Media Size Codes on page 3 74 See your printer See your printer documentation for more information on printer messages Table 3 16 Tray Codes X Value Tray 0 Multipurpose Feeder 3 74 1 Manual Feed Tray 1 Tray 2 Envelope Feeder Tray 3 Tray 4 4 8 5 Table 3 17 Media Size Codes YY Value Media Size 00 Universal 01 Other Envelope 02 Letter Paper 03 Legal Paper 04 A4 Paper 05 Executive Paper 06 11 x 17 Ledger 07 A3 08 Com 10 Envelope 09 7 3 4 Envelope Monarch 10 C5 Envelope 11 DL Envelope 12 JIS B4 13 JIS B5 Paper 14 B5 Envelope 15 Custom Media 16 A3 JB4 Paper Model specific 17 JB5 Paper 18 JPostcard 19 JDoublePostcard 3 75 Table 3 17 Media Size Codes YY Value Media Size 20 A5 21 Folio 22 Statement 90 Com 9 Envelope Table 3 18 Output Bin Codes WW Value Output Bin 00 Standard Bin 01 Bin 1 02 Bin 2 03 Bin 3 04 Bin 4 05 Bin 5 06 Bin 6 07 Bin 7 08 Bin 8 09 Bin 9 10 Bin 10 Opera
234. ed copies to print for the job The CollatedCopies parameter must be set before the first page of the job has been sent If CollatedCopies is set to zero the parameter has no effect on the job If CollatedCopies is set to a number other than zero the value of copies and of the NumCopies and Collate pagedevice parameters are ignored for the job Legal values Any integer between 0 and 999 inclusive PostScript Table 4 9 PostScript Emulation User Parameters Continued Key Type Definition HalftoneMode integer Affects the results of subsequent halftone setting operators such as setscreen setcolorscreen and sethalftone The HalftoneMode parameter has no effect on the current halftone Legal values 0 Normal mode of operation The operators setscreen setcolorscreen and sethalftone are not affected 1 Execution of setscreen setcolorscreen or sethalftone causes a default screen to be used rather than the screen given by the job The default screen depends on the current resolution and parameters in the DeviceRenderinglnfo dictionary in the pagedevice dictionary that is in affect at the time the halftone operator is executed 2 Not supported HalftoneMode is set to 1 IdiomRegnition boolean Legal values True Procedure substitution is enabled during execution of the bind operator False Idiom recognition is disabled JobName string Name of the current job for status responses Legal values Any
235. ed patterns Note Default pattern reference point is the upper left corner of the logical page ESC cH Q Caution Pattern Control 0 Delete all patterns temporary and Manages the use of user defined patterns permanent Note Use the Area Fill ID command ESC c G to set the ID 1 Delete all temporary patterns 2 Delete pattern last ID specified 4 Make pattern of last ID temporary 5 Make pattern of last ID permanent Table 2 21 Rectangular Area Fill Graphics Command Parameters Function Result Number of Decipoints 0 32767 1 Decipoint 1 720 inch Default 0 valid to 4 decimal places Horizontal Rectangle Size in Decipoints Specifies the rectangle width in decipoints ESC cHA Number of PCL Units 0 32767 Default 0 Horizontal Rectangle Size in PCL Units Specifies the rectangle width in PCL units Note The size of PCL Units is set by the Unit of Measure command ESC cHY Number of Decipoints 0 32767 1 Decipoint 1 720 inch Default 0 valid to 4 decimal places Vertical Rectangle Size in Decipoints Specifies the rectangle height in decipoints ESC o B Number of PCL Units 0 32767 Default 0 Vertical Rectangle Size in PCL Units Specifies the rectangle height in PCL units Note The size of PCL Units is set by the Unit of Measure command Table 2 21 Rectangular Area Fill Graphics Continued Command Parameters Fu
236. ed with PUL SET or DEFAULT command OFF 0 to 199 NONE Variable used with PUL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command LASSIGNTRAY3 Tray Renumber Assign Tray 3 OFF 0 to 199 Variable used with PUL SET or DEFAULT command OFF 0 to 199 NONE Variable used with PUL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command LASSIGNTRAY4 Tray Renumber Assign Tray 4 OFF 0 to 199 Variable used with PUL SET or DEFAULT command OFF 0 to 199 NONE Variable used with PUL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command LASSIGNTRAY5 Tray Renumber Assign Tray 5 OFF 0 to 199 Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT command OFF 0 to 199 NONE Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command LBITMAPROUNDING Bitmap Font Partial Pel Rounding ON OFF Some printers handle partial pel character escapement rounding of bitmap fonts differently LBITMAPROUNDING offers a way of instructing the printer how to handle partial pel rounding of bitmap fonts Bitmap rounding is compatible with the Hewlett Packard Company s LaserJet printers ON LCOLOREXTENSIONS Color Extensions ON OFF HPCLJ5 ON Table 3 6 Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation Continued LFONTCOMPATIBILITY Function Font Compatibility Level Selections PCL5 PCL6 Factory Default PCL6 LFONTPRIORITY SET only Font Priority Search RESOLUTION NORESOLUTION When RESOLUTION is spec
237. ee your printer documentation for more information Your printer can communicate with a computer across the parallel interface in three ways Computer to Printer This is typically how a computer and printer communicate When the printer is receiving data from the computer it can use either Standard or Fastbytes protocol The burst transfer rate in Fastbytes is faster than in Standard protocol For best throughput use Fastbytes protocol Printer to Computer Advanced Status Your printer can send data to the computer This capability lets the printer send status messages to the computer on the parallel interface Parallel Modes 1 and 2 These are printer features that enhance reliability of data transfer from the host computer to the printer See Parallel Mode 1 on page 8 14 and Parallel Mode 2 on page 8 15 for more information 8 8 Interfaces Standard Parallel Connector The standard IEEE 1284 B compliant parallel connector on the printer is a 36 pin D shell female receptacle as shown Using the INIT Signal to Initialize When the printer is using the parallel interface and it receives an INIT signal it initializes as follows unless INIT is disabled by a variable default setting t prints data received before INIT and then initializes It returns variable defaults to the values stored in the user default settings It returns fixed default se
238. efines how the Universal paper will be fed through the printer Supported values are 0 fed short edge first 1 Paper is fed long edge first Prompt defines a string to be displayed on the operator panel when the printer prompts a user to load Universal PostScript Interpreter Parameters This section describes the PostScript emulation interpreter parameters There are three types of interpreter parameters User parameters System parameters Device parameters To determine which parameters your printer supports see Appendix C PostScript Support on page C 1 User Parameters The following user parameters are used by setuserparams and currentuserparams If a value is requested that is not within the range for the requested parameter the minimum or maximum value is used If a setuserparams value does not match the type of the specified parameter a typecheck error occurs If a parameter is not supported by the printer it is ignored An attempt to change the value of a read only parameter has no effect on the parameter To determine which parameters your printer supports see Table C 3 on page C 8 Table 4 9 PostScript Emulation User Parameters Key Type Definition AccurateScreens boolean Controls whether the accurate screen algorithm is used during subsequent executions of the setscreen and setcolorscreen operators CollatedCopies integer Requests the number of collat
239. equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence currentsystemparams CurInputDevice get Error stackoverflow jobtimeout jobti meout integer queries the current user default setting for the JobTimeout parameter An integer is returned on the stack 0 disabled 15 65355 seconds This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence currentuserparams JobTimeout get Error stackoverflow manualfeed See page 4 7 PostScript manualfeedtimeout manualfeedtimeout integer def is an integer key in statusdict that works with the ManualFeedTimeout page device parameter to determine the manualfeed timeout for a given page If during a print job manual f eedti meout is defined as an integer value in statusdict that value is used instead of the ManualFeedTimeout page device parameter The value of the ManualFeedTimeout page device parameter and manualfeedtimeout key in statusdict are independent of each other the value of one does not affect the value of the other 0 disabled 1 65355 seconds An undefined error results if manualfeedtimeout is queried before the value is set Errors stackoverflow undefined newsheet newsheet causes the current page to start on the front side of a new sheet Error none pagecount pagecount integer queries the value of the PageCount system parameter An integer is returned on the stack indicating
240. er one is true the printer sends a message to load the requested size in the manual feed tray or multipurpose feeder The PageSize Policy is set to 0 by means of setpagedevice The printer checks the paper size loaded in the current active source to determine if it matches the requested size If the sizes match the paper is fed from the active source Note The current active tray is the last source that was selected from the printer operator panel or by the printer language If the requested size and the size loaded in the active source do not match the sources are searched in the order defined by the Priority array in the InputAttributes dictionary in the pagedevice dictionary PostScript f the requested media size is not found by the previous search the following search order is used Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Multipurpose Feeder Tray 4 Tray 5 If the requested size cannot be located in any automatic source a configurationerror is issued and the job is flushed For printers that support automatic duplexing Automatic duplexing is not supported for custom size paper or for envelopes in the multipurpose feeder Automatic duplexing is supported from the multipurpose feeder for all other papers lf the paper source is changed before the back side of a duplexed page prints a blank back page prints the paper source changes and the information for the back side of the page
241. eringlInfo dictionary Specifies the following unique printer rendering parameters Screening TonerSaver PictureGrade ImageEnhancement PrintDarkness AutoMediaType EdgeToEdge DefaultPoliciesPageSize SubstituteSize Type ColorCorrection ImageBrightness ImageContrast and PrintQuality Screening controls which halftone dictionary is installed at the beginning of each print job The value is set at the start of a job according to the print quality settings selected from the printer operator panel The following names are valid ColorGrade 600 dpi printing PictureGrade 300 dpi 600 dpi or 1200 dpi printing with PictureGrade On IET 1200 Image Quality printing or 2400 Print Quality IETImagesOnly 1200 Image Quality printing for images 600 dpi printing for text and graphics or maps to IET and sets Print Quality to either 1200 Image Quality or 2400 Print Quality IETPictureGrade 1200 Image Quality printing with PictureGrade On None 300 dpi or 600 dpi printing with PictureGrade Off PostScript Table 4 8 Page Device Parameters Continued Key Definition DeviceRenderingInfo dictionary TonerSaver is a boolean that controls the Toner Saver feature continued True Starts the printer toner saver mechanism False Stops the printer toner saver mechanism Notes A PostScript job can override the effect of Screening by using sethalftone setscreen or setcolorscreen operators unless Screening is set to
242. error Some printers also display serial errors on the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional as attendance messages such as a 54 Standard Serial Error or 54 Serial Option x Error x represents the number of the serial port Serial errors that do not generate such an error message are Serial Break Framing error received simultaneously as a Break Powering on an IBM compatible personal computer connected to the printer Serial Computer Configuration Recommendations RS 232C For correct operation of the serial interface your printer and your computer operating System must be configured identically The following is an example of how to configure DOS for the printer using serial DTR protocol DOS From the DOS prompt enter the following commands mode comy 9600 n 8 1 p mode lptx comy where x equals 1 2 or 3 and y equals 1 or 2 Include these two command statements in the AUTOEXEC BAT file on the computer so they run each time your system starts operating Once this is set to copy to the communications port again use the copy command copy filename lptx 8 28 Interfaces Windows 95 98 Me 2000 Windows NT 4 0 and Windows XP For correct operation of the RS 232C serial interface while setting up your communications port make sure you selected Hardware in the Flow Control field Selecting Hardware sets the communication to DTR protocol See the following sections for more information Se
243. ers and are supported in PostScript emulation only The command modifier val ue parameter should be specified as LP ARM POSTSCRI PT For example 0898 1 SET LPARM POSTSCRIPT CTUREGRADE ON lt CR gt lt LF gt To determine which variables your printer supports see Table B 6 on page B 13 Table 3 8 Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation Factory Function Selections Default LPICTUREGRADE PictureGrade ON OFF ON LPSFONTPRIORITY Font Priority RESIDENT FLASHDISK RESIDENT Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables Use the following variables when additional storage devices are installed The command modifier value parameter of the DEFAULT INQUIRE DINQUIRE and SET commands must be specified as LRESOURCE device filename filetype For example 1 DEFAULT LRESOURCE device filename filetype LDESCRI PTI ON description lt CR gt lt LF gt Values for device filename filetype are device filename filetype flash flashl disk 41 5 1 case insensitive A unique identifier for a file such as the macro ID for a PCL macro the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set the font ID for a PCL font or the actual file name for data Type 1 fonts and demo files as shown on the Directory The filename is case sensitive The identifier that categorizes the file such as p5macro for PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets Using the DEFAULT comm
244. ervention required 40029 Check Finisher Installation FALSE check finisher installation Intervention required 40029 Check Mailbox Installation FALSE check mailbox installation Intervention required 40030 33 Tray x Config Error FALSE tray configuration error Intervention required 40030 58 Input Config Error FALSE input configuration error Intervention required 40030 58 Too Many Trays Attached FALSE too many trays attached Intervention required 40030 58 Too Many Bins Attached FALSE too many bins attached Intervention required 40030 58 Too Many Disks Installed FALSE too many disks installed Intervention required 40036 58 Too Many Disks Installed FALSE too many disks installed XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK where CMYK denotes Cyan Magenta Yellow and Black cartridges respectively For this message the values for XXXX are returned to indicate which ink cartridges are defective d represents a one letter designator for each door labeled on the printer 3 c represents a one letter designator for each cover labeled on the printer Note The Display String is returned in the current language A display string that is returned is truncated to the DISPLAY CHARACTER SIZE returned in INFO CONFIG 3 70 Table 3 14 PJL Message for Attendance Conditions Printer State Status Code Display String Online Status Intervention required
245. ervention required 4285w 285 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4286w 286 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4287 287 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4288 288 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4289 289 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4290 290 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4291 291 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4292 292 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4293 293 Paper Jam FALSE w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover The door or cover needs to be opened X represents the number of jammed pages in the printer y represents the tray number Z represents the bin number See your printer documentation for more information on printer messages Table 3 19 PJL Messages for Paper Jams Continued Printer State Status Code Display String Online Status Intervention required 4294 294 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4295 295 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover The door or cover needs to be opened x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer y represents the tray number Z represents the bin number See your printer documentation for more information on printer messages Service Errors Error Code 50000 is returned for all 9xx Service Errors when the printer can re
246. et any number of times for macros or symbol sets stored on a disk The limitation for flash files is due to flash technology See the LDESCRIPTION variable in Table 3 9 Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables on page 3 53 for more information Password Protection You can password protect either the entire flash memory or disk or files stored on the flash memory or disk There are two levels of password protection Read Write Ensures that the file or device is protected against reading and writing unless the password has been appropriately specified applies only to actual file data Write Ensures that data cannot be changed on a file or device unless the password has been appropriately specified A Read Write password takes precedence over a Write password Each file or device can have a separate password Write passwords ensure that files cannot be deleted renamed or updated and a device cannot be formatted or specified as a download target Read Write password protection provides the same protection as Write but additionally ensures that data cannot be read from the file or device By using passwords administrators can ensure data integrity and proper authorization If flash memory is write password protected for example users cannot delete existing files format device or download new files to the device without first specifying the password A specific example might be a macro file of an authorizing signature
247. etprintername 4 43 setquiet 4 43 setresolution 4 44 setsccbatch 4 44 setsccinteractive 4 45 setsoftwareiomode 4 45 settumble 4 45 setuserdiskpercent 4 46 softwareiomode 4 46 tumble 4 46 userdiskpercent 4 47 waittimeout 4 47 system parameters 4 65 user parameters 4 62 using the operator panel 4 1 power requirements 7 2 printable areas 2 3 2 5 Printer Job Language PJL attendance messages 3 67 30 Print Unit Missing 3 67 30 Coating Roll Missing 3 67 31 Defective Cartridge XXXX 3 67 31 Defective Print Cartridge 3 67 31 Missing Cartridge XXXX 3 68 31 Missing Printhead 3 68 31 PerfectFinish Missing 3 70 32 Unsupported Cartridge 3 67 32 Unsupported Cartridge 3 67 32 Unsupported Print Cartridge 3 67 32 Unsupported Printhead 3 68 33 Tray x Config Error 3 69 40 Tray x Size Sense Error 3 68 41 Open Bin 1 Exit Tray 3 68 58 Input Config Error 3 69 58 Too Many Bins Attached 3 69 58 Too Many Disks Installed 3 69 58 Too Many Trays Attached 3 69 59 Incompatible Bin x 3 71 84 All Photo Devs Exhausted 3 70 84 Black Photo Dev Exhausted 3 70 84 Black Photo Dev Life Warning 3 70 84 Color Photo Dev Life Warning 3 70 87 PerfectFinish Empty 3 70 88 Black Print Cartridge Low 3 70 X 7 88 Black Toner Empty 3 70 88 Black Toner Low 3 70 88 Cartridge Low lt gt 3 71 88 Color Print Cartridge Low 3 70 88 Cyan Toner Empty 3 70 88 Cyan Toner Low 3 70 88 Magenta Toner Empty 3 70 88 Magenta Toner Low 3 70 88 Photo Print Cartridge Lo
248. ets in the following tables Table 2 5 PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Latin 1 on page 2 14 Table 2 6 PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Latin 2 Latin 5 Latin 6 Cyrillic Greek on page 2 19 and Table 2 7 PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Specials on page 2 24 Table 2 5 PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Latin 1 SN do 1 1 ON Sd uoisu x4 6 8 70 01 11 2 50 7001 9IpJON S98 Od u2u9844 ueipeue 98 2 puejad 198 2 098 2 ong 828 2 jenBuininiy 0S8 Od 5 8 Lev 48 24 6 une 61 6988 OSI 6 VIN23 L 6S88 OSI une 86 une 076 SMOPUIM Typeface Symbol Set SNNA TLNINA 8NVINOH PJL Value Symbol Set ID gt gt gt gt gt gt gt N N N N N gt gt gt gt N N N N N VivVvivivivivivivivviviviv vviviviviviviv iviv 414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 414141414141414141414141414141414141411414141141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141414114141414 414141414141414141414141414141414141414141141414 41414141414141414141414141414141414141414141414 4141414141414141414141414141414141 414141 viv
249. evice for writing only Syntax QPJL DEFAULT LRESOURCE 1 1 4 lt CR gt lt LF gt L DEFAULT LRESOURCE devi ce filename filetype LWLOCKz password CR lt LF gt The filename used depends on whether you wish to put a password on a font or a macro The filename for a font is a five digit ID from the print directory page add zeros to the left of the ID to fill the five digits followed by a three digit instance number The first time a font is downloaded after a flash has been formatted the instance number is 0 Filetypes are described under f i ename in Table 3 9 Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables on page 3 53 For example to write password protect a PCL emulation bitmapped font filetype of p5bi t map with an ID of 127 which has not been downloaded since flash was formatted PJL DEFAULT LRESOURCE flash 00127000 p5bitmap LWLOCK password lt CR gt lt LF gt To password protect a macro the filename is the ID taken from the print directory page followed by the filetype For example to read write password protect a PCL emulation macro filetype is p5 macro saved to flash with an ID of 1023 PJL DEFAULT LRESOURCE flash 1023 p5macro LRWLOCK 2 password CR LF Note If the filename is incorrect the printer applies the password to the entire device Password for an Entire Device If you want to set a pa
250. fault name is returned unless you have specified a custom name Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Variable Function Selections Factory Default LCUSTOMTYPE1OUTBIN Assign UPPER LOWER DISABLED OPTIONALOUTBIN1 UPPER DEFAULT only Type Bin OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 DISABLED y Custom Type 1 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBINS Model specific OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBINT OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBINS OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on custom type 1 paper A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type Bin Custom Type 1 setting returns Assign Type Bin DINQUIRE or Custom Type 1 INQUIRE value setting Standard Bin UPPER Bin 1 OPTIONALOUTBIN1 Bin 2 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 Bin 3 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 Bin 4 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 Bin 5 OPTIONALOUTBINS Bin 6 OPTIONALOUTBING Bin 7 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 Bin 8 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 Bin 9 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 Bin 10 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name LCUSTOMTYPE1TEXTURE Custom Type 1 SMOOTH NORMAL ROUGH NORMAL DEFAULT only Texture LCUSTOMTYPE1WEIGHT Custom Type 1 LIGHT NORMAL HEAVY NORMAL DEFAULT only Weight LCUSTOMTYPE2LENGTH Custom Type 2 NORMAL SHORT NORMAL DEFAULT only Length LCUSTOMTYPE2LOADING Custom Type 2 OFF DUPLEX OFF DEFAULT only Paper Loading
251. fic OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBINS9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on bond paper A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type Bin Bond setting returns Assign Type Bin DINQUIRE or Bond setting INQUIRE value Standard Bin UPPER Bin 1 OPTIONALOUTBIN1 Bin 2 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 Bin 3 OPTIONALOUTBINS3 Bin 4 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 Bin 5 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 Bin 6 OPTIONALOUTBING Bin 7 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 Bin 8 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 Bin 9 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 Bin 10 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name LBONDTEXTURE Bond Texture SMOOTH NORMAL ROUGH ROUGH DEFAULT only LBONDWEIGHT Bond Weight LIGHT NORMAL HEAVY NORMAL DEFAULT only LBWLOCK Black White ON OFF OFF Lock LCANCEL Cancel Control ON OFF ON LCARDSTOCKLENGTH Card Stock NORMAL SHORT NORMAL DEFAULT only Length LCARDSTOCKLOADING Card Stock OFF DUPLEX OFF DEFAULT only Paper Loading Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued MERE LCARDSTOCKOUTBIN DEFAULT only Function Assign Type Bin Card Stock Selections UPPER LOWER DISABLED OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBINS OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBINS OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBINQ OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name is a variabl
252. fier that categorizes the file such as p5macro for PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets See the table beginning on page 3 87 for a complete list of the supported file types The filetype is case sensitive variablezval ue The supported variables and values are listed in the tables beginning on page 3 12 Note Variables may be modified by the DEFAULT command except those marked Read Only Some variables may only be modified using the PJL SET command These variables cannot be modified using the DEFAULT command They are marked Set Only INITIALIZE Command This command restores both the current and default environment variables to their factory default values and updates the printer NVRAM This command affects all of the variables listed in Table 3 3 Common Variables for Both Printer Languages on page 3 12 through Table 3 8 Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation on page 3 52 except the following Note Syntax All read only variables PASSWORD LANG LRESOURCESAVE LDOWNLOADTARGET LPPDS LHONORINIT LUSDEFAULTS PARALLEL RESOURCESAVE This command does not affect LRESOURCE variables listed in Table 3 9 Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables on page 3 53 PJL INITI ALI ZE lt CR gt lt LF gt RESET Command This command resets the current environment variables to the settings stored in the printer NVRAM Therefore any variables modified by the PUL SET command are returned to their default v
253. fileposition 4 25 firstside 4 26 fontnonzerowinding 4 26 V hardwareiomode 4 26 V idlefonts 4 26 ignoresize 4 3 V initializedisk 4 27 jobname 4 27 P4 jobsource 4 28 jobtimeout 4 29 4 manualfeed 4 7 V manualfeedtimeout 4 30 V newsheet 4 30 pagecount 4 30 pagesprinted 4 31 4 papertray 4 7 V printername 4 31 V product 4 31 PS2fonts 4 32 V PS3fonts 4 32 P4 C 2 ILI dE Table C 1 Supplemental Operators Continued y Supported Printer X Not Supported Page numbers reference operator descriptions LE quiet 4 32 V ramsize 4 33 realformat 4 33 renamefile 4 33 resolution 4 34 4 revision 4 34 sccbatch 4 35 sccinteractive 4 36 setcoverpage 4 36 4 setdefaulttimeouts 4 36 setdoidlefonts 4 37 setdojamrecovery 4 37 4 setdoprinterrors 4 37 V setdoret 4 38 V setdostartpage 4 38 setdosysstart 4 39 V setduplexmode 4 39 4 setenginesync 4 40 setethernetaddress 4 40 4 setfilenameextend 4 40 V setfileposition 4 41 A sethardwareiomode 4 41 setidlefonts 4 41 setignoresize 4 3 4 setjobtimeout 4 42 V setmanualduplexmode 4 42 x setpapertray 4 8 setprintername 4 43 setquiet 4 43 4 C 3 ESI dE Table C 1 Supplemental Operators
254. for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters When queried the quotes are not returned around the string name The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name LREPEATPRINTLIMIT Print and Hold 0 to 50 jobs 5 DEFAULT only Hea us Specifies the number of Repeat Print jobs that can be held in printer memory If the Repeat Print Job Limit setting is not equal to 0 a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE returns the numerical setting for LREPEATPRINTLIMIT If Repeat Print Job Limit setting is set to Disabled a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE returns 0 LRESET Reset Control ON OFF ON When the LRESET variable is set to ON RESET PRINTER is available in the JOB MENU when the printer is in the Busy or Waiting state This is true for most printers with a printer operator panel If this variable is set to OFF RESET PRINTER is not available LRESOURCESAVE Resource Save ON OFF OFF DEFAULT only LRIGHTMARGINOFFSET Right Margin 10 to 10 0 Offset LSCREENING Color COLORGRADE IMAGESONLY IET COLORGRADE Screening Selections LSEPARATORSHEETS Indicates where NONE BETWEENCOPIES BETWEENJOBS NONE Separator BETWEENPAGES sheets are placed within the print job LSEPARATORSOURCE Indicates which TRAY1 TRAY2 TRAY3 TRAY4 TRAY5 FEEDER TRAY1 source contains the separator sheets MPFEEDER MANUALPAPER MANUALENVELOPE Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Langua
255. for information on how to cancel the jobs or print the jobs held in the buffer Jobs that were partially printed during the loss of power are printed again in their entirety when power is restored 7 1 Specifications CHAPTER 7 Printer Specifications This chapter lists printer specifications and information about hardware environmental conditions and power requirements Airflow Requirement Room should meet ASHRAE 62 4989 standards Noise Emission Levels The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296 Table 7 1 Noise Emission Levels 1 Meter Average Sound Pressure dBA Status C760 C762 n Printing 52 57 Standby Idle without Power Saver 34 Declared Sound Power Level Bels Status C760 C762 Printing 6 8 Duplex printing 7 2 Standby Idle without Power Saver 4 9 7 2 Specifications Electrical Specifications Table 7 2 Printer Electrical Specifications Printer Model Electrical Specification C760 C762 low voltage model 100 127 V at 47 63 Hz C760 C762 high voltage model 220 240 V at 47 63 Hz Warning Lexmark recommends that you do not use voltage converters with printers Power Requirements The following tables list the nominal average power requirements including fuser power Printer Model C760 C762 C760 C762 C760 C762 dn dtn State 100V 120V 230V 100V 120V 230V
256. ge 3 74 Intervention Required 3 73 30034 34 Wrong Paper Size in Tray x Wrong Paper Size in Tray x Intervention Required 3 73 30034 34 Wrong Paper Size Manual Wrong Paper Size Manual Feed Feed Intervention Required 3 73 40019 Remove Paper Standard Bin Remove Paper Standard Bin Intervention Required 3 73 40019 Remove Paper Output Bin bin Remove Paper Outbin lt bin gt gt Intervention Required 3 73 40019 Remove Paper All Output Bins Remove Paper All Output Bins Intervention Required 3 73 40019 Remove Paper linked set bin Remove Paper lt linked set bin name gt name gt Intervention Required 3 73 4100x Check lt source gt Paper Guide Check lt Source gt Paper Guide Intervention Required 3 73 41 34 Incorrect Media Incorrect Media Intervention Required 3 73 41xyy Load lt source gt Load Request lt Custom Type Name gt lt Custom String gt lt size gt lt type gt lt size gt Intervention Required 3 73 41xxy Load Manual lt Custom Type Name gt lt Custom String gt lt size gt lt type gt lt size gt yy represents a media size code For more information see Table 3 17 Media Size Codes on page 3 74 See your printer documentation for return string messages PJL Support Table B 12 PJL Messages for Paper Handling Continued 4 Supported X Not Supported ET Page numbers reference message descriptions
257. ge Supplement 3010 PostScript Table 4 10 PostScript Emulation System Parameters Continued Key Type Definition CurlnputDevice string Read only The name of the communications device corresponding to the current input file for the PostScript emulation program which is currently executing Possible values are LocalTalkA 9eTokenTalkD96 LocalTalkB LexLinkB LocalTalkC LexLinkC LocalTalkD LexLinkD SerialA PrintServerB 9oSerialB96 PrintServerC SerialC PrintServerD SerialD RemotePrinterB ParallelA RemotePrinterC ParallelB RemotePrinterD ParallelC AppSocketB ParallelID AppSocketC IR_A AppSocketD IR_B LPR_B 9eLPR 0 9eLPR 0 EtherTalkB UnknownDevice EtherTalkC USB A96 EtherTalkD USB B TokenTalkB USB C96 TokenTalkC USB D CurOutlineCache integer Read only This value is always zero CurOutputDevice string Read only The name of the communications device corresponding to the current output file for the PostScript emulation program which is currently executing This string is the same as CurlnputDevice CurPatternCache integer Read only Bytes currently occupied by the pattern cache CurScreenStorage integer Read only This value is always zero CurSourceList integer Read only This value is always zero CurUPathCache integer Read only Bytes currently occupied by the user path cache Disa
258. ge prints The stri ng value can be any string up to 16 characters The string is cleared at the end of a print job Errors stackunderflow typecheck doidlefonts doidlefonts false returns a constant boolean value of f al se Error stackoverflow PostScript dojamrecovery dojamrecovery boolean queries the user default setting of the Jam Recovery menu item A boolean value is returned on the stack true reprint jammed page Jam Recovery is set to On default false do not reprint jammed page Jam Recovery is set to This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence currentpagedevice ExitJamRecovery get Error stackoverflow doprinterrors doprinterrors boolean returns a boolean with the same value as the system parameter DoPrintErrors It also indicates the current value of the Print PS Error printer setting The DoPrintErrors system parameter must be present for the doprinterrors operator to be present Error stackoverflow doret doret integer returns the PQET setting for the current print job An integer value is returned on the stack 0 Off 1 On Note For printers that do not support PQET doret returns a 0 This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence currentpagedevice PostRenderingEnhanceDetails get REValue get Error stackoverflow PostScript dostartpage dostartpage boole
259. gecheck or limitcheck errors An appropriate value is used For example if you set JobTimeout to 14 it is actually set to 15 and no error is generated The exceptions are noted in Table 4 10 Values supplied to setsystemparams that do not match the type of the specified parameter cause typecheck errors Parameters that are not supported by the printer are ignored An attempt to change the value of a read only parameter has no effect on the parameter Write only parameters are not returned by currentsystemparams To determine which parameters your printer supports see Table C 4 on page C 9 Table 4 10 PostScript Emulation System Parameters Key Type Definition BuildTime integer Read only Timestamp identifying the specific build of the PostScript emulation interpreter ByteOrder boolean Read only Native preferred order of multiple byte numbers in binary encoded tokens False high order first True low order first CurDisplayList integer Read only This value is always zero CurFontCache integer Read only Bytes currently occupied by the font cache CurFormCache integer Read only Bytes currently occupied by the form cache These parameters are Lexmark specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 2016 These parameters are available with the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010 3 These parameters are Lexmark specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Langua
260. ger Specifies the size of the file system to be created and is as an argument by InitializeAction f 0 zero InitializeAction uses the size of the entire disk When queried indicates the current size of the file system on the device in pages A value of 0 indicates that the device is not mounted If set with a certain value and the device is reformatted a query returns the value that was set If queried before the disk is reformatted a different value from the one set may be returned because it may return the current size If setto 1 2 or 3 ioerror occurs Legal value Any non negative integer including 0 The value must be less than or equal to the value of PhysicalSize If set to a value greater than PhysicalSize or less than zero a rangecheck error occurs Mounted boolean True System attempts to mount the disk False System attempts to dismount the disk A device must contain a valid file system to mount successfully When a device is mounted it is known to the system and is readable To if the device is currently mounted query this parameter immediately after setting it PhysicalSize integer Read only Indicates the size of the disk in pages Valid only when the disk is mounted A value of 0 zero indicates that the device is not mounted Removable boolean Read only Indicates if the drive supports removable disks Always returns False Searchable boolean Read only Indicates if the disk pa
261. ges Continued Variable Function Selections Factory Default LSTANDARDOUTBINNAME Standard name UPPER DEFAULT only man name is a variable that allows for custom naming of Mosang output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters When queried the quotes are not returned around the string name The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name LSTROKEWIDTH PostScript 1 to 255 1 pel or 1 600th minimum stroke width The width of a line or a stroke between two points inch DEFAULT only LSTAPLE Staple Job ON OFF AUTO FRONT BACK DUAL 0 1 2 OFF LSTAPLESEMPTYALARM Staples Empty OFF SINGLE CONTINUOUS OFF DEFAULT only Alam LSTAPLETESTBIN Staple Priming OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUT DEFAULT only Bin OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 BIN1 OPTIONAL y OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 Model specific OPTIONALOUTBINS OPTIONALOUTBIN10 LSTAPLETESTSOURCE Staple Priming TRAY1 TRAY2 TRAY3 TRAY4 TRAY5 TRAY1 DEFAULT only Source MPFEEDER LSUBSTITUTESIZE Substitute Size OFF LETTERA4 STATEMENTAS 11X17A3 OFF LETTERA4 ALLLISTED ALLLISTED Model specific LTHINCOAT Thin Coat ON OFF ON LTOPBINROTATE Top Bin 0 to 255 0 DEFAULT only DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on LTOPBINROTATE ee returns the numeric value LTOPMARGINOFFSET Top Margin 128 to 127 0 Offset LTRANSPARENCYLENGTH Transpa
262. ght 7 3 protocol DTR DSR 8 24 fastbytes data transfer sequence 8 12 Robust XON 8 23 RS 232C 8 25 standard data transfer sequence 8 11 XON XOFF 8 26 R raster compression mode 2 60 adaptive compression 2 64 delta row 2 63 group 3 and 4 2 65 Lexmark adaptive 2 66 run length encoded data 2 62 Tagged Image File Format TIFF 2 62 uncoded data 2 61 raster image graphics 2 60 receivers AUTOFD Lexmark C510 8 16 BUSY driver Lexmark C510 8 17 DATA 1 8 Signal Lexmark C510 8 16 INIT Lexmark C510 8 17 SLCTIN Lexmark C510 8 18 required clearance 7 3 Resource Data Collection 6 2 6 3 Robust XON protocol 8 23 RS 232C cable pin assignments 8 19 connecting 8 19 port compatibility 8 28 protocol timing 8 25 XON XOFF protocol timing 8 26 S selecting printer languages setting for different interfaces 5 2 SmartSwitch 5 1 serial interface network support 8 28 RS 232C cable pin assignments 8 19 communication parameters 8 21 DTR and DTR DSR protocol timing 8 25 port compatibility 8 28 protocol 8 24 serial configuration recommendations 8 27 using RS 232C 8 18 when to use 8 18 service errors 3 80 signal descriptions 8 15 size printer 7 3 SmartSwitch 5 1 setting for different interfaces 5 2 switching printer languages 5 1 sniffing 5 3 specialty PCL emulation fonts forward backward compatibility modes 2 13 specialty PCL fonts 2 13 specifications See printer specifications standard PCL emulation fonts 2 9 forward b
263. gin to the left edge of the designated column Default 0 Note The column width is defined by the space character of the active font and the Horizontal Motion Index HMI FSC amp aftM Set Right Margin Column Sets the right margin to the right edge of the designated column Note The column width is defined by the space character of the active font and the HMI number of lines Default 3 1 2 inch ESC9 Clear Horizontal Margins Clears left and right margins ESCg 0 Set Top Margin Sets the number of lines between the top of the physical page and first line of print Line height is determined by the current Vertical Motion Index VMI and or line spacing value Note Setting a top margin of 0 results in the first line of text falling outside of the printable area Job Separation This command is parsed and ignored Table 2 12 Page Control Continued Command Parameters ESC a number of lines Default 60 or 64 Country specific Function Result Set Text Length Sets the bottom margin length in lines measured from the first line of the page Text Length equals Logical Page Length inch 3 2 inch for top and 4 2 inch for bottom 1 On Default ESCg LHG Set Output Bin O Auto Select uses the active bin Sets the exit path to direct paper to one of the output bins 1 Standard Bin 2 Bin 1 or Rear Bin 3 Bin 1 or Rear Bin 4 Bin 2 5 Bin3
264. gt setpagedevice Errors rangecheck stackunderflow typecheck setdostartpage boolean setdostartpage sets the DoStartPage system parameter to the value of bool ean The DoStartPage system parameter must be present for the setdostartpage operator to be present For more information see DoStartPage on page 4 67 Errors invalidaccess stackunderflow typecheck PostScript setdosysstart boolean setdosysstart modifies the value of the StartupMode system parameter true StartupMode set to 1 false StartupMode set to 0 default e Iftrue the printer executes a Sys Start file from flash or disk when the PostScript emulation interpreter is initialized If no flash or disk is installed no action occurs f a Sys Start file is on both flash and disk the search order for the devices determines which one is executed e Iffalse the printer does not execute a Sys Start file Errors invalidaccess stackunderflow typecheck setduplexmode boolean setduplexmode sets the value of the Duplex page device parameter for the current print job true sets printing mode to duplex false sets printing mode to simplex At the start of the next print job the value is reset to the user default setting This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence Duplex boolean setpagedevice Errors configurationerror stackunderflow typecheck Notes f simplex printi
265. h is set to ON When queried AUTO is returned if both SmartSwitch settings are ON If one SmartSwitch setting is OFF the printer language whose SmartSwitch setting is ON is returned If both SmartSwitch settings are OFF the default printer language is returned AUTO POWERSAVE DEFAULT only Power Save feature ON OFF ON enables the power saving feature OFF disables the power saving feature Note Some printer models released in the year 2000 or later designated as Energy Star printers cannot have Power Saver disabled ON Table 3 3 Common Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Variable Function Selections Factory Default POWERSAVETIME Power Save time 0 to 120 Model specific 20 DEFAULT only inminutes 0 to 240 Model specific 0 indicates the Power Saver Time feature is disabled The time the printer remains idle before it enters Power Save mode when POWERSAVE is On Note If a value greater than 120 or 240 is specified by a SET or DEFAULT command the value is changed to 120 or 240 based on the printer model QTY Collation 0 to 999 0 SET only Copies Used to request the number of collated copies of a print job If Collation Collated Copies QTY is not equal to 0 a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE returns the numerical setting for QTY If Collation Collated Copies QTY is set to Off a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE returns 0 Note If a value greater than 999 i
266. he color Enables the color lookup tables and specifies the table to use lookup tables for each primary color to the unity curve 770 Data Data for color lookup table ESC m W data Download Dither Matrix Downloads a device dependent user defined dither matrix ESC o W data 1 to 32767 Data Specifies lightness saturation and image Driver Configuration Command Indicates the lightness saturation and scaling algorithm to be applied to a job scaling ESC p P Push Pop Palette 0 Push Save Palette Saves push the current palette and then restores pop it from the 1 Pop Restore Palette palette stack ESC rgL J Simple Color 4 4 planes device CMYK palette Creates a fixed size palette The color specification of the palette 3 3 planes device CMY palette cannot be modified 1 Single plane K black palette 3 3 planes device RGB palette Table 2 23 Color Extensions Continued Command Parameters Function Result 32767 0 to 32767 0 ESCH Gamma Correction 0 Gamma Correction Off Improves the perceptual correctness of color data sent from the 0 0 to 4 0 Gamma Number monitor to any other non linear device by adjusting the brightness and darkness ESO t J Render Algorithm Selects the algorithm used for dithering images and fills ESC yHA Color Component One Indicates the first primary color specified by the Assign Color Index command ESO y B 32767 0 to 32767 0
267. he printer operator panel or your software application 4 Paper ID 99 will be supported for backward compatibility with other Lexmark printers Paper ID 99 has the same logical paper size as ID 100 compatible with HP LaserJet 5Si 5SiMx but is 8 pels wider than the Lexmark 4039 Print Area Menu The printable area is the area on a sheet of paper within which a pel can be printed Logical page is a conceptual entity that defines the area in which margins top bottom left right may be set and the area in which the PCL cursor may be positioned The physical page border is the actual physical boundaries of a page The Print Area menu item is available from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional For some printers Print Area supports three values Normal Whole Page and Fit to Page See your printer documentation for more information Normal setting Whole Page setting Legend PCL Logical Physical PCL Page Page Printable Only Portrait Orientation is shown for all settings Area Border Area The Normal setting which is the factory default means the printable area includes the entire page except the narrow border around the edge of the page This is the nonprintable area The printer measures margin settings relative to the logical page For a more detailed explanation of the Normal setting see Printable Areas on page 2 3 The Whole Page setting only aff
268. her or not that job has finished printing This value is set independently for each port Enabled boolean Read only Supported values are True False Filtering name Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed Supported values are InterpreterBased None HasNames boolean Read only Always returns False Interpreter name Read only Supported values are PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data Supported values are True Data is sent and processed False Data is lost PortLocation string Read only Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set Supported values are Standard Port Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2 Option Slot 3 Type name Read only Always returns the value of Communications PostScript Table 4 11 PostScript Emulation Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition Device Parameters for the Communication Device RemotePrinter RemotePrinterA RemotePrinterB RemotePrinterC RemotePrinterD RemotePrinter_NV and RemotePrinter_Pending contain the same parameters DelayedOutputClose boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job Supported values are True An end of file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs finish pri
269. iagram illustrates the AUTOFD receiver for the Lexmark T640x Connector Pin 74LVC161284 470 pF 10 GND DATA 1 8 Signal Driver Receivers for the Lexmark T640x The following diagram illustrates the DATA 1 8 signal driver receivers for the Lexmark T640x Connector 74LVC161284 Pin 150 pF 20 GND 8 17 Interfaces ACKNLG ERROR SLCT PE Drivers for the Lexmark T640x The following diagram illustrates the ACKNLG ERROR 51 PE drivers for the Lexmark T640x Connector Pin 741VC161284 150 pF 20 GND BUSY Driver and INIT Receiver for the Lexmark T640x The following diagram illustrates the BUSY driver and the INIT receiver for the Lexmark T640x input 1500 20 74LVC161284 50K ohm 5 74LVC161284 150 pF 420 GND 8 18 Interfaces 51 Receiver the Lexmark T640x The following diagram illustrates the SLCTIN receiver for the Lexmark T640x Connector Pin 74LVC161284 39 ohm 410 1500 20 GND Serial Interface The serial interface allows data to flow back and forth between the computer and the printer However the serial interface transfers data at a slower rate than the parallel interface If a serial connector is required you may be able to install an RS 232C Serial Interface Card an External Serial Adapter or an RS 232C Serial Parallel 1284 C Interface Card See your printer documentation for
270. ic 4 Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set X Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set Table 2 6 PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Continued Latin 2 Latin 5 Latin 6 Cyrillic Greek Arial Bold Arial Bold Italic Letter Gothic Letter Gothic Italic Letter Gothic Bold Univers Condensed Medium S SISISI SIS S S SES SES SIS SIS SIS lt lt SISISISINIS SISISISISIS SISISISINIS SIS 415 1515 151 15 5 15 41 15 1515 151 lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Univers Condensed Medium Italic S lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt m 5 Univers Condensed Bold Univers Condensed Bold Italic lt lt lt lt 5 5 5 lt 5 Garamond Antiqua Garamond Kursiv Garamond Halbfett Garamond Kursiv Halbfett S SISI S SS SIR S SISI S SISIS S 54 5 S 1515 54 5 S NTN ENN NEN ENS 41515 NTN ENN SISISN S X
271. ified environment variable Syntax DINQUI RE command modifier value variable lt CR gt lt LF gt Response Syntax DINQUI RE command modifier value variable CR LF val ue CR LF FF where command modifier value The command modifier value parameter specifies the type of PJL variable to be queried The variables supported are listed in the tables beginning on page 3 12 e A command modifier value parameter is not required for variables listed in the tables Common Variables for Both Printer Languages on page 3 12 and Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages on page 3 19 LPARM PCL is used with variables specific to PCL emulation See the tables Common Variables for PCL Emulation on page 3 48 and Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation on page 3 49 LPARM POSTSCRIPT is used for variables specific for PostScript emulation See the tables Common Variables for PostScript Emulation on page 3 51 and Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation on page 3 52 LRESOURCE device filename filetype is required for LRESOURCE vari ables See the table Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables on page 3 53 Values for device filename filetype are device flash flashl disk ordisk1 case insensitive filename A unique identifier for a file such as the macro ID for a PCL macro the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set the font ID for a PCL font
272. ified your printer is compatible with the Hewlett Packard Company s LaserJet printers When NORESOLUTION is specified font resolution is removed from the font selection priority criteria RESOLUTION Common Variables for PostScript Emulation Note The word common applies to those variables common to both your printer and the Hewlett Packard Company s LaserJet printers Use these variables only for PostScript emulation The command modifier val ue parameter should be specified as LPARM POSTSCRI PT For example 0898 1 SET LPARM POSTSCRIPT AMRECOVERY OFF lt CR gt lt LF gt To determine which variables your printer supports see Table B 5 Common Variables for PostScript Emulation on page B 13 Table 3 7 Common Variables for PostScript Emulation JAMRECOVERY Function Jam Recovery Selections ON OFF For queries when the Jam Recovery setting is set to Auto PJL returns the value of OFF The remaining two Jam Recovery values On and Off are returned by PJL as ON and OFF respectively When PJL is used to set Jam Recovery OFF the setting is actually set to Auto When PJL is used to set Jam Recovery ON the setting is set to ON Changing this variable also affects PCL emulation Factory Default OFF PRTPSERRS Print PS Errors ON OFF OFF Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation The following variables are unique in some print
273. ifier value parameter should be specified as LPARM PCL For example PJL SET LPARM PCL FONTSOURCE I lt CR gt lt LF gt To determine which variables your printer supports see Table B 3 Common Variables for PCL Emulation on page B 11 Table 3 5 Common Variables for PCL Emulation Function Selections Factory Default FONTNUMBER Font Number 0 1 n 0 FONTSOURCE Font Source 1 S M1 M2 M3 M4 D1 Internal font source S Permanent download fonts M1 M2 M3 M4 Flash font source D1 Disk font source All other values default to internal font source PITCH Default pitch 0 08 to 100 in increments of 0 01 10 00 fixed pitch fonts Note If an invalid pitch is requested the printer selects the closest pitch PTSIZE Default point size 1 to 1008 in increments of 0 25 12 00 Note If invalid point size is requested the onts printer selects the closest point size SYMSET Symbol set for the If a symbol set is requested that is not resident PC8 PC850 default font in the printer the symbol set is not changed Country specific Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation The following variables are unique to your printer and are supported in PCL emulation only The command modifier value parameter should be specified as LPARM PCL For example QPJL SET LPARM PCL LBI TMAPROUNDI NG OFF lt CR gt lt LF gt To determine which variables your printer supports see Ta
274. ilename access file file creates a file object with specified filename and access The access values are r open the file for reading only w create a file if one does not already exist or truncate and overwrite it if it does exist File is opened for writing only a create a file if one does not already exist or append it if it does exist File is opened for writing only r open the file for reading and writing An undefinedfilename error occurs if the file does not exist wt create a file if it does not already exist or truncate and overwrite if it does exist File is opened for reading and writing a create a file if it does not exist or append it if it does exist File is opened for reading and writing This operator is in systemdict Errors invalidfileaccess ioerror limitcheck stackunderflow typecheck undefinedfilename Note An undefinedfilename error occurs if the file does not exist filenameforall pattern proc scratchstring filenameforal lists all the files with names that match a specified pattern string copies the filename for each of these files into a specified scratch string and calls a specified proc procedure This operator is in systemdict Errors ioerror stackoverflow stackunderflow typecheck fileposition file fileposition position indicates the current position on an open file This operator is in systemdict Errors ioerror stackunderflow typecheck undefinedfilename Note An undefinedfi
275. imary Font 2 58 Secondary Font 2 58 Fill Polygon Odd Even 2 57 Fill Polygon Non Zero Winding 2 57 Fill Type 2 59 Fill Type 22 2 59 Fill Type 9 2 59 Initialize 2 56 Input P1 and P2 2 56 IR Input Relative P1 and P2 2 57 IW Input Window 2 57 LA Line Attributes 2 59 4 LB Label Default Terminator 03 x 2 58 4 LO Label Origin 2 58 Uses PCL Label Origin 2 58 4 LT Line Type 2 59 LM Label Mode 2 58 x MC Logical Operation 2 57 A 8 PCL Support Table A 2 GL 2 Commands Continued y Supported Page numbers reference command Printer X Not Supported descriptions 1 LE o E Function NP Number of Pens 2 59 Plot Absolute 2 57 Pen Color 2 59 PD Pen Down 2 57 Polyline Encoded 2 57 Polygon Mode 2 57 Pixel Placement 2 57 PR Plot Relative 2 57 2 57 v PW Pen Width 2 59 Fill Rectangle Absolute 2 58 RF Define Raster Fill 2 59 Rotate Coordinate System 2 57 RR Fill Rectangle Relative 2 58 RT Arc Relative Three Point 2 57 SA Select Alternate Font 2 58 58 Scalable Bitmapped Fonts 2 58 50 Scale 2 57 SD Define Standard Font 2
276. in pages per minute EnvironmentSave boolean Indicates or modifies the Resource Save user default value True Resource Save user default value is set to On False Resource Save user default value is set to Off Note When job changes this parameter from False to True all interpreter tasks such as PostScript and PCL are terminated and restarted at the end of the current job FactoryDefaults boolean If set to True and the printer is then immediately powered off all non volatile parameters revert to factory default values at the next power on The print job that sets FactoryDefaults to True must be the last job executed before power off otherwise the request is ignored FatalErrorAddress integer The address at which a fatal system software error occurred It is stored in this parameter before execution is stopped It is also transmitted to the host over the communications channel FontResourceDir string Specifies the location in the file system for font resource files FontVersion string Read only The version of the font read only memory ROM GenericResourceDir string Specifies the location in the file system for resource files GenericResourcePathSep string Concatenated to the GenericResourceDir and the category name It is followed by the resource name to get the external location of the resource Example If GenericResourceDir and GenericResourcePathSep were Resource and respectively the LexmarkLogo
277. ind the value of Type for your printer see Table C 2 continued on page C 4 ColorCorrection is a null string or name object that controls the appearance of colors The value is determined by the user default setting in the Color Correction menu item The following values are supported null Display Nivid ImageBrightness is an integer that controls the brightness of images The following values are supported 100 100 0 default ImageContrast is an integer that controls the contrast of images The following values are supported 100 100 0 default PrintQuality is an integer that controls the print quality settings The following values are supported 0 Quick Print 1 Normal 2 Presentation 3 1200 Image Q Duplex boolean Indicates if printed pages are duplexed printed on both sides of the page or simplexed printed on one side of the page True Print duplex mode False Print simplex mode default EndPage procedure Executes at the end of each printed page to indicate if the contents of raster memory should be printed EndPage gets two integer arguments through the operand stack one is a count of the previous showpage executions and the other is the code that indicates the execution condition The code is 0 zero if it is called from showpage 1 if it is called from copypage and 2 if it is called during device deactivation The procedure must return a boolean value ExitJamRecovery boolean
278. inition MaxOpStack integer Maximum elements in the operand stack Legal value Any integer greater than or equal to 75 MaxPatternltem integer Maximum bytes occupied by a single cached pattern Legal value Any integer between zero and half of RamSize MaxScreenltem integer Maximum bytes occupied by a single halftone screen Legal value Any non negative integer MaxSuperScreen integer Establishes an upper limit for the number of pixels in the supercell Supercells affect Type 1 and Type 2 halftones If MaxSuperScreen is set to zero the use of supercells is prevented Legal value Any integer between zero and half of RamSize MaxUPathltem integer Maximum bytes occupied by a single user path Legal value Any integer between zero and half of RamSize MinFontCompress integer Read only This value is always the value of MAXINTEGER PageCount integer Read only This value is a running sum of the number of pages submitted by the PostScript interpreter to the print engine for printing Note This value is reset to 0 zero during PostScript initialization Since PostScript initialization by the printer cannot be known we recommend querying the value of PageCount at the beginning of a job and at the end of a job and then calculating the difference to determine how many pages are submitted to the printer for a specific job This parameter is not valid for tracking pages between jobs UseOldcopypage boolean
279. input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed Supported values are InterpreterBased None HasNames boolean Read only Always returns False Interpreter name Read only Supported values are PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data Supported values are True Data is sent and processed False Data is lost PCLSmartSwitch boolean Supported values are True PCL SmartSwitch is On False PCL SmartSwitch is Off For more information see Using SmartSwitch on page 2 1 PortLocation string Read only Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set Supported values are Standard Port Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2 Option Slot 3 PSSmartSwitch boolean Supported values are True PS SmartSwitch is set to On False PS SmartSwitch is set to Off For more information see Using SmartSwitch on page 4 1 Type name Read only Always returns the value of Communications Device Parameters for the Communication Device 058 USB_A USB_B 05 WUSB_D USB_NV and USB_Pending contain the same parameters DelayedOutputClose boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job Supported values are True An end of file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs finish printing Fa
280. intable Areas IG Logical Page 4 A Bx F H A a Physical B Portrait Page Border Printable Area G Legend A Portrait physical page width and landscape physical page length B Portrait physical page length and landscape physical page width C Portrait logical page width D Landscape logical page width E Distance between the side edge of the physical page and the logical page in portrait F Distance between the side edge of the physical page and the logical page in landscape G Distance between the top and bottom edge of the physical page and logical page H Distance between the left and right edge of the physical page and the printable area in portrait or distance between the top and bottom edge of the physical page and printable area in landscape Distance between the top and bottom edge of the physical page and the printable area in portrait or distance between the left and right edge of the physical page and the printable area in landscape Note The tables beginning on page 2 4 list the page sizes and dimensions of each area labeled on the preceding diagram for all paper and envelope sizes your printer supports If information about your printer is not included in the following tables see page 1 1 for information on how to get a Technical Reference for your printer Lexmark C760 and C762 The following table lists page sizes
281. inter documentation for more information See page 8 7 for more information about parallel interface If a serial connector is required you may be able to install an RS 232C Serial Parallel 1284 C Interface Card See page 8 18 for more information about serial interface Some printers have standard print servers but you can also buy optional print servers that connect the printer to Token Ring or Ethernet networks For detailed installation or setup instructions see your printer documentation or the Software and Documentation CD See Network Support on page 8 28 for more information about print servers See your printer documentation for information on which printer interface options your printer supports and for detailed installation instructions Note All print servers are capable of supporting AppleTalk Interfaces Setting Up the Communications Port You must establish communication between your printer and computer To do this you define your communications port in the application you are using Instructions for several applications or operating systems are as follows Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 95 98 Me In your Windows 95 98 Me application On the Menu bar click Start Click Settings Click Control Panel The Control Panel screen appears Double click the System icon The System Properties screen appears Click the Device Manager tab Scroll down to Ports and click the once to expand the
282. inter to the end of the file The file must already exist Access types are case sensitive The LREADFILE command is ignored if the file was not opened with an accesstype of RO RW or AP The LWRITEFILE command is ignored if the file was not opened with anaccesstype of WO RW or AP bytecount LENGTH bytecount The amount of data in bytes to be read or written The parameter is optional for both the LREADFILE and LWRITEFILE commands If the LENGTH parameter is omitted from the LREADFILE command byt ecount is assumed to be equal to the entire file beginning at the START location If the LENGTH parameter is omitted from the LWRITEFILE command an PJL END DATA command must be placed at the end of the data All data up to in PJL END DATA is written to the file Note The LWRITEFILE command requires that either the LENGTH parameter or the PJL END DATA command be specified but not both If the LENGTH is greater than the file size on LREADFILE command it is assumed to be the entire file beginning at the START location 3 88 Table 3 22 Variables for Flash and Disk File and Password Commands Continued Parameter filedevice Syntax DEVICE filedevice Description File storage media Case insensitive flash flashl disk di sk1 rom Therom value is used for the LRUNFILE command only Note The command is ignored if the device is not installed flashdevice DEVICE fl
283. irectory lists the storage device flash or disk the names of the files and the file size See page 6 4 for a sample directory Example of Directory The Directory that prints appears similar to the one below An explanation of the parts of the Directory follows the example Optional Font Memory Size 1048576 bytes Part Name FLASH Part Number none Write password protected ID Type Size Prot Description 1000 PCL bitmap font 32140 W ITClublnGrphBkOb 1002 PCL bitmap font 52550 Courier 1003 PCL scalable font 254491 CG Times PostScript font 134572 Courier User data 1000 My Program Demo 1000 My Demo Unknown file type 1000 My Unknown 248 PCL macro 10 R W 249 PCL macro 10 mydescription 9 files 476773 bytes used 0 bytes unavailable 571803 bytes free Optional Font Memory Expression used to indicate flash memory or disk is installed Part Name Part Name as itis stored in the flash memory card header If flash memory is formatted by the printer the part name field is shown as FLASH The part name field for the disk is not printed Part Number Part Number as it is stored in the flash memory card header If the flash memory is formatted by the printer the part number field is shown as none The part number field for the disk is not printed Write Password Protected Indicates the entire flash memory or disk is write protected If the device is read write protected Read Write password protected
284. is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on plain paper A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type Bin Plain setting returns Model specific 0 indicates the Power Saver feature is disabled Note If a value outside the possible value range is specified by a SET or DEFAULT command the value is changed to the closest value within the possible value range Some printer models released in the year 2000 or later designated as Energy Star printers cannot have Power Saver disabled Assign Type Bin DINQUIRE or Plain setting INQUIRE value Standard Bin UPPER Bin 1 OPTIONALOUTBIN1 Bin 2 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 Bin 3 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 Bin 4 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 Bin 5 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 Bin 6 OPTIONALOUTBING Bin 7 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 Bin 8 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 Bin 9 OPTIONALOUTBINY Bin 10 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name LPLAINTEXTURE Plain Paper SMOOTH NORMAL ROUGH NORMAL DEFAULT only Texture LPLAINWEIGHT Plain Paper LIGHT NORMAL HEAVY NORMAL DEFAULT only Weight LPOWERSAVER Power Saver 0 to 120 Model specific 20 DEFAULT only time in minutes 240 Model specific Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Variable Function Selections Factory Default LPPDS Activate ON OFF OFF DEFAULT only ju ud i Use ON to enable PPDS printe
285. is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters When queried the quotes are not returned around the string name The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name LOPTIONALOUTBIN3NAME Optional Output name OPTIONAL DEFAULT only Bin 3 Name OUTBINS3 name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters When queried the quotes are not returned around the string name The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name LOPTIONALOUTBINANAME Optional Output name OPTIONAL DEFAULT only Bin 4 Name OUTBIN4 name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters When queried the quotes are not returned around the string name The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name LOPTIONALOUTBINS5NAME Optional Output name OPTIONAL DEFAULT only Bin 5 Name OUTBIN5 name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters When queried the quotes are not returned around the string name The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued MERE LOPTIONALOUTBINGNAME DEFAULT on
286. ity levels 0x02 1 bit plane or 0x04 2 bits plane Byte 14 15 X res for M plane 0x012C 300 or 0x0258 600 Byte 16 17 Y res for M plane 0x012C 300 or 0x0258 600 Byte 18 19 M plane intensity levels 0x02 1 bit plane or 0x04 2 bits plane Byte 20 21 X res for Y plane 0x012C 300 or 0x0258 600 Byte 22 23 Y res for Y plane 0x012C 300 or 0x0258 600 Byte 24 25 Y plane intensity levels 0x02 1 bit plane or 0x04 2 bits plane Table 2 23 Color Extensions Command Parameters Function Result 7 to 32767 Data Data size and data of byte aligned binary data that specifies a matrix or matrices for the primary colors FSC amp b M Monochrome Print Mode 0 Print in mixed render algorithm Changes each color value to its gray scale equivalent mode 1 Print using gray scale equivalent FSC amp p C Palette Control 0 Delete all palettes except those Provides palette management in stack active palette is deleted 1 Delete all palettes in stack active palette not affected 2 Delete palette specified by Palette Control ID 6 Copy active palette to ID specified by Palette Control ID ESC amp Palette Control ID 0 to 32767 Palette ID number Indicates the ID number used by the Palette Control command ESC amp p4S Select Palette Oto 32767 Palette ID number Selects a new active palette by indicating the ID number ESC 0 W data Color Lookup Tables 0 Resets or initializes t
287. l type option1 option2 Fill Type FT22 PCL User Defined Pattern ID Fill Type FT 9 level Fill Type LA kind value Line Attributes LT pattern number pattern length mode Line Type NP number Number of Pens PC pen red green blue Pen Color PW width pen Pen Width RF index width height pen Define Raster Fill SM character Symbol Mode SP pen Select Pen SV screen type option1 option2 Screened Vectors 9 level Screened Vectors SV TM width height number Threshold Matrix Transparency Mode TR mode UL index gap gap User Defined Line WU type Pen Width Units Raster Image Graphics These commands utilize the raster area Before sending data set the presentation mode the resolution the compression mode the raster height and width and start raster graphics These parameters are in effect until you overwrite them with a different command or there is a printer reset To ensure that the printed image appears in the expected area set width and height parameters Raster Compression Mode The Raster Compression Mode command determines how raster data is coded It affects the amount of code required to create an image and the efficiency of image printing Syntax ESC 54M Parameters 0 Uncoded default 1 Run Length Encoded 2 Tagge
288. lay The printer is taken OFFLINE This message along with the OPMSG command is the lowest priority so if another intervention occurs it displays instead Note See your printer documentation for information about how to return your printer to the ONLINE state Once in the ONLINE state the Ready Busy or Waiting message appears on the printer operator panel display or through MarkVision Professional A printer reset is not available from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional while STMSG displays Syntax STMSG DISPLAY message CR LF Unique PJL Commands To determine which commands your printer supports see Table B 16 Lexmark Unique PJL Commands on page B 32 LBEEP Command This command causes the printer to beep three times Syntax QPJL LBEEP lt CR gt lt LF gt LPORTROTATE Command This command causes the printer to rotate ports at the next job boundary The information to rotate ports is specified in the job header For example the printer could switch from parallel interface to serial interface between jobs Syntax 1 LPORTROTATE lt CR gt lt LF gt LPRINT Commands Information Pages Use these commands to print one of the internal information pages QPJL testpage CR The supported t est page values are listed in the following table Table 3 20 LPRINT testpage Commands testpage Value Description LPRINTDIRECT
289. le that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on Glossy paper A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type Bin Glossy setting returns Assign Type Bin DINQUIRE or Glossy setting INQUIRE value Standard Bin UPPER Bin 1 OPTIONALOUTBIN1 Bin 2 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 Bin 3 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 Bin 4 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 Bin 5 OPTIONALOUTBINS Bin 6 OPTIONALOUTBING Bin 7 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 Bin 8 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 Bin 9 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 Bin 10 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name LGLOSSYTEXTURE Glossy Paper SMOOTH NORMAL ROUGH NORMAL Texture LGLOSSYWEIGHT Glossy Paper LIGHT NORMAL HEAVY NORMAL Weight LHOLEPUNCHALARM Hole Punch OFF SINGLE CONTINUOUS OFF Alarm LHOLEPUNCHMODE Hole Punch 2HOLE 3HOLE 4HOLE US Mode 4HOLE non US LHONORINIT Honor INIT HONORSIGNAL DONOTHONORSIGNAL DONOTHONOR DEFAULT only Signal SIGNAL Port specific LIMAGEBRIGHTNESS Image 100 to 100 0 Brightness LIMAGECONTRAST Image Contrast 100 to 100 0 LIMAGEENHANCE Image ON OFF OFF Enhancement Technology Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Variable Function Selections Factory Default LIMAGEENHANCETYPE Image 2 4 AUTO 2 4 Enhancement ifi Technology Model specific Type LIMAGEORIENTATION Page Image DONOTROTATE ROTATEPAPER DONOTROTATE Orientation ROTATEENVELOPES ROTATESTA
290. lename error occurs if the file does not exist PostScript firstside firstside boolean indicates whether the current imaging area is on the front side of the page true front side is currently being imaged false back side is currently being imaged Error stackoverflow fontnonzerowinding boolean fontnonzerowi ndi ng sets the winding rule for Type 1 fonts No query operation is performed since the winding rule is reset to true at the beginning of each print job The boolean value can be true non zero winding used by the interpreter false even or odd winding rule used by interpreter Error stackoverflow hardwareiomode hardwareiomode boolean queries the user default setting of the Parallel Protocol menu item This operator returns the value of the Parallel Protocol either Standard or Fastbytes An i nteger value is returned on the stack 1 Parallel Fastbytes Off Standard 2 Parallel Fastbytes On Fastbytes Error stackoverflow idlefonts idlefonts mark supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019 4029 and 4039 It is parsed and returns a mark on the stack Error stackoverflow PostScript ignoresize See page 4 3 initializedisk pages action initializedisk initializes the disk with the page count and action as integer arguments The arguments set the disk1 IO device parameters as follows LogicalSize parameter is set to pages Ifa value of 0 is set as page
291. ll findcolorrendering operator PostScript Table 4 8 Page Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition PageSize array Specifies the size width and height of the current page in 1 72 inch units A value of 0 0 is assumed to be the lower left corner of the physical page and width height is the upper right corner Policies dictionary Uses entries to describe the actions to perform when a particular function cannot be completed The entries are as follows PageSize is an integer that specifies what recovery action to use when PageSize cannot be matched with any available media paper envelope or other print materials The actions are 0 Generate a configurationerror default 1 Ignore the requested PageSize 2 Interact with a human operator or print manager 3 Select the next larger or smaller available media and adjust the page to fit Select the next larger available media and adjust the page to fit Select the next larger or smaller available media but do not adjust the page Select the next larger available media but do not adjust the page Disable media selection Implement the requested PageSize on the previously selected media without making adjustments The way the image is positioned on the media is printer dependent and may result in part of the image being clipped 23 If the SubstituteSize parameter from the DeviceRenderingInfo dictionary is set to Off the effective policy executed is
292. lse An end of file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the interpreter whether or not that job has finished printing 4 79 PostScript Table 4 11 PostScript Emulation Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition Enabled boolean Read only Supported values are True False Filtering name Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed Supported values are InterpreterBased None HasNames boolean Read only Always returns False Interpreter name Read only Supported values are PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data Supported values are True Data is sent and processed False Data is lost PCLSmartSwitch boolean Supported values are True PCL SmartSwitch is On False PCL SmartSwitch is Off For more information see Using SmartSwitch on page 2 1 PortLocation string Read only Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set Supported values are Standard Port Option Slot 1 2 and 3 Model specific PSSmartSwitch boolean Supported values are True PS SmartSwitch is set to On False PS SmartSwitch is set to Off For more information see Using SmartSwitch on page 4 1 Type name Read only Always returns the value of Communications Device Parameters for the
293. lt value at the end of the print job When you define it outside the normal server loop it is reset to the default value when the printer is switched to a printer language other than PostScript emulation or when a power on reset occurs Errors rangecheck stackoverflow typecheck buildtime buildti me integer returns the BuildTime system parameter which is a timestamp that identifies the specific build of the PostScript emulation interpreter Error stackoverflow byteorder byteorder boolean returns a boolean on the stack with the same value as the system parameter ByteOrder Indicates the printer microprocessor native byte order The boolean values indicate true low order byte first false high order byte first Error stackoverflow PostScript checkpassword integer checkpassword or string checkpassword checks the passwords for both the SystemParamsPassword system parameter and the StartJobPassword system parameter stored in the printer If the i nteger form is used the integer is converted into a string before the password check occurs A bool ean is returned on the stack to indicate if the specified password matches either password The boolean value can be true correct password false incorrect password After the bool ean is returned the printer waits 1 second before it continues processing Errors stackunderflow typecheck Note The password is defined as a 4 byte number currentfilenameex
294. lusive For queries the Print Darkness setting is returned as a real value 0 1 Lightest 0 3 Lighter 0 5 Normal 0 7 Darker 0 9 Darkest When the Darkness value is modified the following ranges are used to determine the Print Darkness setting 0 0 0 2 Lightest gt 0 2 0 4 Lighter gt 0 4 0 6 Normal gt 0 6 0 8 Darker gt 0 8 1 0 Darkest 4 88 PostScript Table 4 11 PostScript Emulation Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition PageCount integer Read only Page Count TimeToStandby integer Power Saver Supported values are 0 to 120 in minutes Type name Read only Always returns the value of Parameters Device Parameters for the Parameters Device Console Language name Display Language Type name Read only Always returns the value of Parameters Device Parameters for the Parameters Device Calendar CalendarA CalendarB CalendarC CalendarD Day integer Supported values are 1 31 Hour integer Supported values are 0 23 Minute integer Supported values are 0 59 Month integer Supported values are 1 42 Running boolean Signifies whether time is available for this device Second integer Supported values are 0 59 Type name Read only Value of Parameters Year integer DateTime string Date and Time in the format YYYY MM DD HH MM DayOfWeekLong string Long day name for ex
295. ly Function Optional Output Bin 6 Name Selections name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters When queried the quotes are not returned around the string name The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name Factory Default OPTIONAL OUTBIN6 LOPTIONALOUTBIN7NAME DEFAULT only Optional Output Bin 7 Name name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters When queried the quotes are not returned around the string name The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name OPTIONAL OUTBIN7 LOPTIONALOUTBIN8NAME DEFAULT only Optional Output Bin 8 Name name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters When queried the quotes are not returned around the string name The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name OPTIONAL OUTBIN8 LOPTIONALOUTBIN9NAME DEFAULT only Optional Output Bin 9 Name name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters When queried the quotes are not returned around the string name The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name OPTIONAL OUTBIN9
296. ly For this message the values for XXXX are returned to indicate which ink cartridges are defective d represents a one letter designator for each door labeled on the printer 3 c represents a one letter designator for each cover labeled on the printer Note The Display String is returned in the current language A display string that is returned is truncated to the DISPLAY CHARACTER SIZE returned in INFO CONFIG Table 3 14 PJL Message for Attendance Conditions Printer State Status Code Display String Online Status Intervention required 40021 Insert Print Cartridge FALSE print cartridge missing Intervention required 40022 2xx Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 40027 Check Tray source gt Connection FALSE check tray connection Intervention required 40027 Install Tray x or Cancel Job FALSE install tray x or cancel job Intervention required 40028 Reattach Envelope Feeder FALSE envelope feeder detached Intervention required 40028 Reattach MP Feeder FALSE multipurpose feeder detached Intervention required 40028 Install Env Feed or Cancel Job FALSE install envelope feeder or cancel job Intervention required 40029 Reattach Output Bin bin gt FALSE reattach output bin Intervention required 40029 Reattach Bins bin x bin FALSE reattach bins Intervention required 40029 Install Bin x or Cancel Job FALSE install bin x or cancel job Int
297. m 51515151 0 222 gt 9 o Ololo E E 5 5 0 001010 4 Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set X Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set Table 2 7 PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Continued Specials Specials PCL ITC Zapf Dingbats Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats PS ITC Zapf Dingbats Microsoft Publishing PC 911 Katakana POSTNET Barcode C39 Bar Code Upper Case c39 Bar Code plus Lower Case C39 Bar Code plus Human Readable Wingdings Typeface Symbol Set VNMATH Ventura Math PSMATH PS Math MSPUBL PJL Value 15U PIFONT Pi font Symbol Set ID 58 5 Wingdings x x x x v x x x Symbol x x x SymbolPS x x xixixixix x x vix x x x ITC Zapf Dingbats xixixixix x x 4 Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set X Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set All fonts that support the Roman 8 8U symbol set also support the following 19 symbol sets Table 2 8 ISO PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Symbol Set ID Symbol Set Typeface 1E ISO 4 Unite
298. m FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4250w 250 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4250x 250 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4251 wy 251 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4251x 251 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4252w 252 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover The door or cover needs to be opened x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer y represents the tray number Z represents the bin number See your printer documentation for more information on printer messages 3 78 Table 3 19 PJL Messages for Paper Jams Continued Printer State Status Code Display String Online Status paper jam Intervention required 4253w 253 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4254wy 254 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4255 255 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4256w 256 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4257w 257 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4258w 258 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4259wy 259 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4260w 260 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4260x 260 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4261w 261 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention
299. menus display or Not Ready displays source Source of the job the server is executing Serial Parallel Network USB LocalTalk Infrared Internal This field is omitted if the server is idle CHAPTER 5 Switching Languages Your printer may support both PCL emulation and PostScript emulation See your printer documentation for more information This chapter describes ways to switch printer languages and explains when you may want to choose one method over another SmartSwitch is provided with the printer to switch languages Other methods of switching languages are PJL ENTER LANGUAGE command Sniffing SmartSwitch The SmartSwitch feature lets the printer switch to either PCL emulation or PostScript emulation for each interface parallel serial USB or network Your printer is shipped from the factory with SmartSwitch set to On for all languages and all interfaces Consequently the printer examines all print jobs coming into all its interfaces and switches between PostScript emulation and PCL emulation dynamically If a software program explicitly tells the printer which language to use by a PJL command the printer always accepts and uses that explicit command regardless of how SmartSwitch has been set from the printer operator panel If a software program does not explicitly tell the printer which language to use the printer examines the incoming data stream and selects the language
300. mmon Variables for PostScript Emulation on page 3 51 and Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation on page 3 52 LRESOURCE device filename filetype is required for LRESOURCE vari ables See the table Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables on page 3 53 Values for device filename filetype are device flash flashl disk ordisk1 case insensitive filename A unique identifier for a file such as the macro ID for a PCL macro the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set the font ID for a PCL font and so on Thefilename is case sensitive filetype An identifier that categorizes the file such as p5macro for PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets See the table beginning on page 3 87 for a complete list of the supported file types The filetype is case sensitive variablezval ue The supported variables are listed in the tables beginning on page 3 12 This printer returns a for inquiries of an unsupported variable or inquiries of a variable associated with an option that is not installed USTATUS Command This command is used to enable and disable unsolicited status from the printer Unsolicited status information is sent automatically when an asynchronous event occurs Table 3 11 USTATUS Unsolicited Status Variable Values on page 3 60 lists the asynchronous information that can be enabled and disabled Syntax PJL USTATUS ustatus variablezvalue lt CR gt lt LF gt Response Syntax 89 USTATUS usta
301. mp s0C To see the control characters and other blank codepoints in symbol set Romana 80 set the symbol set to PC 8 100 Table 2 26 Miscellaneous Commands Continued Command Parameters Function Result 104 Envelope 105 Letterhead 106 Preprinted 107 Colored Paper 108 Iron On ESCZ Display Functions Off Turns off Display Functions resumes normal command processing ESC Print Test Page Causes a test page to print ESC o M b Print Quality 1 Ink Saver Selects the print quality setting for the page 0 Normal 1 Best ESC amp 2 M b Paper Type 0 Plain Paper Selects the paper type setting for the page 1 Bond 2 Coated Paper 3 Glossy Paper 4 Transparency 101 Photo Paper 102 Card Stock 103 Labels GL 2 Commands Note GL 2 is not a stand alone plotter emulation It can only be entered from within PCL emulation and cannot be used with software without a unique printer driver written explicitly for GL 2 The following tables list the GL 2 commands by group To determine which GL 2 commands your printer supports see Table A 2 GL 2 Commands on page A 6 Table 2 27 Configuration Group Command Parameter Command Name CO text Comment DF Default Values IN n Initialize IP Ypi Yp2 Input P1 and P2 Table 2 27 Configuration Group Continued Command Parameter IR 1 Yp2 Command Name
302. mple creates a macro to print the Wigit Corp logo then calls the logo macro in the body of a letter ESC amp f 1 Y Esc amp f X Esca 72 ESC 8 U ESC s1p18v0s3b4101T W Esca 21 6H 80 lt 2 15 igit Esca 72 50 lt 1 8 05 C Esc 65127 15 orp 72 H ESC amp f 1X ESC amp f 10X From ESC amp f Ly 3X Thank you for ESC amp f Ly 3X Set the macro ID to 1 Start the macro definition Relative move right 1 10 inch 72 720th Select Roman 8 symbol set Select CG Times 18 point bold Print W Relative move left 0 03 inch Select CG Times 12 point bold italic Print igit Relative move right 1 10 inch Select 18 point and turn off italic Print C Select 12 point italic Print orp Relative move right 1 10 inch End of macro definition Make Macro ID 1 permanent Print the header From Set the macro ID to 1 and call the macro Print the letter Print the closing Set the macro ID to 1 and call the macro CHAPTER 3 Printer Job Language Your printer supports complete Printer Job Language PJL commands including certain commands that cause the printer to enter PCL emulation PostScript emulation and Personal Printer Data Stream PPDS To determine which commands your printer supports see Appendix Support on page B 1 PJL Command Notation The syntax for each supported PJL command is listed in this chapter The following character code
303. mporary 5 previous font ID permanent 6 current font ESC ostE Set Character Code Code Point 0 65536 Sets the decimal code point associated with the next character downloaded or deleted Default 0 ESC sitW data Load Character Downloads character descriptor and data to the current character code Table 2 18 Macros Command Parameters Function Result ESC fat Y Set Macro ID Macro ID 0 32767 Sets the ID for the macro you have created on flash or disk Default 0 ESC Macro Control 0 Start definition Manages use of macros E t Notes 3 calm previous GL 2 commands are supported inside macros 4 ES ID Only call and execute macro commands are allowed within a macro 5 previous macro ID A macro may call or execute another macro This is called nesting y A maximum of two nesting levels are allowed for a total of three 6 Delete all macros Jevels 7 Delete all temporary macros 8 Delete current macro ID See Macros on page 2 67 for additional information 9 Make last ID temporary 10 Make last ID permanent Table 2 19 Print Model Command Parameters Function Result ESC CHG Gray Scale Fills White default 2 gray 10 gray 1596 gray 3096 gray 4596 gray 7096 gray 9096 gray 100 gray Black Cross Hatch Fills Horizontal line Vertical line Diagonal line Diagonal line Square grid
304. n Output Bin Selections UPPER LOWER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBINS OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBINS OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBINQ OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Output Bin setting returns DINQUIRE or Output Bin setting INQUIRE value Standard Bin UPPER Bin 1 OPTIONALOUTBIN1 Bin 2 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 Bin 3 OPTIONALOUTBINS3 Bin 4 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 Bin 5 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 Bin 6 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 Bin 7 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 Bin 8 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 Bin 9 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 Bin 10 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name Factory Default UPPER PAGEPROTECT Page Protect AUTO ON A value of ON indicates the Page Protect setting is set On The value of AUTO indicates the Page Protect setting is set Off INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of the Page Protect as follows f Page Protect is set Off AUTO is returned f Page Protect is set On ON is returned AUTO PAPER Default paper source default formatting size Paper A3 A4 A5 B4 BAPAPER B5PAPER JISB4 JISB5 CUSTOM EXECUTIVE FOLIO LEDGER LEGAL LETTER STATEMENT 11X17 Envelopes COM10 COM9 MONARCH DL C5 B5 OTHERENVELOPE LETTER A4 Country specific Table 3 3 Common Variables for Both Printer Languages
305. n Xoff for Xon Xoff protocol Click OK Close all screens now that the port is set up Interfaces Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 2000 In your Windows 2000 application On the Menu bar click Start Click Settings Click Control Panel The Control Panel screen appears Double click the System icon The System Properties screen appears Select the Hardware tab oa W N In the Device Manager area of the Hardware tab screen click the Device Manager button The Device Manager screen appears Scroll down to Ports and click the once to expand the list of available Ports Select the communications port you want to configure and double click The Communications Port Properties screen for this specific port displays For example if you select the COM1 port then the Communications Port COM1 Properties screen displays 9 Click the Port Settings tab 10 Fill out the fields for the following printer settings to make them match your printer settings Bits per second Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow Control Note For Flow Control select Hardware if you want DTR protocol or Xon Xoff for Xon Xoff protocol 11 Click OK 12 Close all windows now that the port is set up Interfaces Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows XP In your Windows XP application 1 Onthe Menu bar click Start 2 Click Control Panel The Control Panel screen appears 3 Switch the
306. n This is defined as the number of bytes from the start of the file The next read operation starts at the new file position This operator is in systemdict Errors ioerror stackunderflow typecheck undefinedfilename Note An undefinedfilename error occurs if the file does not exist sethardwareiomode integer sethardwareiomode is parsed and discarded In addition one integer is removed from the stack It supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019 4029 and 4039 Errors invalidaccess stackunderflow typecheck setidlefonts mark setildefonts supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019 4029 and 4039 It is parsed and pulls items from the stack until a mark is reached Error unmatchedmark setignoresize See page 4 3 PostScript setjobtimeout integer setjobti meout changes the value of the JobTimeout user parameter for the next page through the end of the print job Valid integers are 0 disabled 15 65355 seconds The value returns to the JobTimeout system parameter setting at the end of the print job This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence lt lt JobTimeout integer gt gt setuserparams Errors rangecheck stackunderflow typecheck setmanualduplexmode int setmanual dupl exmode changes the current job s setting of manualduplexmode Valid int values are 0 no manual duplexing 1 printing the first sides
307. n 9 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 Bin 10 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name LOVERFLOWTIMER Overflow Timer 0 to 255 0 DEFAULT only A value of 0 zero indicates Overflow Timer is set to Disabled If Overflow Timer is set to Disabled a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Overflow Timer setting returns zero If Overflow Timer is set to a numeric value a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Overflow Timer setting returns that value LPAGECOUNT Page Count 0 to 999999 0 READ only LPAGEMODE Print Area NORMAL WHOLEPAGE FULLPAGE NORMAL LPAPERSOURCE Default paper TRAY1 TRAY2 TRAY3 TRAY4 TRAY5 FEEDER TRAY1 TRAY2 source MPFEEDER MANUALPAPER MANUALENVELOPE Note If any optional source is specified but it is not installed the default paper source is not changed See Table B 2 Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages on page B 4 for the default value of your printer Model specific Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Variable Function Selections Factory Default LPICTUREGRADE PictureGrade ON OFF ON LPLAINLENGTH Plain Paper NORMAL SHORT NORMAL DEFAULT only Length LPLAINOUTBIN Assign UPPER LOWER DISABLED OPTIONALOUTBIN1 UPPER DEFAULT only Type Bin Plain OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBINS DISABLED Paper OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBINS OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBINQ OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name
308. nal output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on letterhead paper A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type Bin Letterhead setting returns Assign Type Bin DINQUIRE or Letterhead setting INQUIRE value Standard Bin UPPER Bin 1 OPTIONALOUTBIN1 Bin 2 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 Bin 3 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 Bin 4 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 Bin 5 OPTIONALOUTBINS Bin 6 OPTIONALOUTBING Bin 7 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 Bin 8 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 Bin 9 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 Bin 10 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name LLETTERHEADTEXTURE Letterhead SMOOTH NORMAL ROUGH NORMAL DEFAULT only LLETTERHEADWEIGHT Letterhead LIGHT NORMAL HEAVY NORMAL DEFAULT only Weight LMANUALCOLORRGBTEXT Manual Color OFF VIVID SRGBVIVID SRGBDISPLAY SRGBVIVID RGB Text LMANUALCOLORRGB Manual Color OFF VIVID SRGBVIVID SRGBDISPLAY SRGBVIVID GRAPHICS RGB Graphics LMANUALCOLORRGB Manual Color OFF VIVID SRGBVIVID SRGBDISPLAY SRGBDISPLAY IMAGE RGB Image LMANUALCOLORCMYK Manual Color OFF VIVID VIVIDCMYK USCMYK EUROCMYK USCMYK US TEXT CMYK Text EUROCMYK non US LMANUALCOLORCMYK Manual Color OFF VIVID VIVIDCMYK USCMYK EUROCMYK USCMYK US GRAPHICS CMYK EUROCMYK Graphics non US Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Function Selections Factory Default LMANUALCOLORCMYK Manual Color OFF VIVID VIVIDCMYK
309. nction Result ESC ostG Gray Scale Fills 0 1 2 3 10 11 20 21 35 36 55 56 80 81 99 100 ouahwh White default 2 Gray 10 Gray 15 Gray 30 Gray 45 Gray 70 Gray 90 Gray 100 Gray Black Cross Hatch Fills Horizontal Line Vertical Line Diagonal Line Diagonal Line Square Grid Diagonal Grid User Defined Patterns User Defined Pattern ID Area Fill ID Selects the pattern used to fill the rectangular area Note This command is also used to set the user defined pattern ID 0 1 2 3 4 5 9 Black Fill Default White Fill Gray Fill Pre Defined Cross Hatch Pattern Fill User Defined Pattern Current Pattern Fill True gray Level Fill Fill Rectangular Area Fills a rectangular area defined by Horizontal and Vertical Rectangle Sizes with the selected pattern Table 2 22 Raster Graphics Command Parameters Function Result Number of Input Pixels Raster Resolution 75 75 dpi Note 200 dpi is only supported when the printer is operating in 100 100 dpi 600 dpi or 1200 dpi mode 150 150 api 200 200 dpi 300 300 dpi 600 600 dpi 1200 1200 dpi ESC rgF Raster Graphics Presentation 0 Rotate with print Sets the Raster Image Orientation in relation to the logical page 3 Fixed Default ESC rgS Raster Width Source Sets the width of the clip window for raster graphics ESC r T Number of Raster Lines
310. ng is requested between the front side and back side of a sheet a blank back side is printed and information for the back side is printed on the front side of the next sheet For printers that do not support duplexing this value is always to f al se PostScript setenginesync boolean setenginesync changes the setting that indicates whether the printer waits for the last page of a job to print before returning a Ctrl D to the host computer The boolean values indicate true printer waits for the last page of the job to print false printer does not wait for the last page of the job to print Errors invalidaccess stackunderflow typecheck setethernetaddress string setethernetaddress sets the EthernetAddress parameter in the EtherTalk communication parameter set The EthernetAddress parameter is the Ethernet address of the Ethernet internal print server also called an internal network adapter or INA The string value can be any string up to 17 characters Errors stackunderflow typecheck setfilenameextend boolean setfilenameextend sets whether the extension should be automatically added to any filename true adds the extension false does not add the extension The default setting is t rue See Filename Extensions on page 6 10 Errors stackunderflow typecheck PostScript setfileposition file position setfileposition moves the read pointer in an open file to the new specified file positio
311. ng is truncated to 24 characters Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on labels A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type Bin Labels setting returns Assign Type Bin DINQUIRE or Labels setting INQUIRE value Standard Bin UPPER Bin 1 OPTIONALOUTBIN1 Bin 2 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 Bin 3 OPTIONALOUTBINS3 Bin 4 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 Bin 5 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 Bin 6 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 Bin 7 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 Bin 8 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 Bin 9 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 Bin 10 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name LLABELSTEXTURE Labels Texture SMOOTH NORMAL ROUGH NORMAL DEFAULT only LLABELSWEIGHT Labels Weight LIGHT NORMAL HEAVY NORMAL DEFAULT only LLASTTRAYRENUMBER Last Tray OFF TRAY1 TRAY2 TRAY3 TRAY4 TRAY5 OFF Renumber MPFEEDER LLEFTMARGINOFFSET Left Margin 128 to 127 0 Offset LLETTERHEADLENGTH Letterhead NORMAL SHORT NORMAL DEFAULT only Length LLETTERHEADLOADING Letterhead OFF DUPLEX OFF DEFAULT only Paper Loading Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Function Selections Factory Default LLETTERHEADOUTBIN Assign UPPER LOWER DISABLED OPTIONALOUTBIN1 UPPER DEFAULT only Type Bin OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBINS DISABLED y Letterhead OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBINS5 Model specific OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBINQ OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optio
312. ng of the Jam Recovery menu item The changes are not effective until the end of the print job The bool ean values indicate true reprint jammed page Jam Recovery is set to On false do not reprint jammed page Jam Recovery is set to Off or Auto model dependent This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence Go into exitserver or startjob context lt lt ExitJamRecovery boolean gt gt setpagedevice Errors invalidaccess stackunderflow typecheck setdoprinterrors boolean setdoprinterrors sets the system parameter DoPrintErrors to the value of bool ean It also indicates the current value of the Print PS Error printer setting The DoPrintErrors system parameter must be present for the setdoprinterrors operator to be present The bool ean values indicate true Print PS Error is set to On false Print PS Error is set to Off Errors invalidaccess stackunderflow typecheck PostScript setdoret integer setdoret changes the PQET setting for the next page through the end of the print job The integer values allowed are turn PQET Off turn PQET On turn PQET On turn POET On turn POET On The value you select for POET returns to the user default setting when the print job is finished Lr c This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence PostRenderingEnhanceDetails lt lt REValue integer gt gt gt
313. nkC LexLinkD C96 0 EthernetPhysicalA EthernetPhysicalB EthernetPhysicalC EthernetPhysicalD TokenRingPhysicalA TokenRingPhysicalB TokenRingPhysicalC TokenRingPhysicalD 14 Table 6 Device Parameters Supported Printer Model X Not Supported Page numbers reference parameter descriptions T640 T642 T644 Key Device Parameters for the Communication Device Parallel ParallelA 9eParallelB96 ParallelC ParallelD DelayedOutputClose 4 72 4 Enabled 4 72 V Filtering 4 72 Handshake 4 72 HasNames 4 72 V Interpreter 4 72 V On 4 72 V OutputDevice 4 72 PCLSmartSwitch 4 72 PortLocation 4 72 PSSmartSwitch 4 73 V Type 4 73 Device Parameters for the Communication Device Serial SerialA SerialB SerialC SerialD Baud 4 73 CheckParity 4 73 DataBits 4 73 V DelayedOut
314. ns 4 Supported X Not Supported Printer Tray Operators Tray Selected Corresponding image size Operator is set 110x220envelopetray tray with 110 x 220 size envelopes dlenvelopetray tray with 110 x 220 size envelopes 162x229envelopetray tray with 162 x 229 size envelopes c5envelopetray tray with 162 x 229 size envelopes 176x250envelopetray tray with 176 x 250 size envelopes b5envelopetray tray with 176 x 250 size envelopes 3 875x7 5envelopetray tray with 3 875 x 7 5 size envelopes monarcenvelopetray tray with 3 875 x 7 5 size envelopes 3 875x8 875envelopetray tray with 3 875 x 8 875 size envelopes 4 125x9 5envelopetray tray with 4 125 x 9 5 size envelopes com10envelopetray tray with 4 125 x 9 5 size envelopes otherenvelopetray tray with other size envelopes PostScript Supplemental Operator Summary To determine which operators your printer supports see Table C 1 on page C 1 appletalktype appletalktype string in statusdict this string reflects the current value of the LocalTalkType device parameter from the LocalTalk device The defaultstring is LaserWriter To change the type portion appletalktype of the AppleTalk network name and redefine the string execute the following appletalktype string def When you redefine a string inside the normal server loop it is reset to the defau
315. nt print job Tagged Binary mode is immediately exited at the end of the print job Note Status queries cannot be received while the printer is in an error state PostScript Status Messages Your printer responds to a Ctrl T x 14 status query an interface by sending one line status message back to the host computer over the same interface If the status query is received between print jobs and the printer is idle with no error conditions an idle response is returned to the host computer Status messages bracketed by the characters and so the computer software can extract them from other data generated by the current print job They follow a standard syntax consisting of one or more key value pairs separated by semicolons For example job Project Report status busy source Parallel The following table lists the possible keys and value descriptions To determine which status message keys your printer supports see Table C 7 on page C 23 Table 4 12 Status Message Keys and Value Descriptions Key Value Description job The name of the print job as stored in the JobName entry in statusdict This field is omitted if the current print job has no defined JobName status Printer activity at the time the message is sent Idle No job in progress Busy Executing a PostScript emulation program and or printing pages Waiting I O wait in mid job Initializing During startup Not ready Printer
316. nt selection parameters in the forward and backward compatibility modes and nine of the fonts work only in the forward compatibility mode With the appropriate printer driver installed and selected your software program selects these fonts The following table shows the font selection commands for forward and backward compatibility modes and indicates the font group for each font All Type 1 fonts are supported by both the Hewlett Packard Company s LaserJet 4050 and the Lexmark family of printers unless otherwise noted Table 2 3 Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands Forward Compatibility Mode Backward Compatibility Mode Type 1 Font name Spacing Style Weight Typeface Spacing Siyle Weight Typeface Helvetica 0 1 0 0 61444 Helvetica Italic 0 1 1 0 61444 Helvetica Bold 3 1 0 3 61444 Helvetica Bold Italic 3 1 1 3 61444 Helvetica Narrow 0 1 4 0 61444 Helvetica Narrow Italic 0 1 5 0 61444 Helvetica Narrow Bold 3 1 4 3 61444 Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic 3 1 5 3 61444 Palatino Roman 0 1 0 0 61455 Palatino Italic 0 1 1 0 61455 Palatino Bold 3 1 0 3 61455 Palatino Bold Italic 3 1 1 3 61455 ITC Bookman Light 1 0 3 61487 ITC Bookman Light Italic 1 1 3 61487 ITC Bookman Demi 1 0 2 61487 ITC Bookman Demi Italic 1 1 2 61487 ITC Avant Garde Book 1 0 0 61471 ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique 1 1 0 61471 ITC Avant Garde Demi 1 0 3 61471 ITC Avant Gard
317. nted paper A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type Bin Preprinted Paper setting returns Assign Type Bin DINQUIRE or Preprinted paper INQUIRE value setting Standard Bin UPPER Bin 1 OPTIONALOUTBIN1 Bin 2 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 Bin 3 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 Bin 4 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 Bin 5 OPTIONALOUTBINS Bin 6 OPTIONALOUTBING Bin 7 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 Bin 8 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 Bin 9 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 Bin 10 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name LPREPRINTEDTEXTURE Preprinted SMOOTH NORMAL ROUGH NORMAL DEFAULT only Paper Texture LPREPRINTEDWEIGHT Preprinted LIGHT NORMAL HEAVY NORMAL DEFAULT only Paper Weight LPRINTBUFFER Print Buffer ON OFF ON coniro If ON is selected Print Buffer displays with the Waiting message If OFF is selected Print Buffer does not display with the Waiting message LPRINTHEADIDLETIME Printhead Idle 0 to 15 seconds 0 SET only LPRINTERUSAGE Printer Usage MAXSPEED MAXYIELD MAXSPEED MAXYIELD Model specific LPRINTMENUSBUTTON DEFAULT only Disable Print Menus from front panel ON OFF ON Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Variable Function Selections Factory Default LPRINTQUALITY Print Quality QUICKPRINT NORMAL PRESENTATION NORMAL Mode GRAPHICS IMAGES 1200IMAGEQ INKSAVER NORMAL BEST LPUNCH Hole Punch ON OFF OFF LREAROUTBINNAME Rear Output Bin name REAROUTBIN name is a variable that allows
318. nter commands and operators and interfaces refer to the following documentation Hewlett Packard DeskJet Printer Family Technical Reference C2121 90101 Hewlett Packard LaserJet 4 Typography and Graphics Random House Electronic Publishing Hewlett Packard PCL 5 Color Technical Reference Manual 5961 0635 Hewlett Packard PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference Manual 5961 0509 Hewlett Packard PostScript SIMM Technical Reference I O Device Operators and Parameters C2080 90921 Hewlett Packard Printer Job Language Technical Reference Manual 5961H0512 Personal System 2 Hardware Interface Technical Reference S68X 2330 Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Communications Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange Electronic Industries Association publications EIA RS 232C and EIA TIA 232 E Network Printing Alliance Protocol A Printer Host Control Specification Developed by the NPA Level 1 Revision N PostScript Language Reference Manual Third Edition Adobe Systems Incorporated Addison Wesley Publishing CHAPTER 2 PCL Emulation When you select PCL emulation as the printer language the printer supports the Hewlett Packard Company s LaserJet Printer Command Language This chapter shows how to select PCL emulation and discusses PCL emulation commands along with resident PCL emulation font and symbol set support To determine which commands your printer supports see A
319. ntial Print capability is available When HOLD is set to On HOLDKEY is set to and HOLDTYPE is set to Public Repeat Print capability is available When HOLD is set to Store HOLDKEY is set to and HOLDTYPE is set to Public Reserve Print capability is available When HOLD is set to Proof HOLDKEY is set to and HOLDTYPE is set to Public Verify Print capability is available Print and Hold capabilities are not available with any other possible combination of HOLD HOLDKEY and HOLDTYPE settings IMAGEADAPT Resolution ON OFF ON DEFAULT only INTRAY2 Tray lock Tray 2 UNLOCKED LOCKED UNLOCKED INTRAY3 Tray lock Tray UNLOCKED LOCKED UNLOCKED INTRAY4 Tray lock Tray 4 UNLOCKED LOCKED UNLOCKED INTRAY5 Tray lock Tray 5 UNLOCKED LOCKED UNLOCKED INTRAY1SIZE Tray 1 installed A3 A4 5 B4 B5PAPER JISB4 LETTER A4 SET only size default JISB5 CUSTOM EXECUTIVE FOLIO LEDGER Country specific y formatting size LEGAL LETTER 11X17 10 9 MONARCH DL C5 B5 OTHERENVELOPE STATEMENT INTRAY2SIZE Tray 2 installed A3 A4 5 B4 B5PAPER JISB4 LETTER A4 SET only size default JISB5 CUSTOM EXECUTIVE FOLIO LEDGER Country specific y formatting size LEGAL LETTER 11X17 STATEMENT INTRAY3SIZE Tray 3 installed A3 4 5 B4 BAPAPER B5PAPER JISB4 LETTER A4 SET only size default JISB5 CUSTOM EXECUTIVE FOLIO LEDGE
320. nting False An end of file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the interpreter whether or not that job has finished printing This value is set independently for each port Enabled boolean Read only Supported values are True False Filtering name Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed Supported values are InterpreterBased None Note Setting this variable changes the value of the corresponding PrintServer device HasNames boolean Read only Always returns False Interpreter name Read only Supported values are PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data Supported values are True Data is sent and processed False Data is lost PortLocation string Read only Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set Supported values are Standard Port Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2 Option Slot 3 Type name Read only Always returns the value of Communications PostScript Table 4 11 PostScript Emulation Device Parameters Continued Key Definition Device Parameters for the Communication Device PrintServer PrintServerA PrintServerB PrintServerC PrintServerD PrintServer_NV and PrintServer_Pending contain the same parameters DelayedOutputClose boolean Sele
321. ntion Required 3 78 4258w Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 78 4259wy x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 78 4260w x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 78 4260x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 78 4261w x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 78 4261x Intervention Required 3 78 4272 Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 78 4271 Paper Jam w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover The door or cover needs to be opened X represents the number of jammed pages in the printer y represents the tray number Z represents the bin number PJL Support Table B 13 PJL Messages for Paper Jams Continued y Supported Printer Model X Not Supported es Page numbers reference message descriptions s So Status Code Intervention Required 3 78 4272 x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 78 4273 x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 78 4280w Intervention Required 3 78 4280x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 79 4281w x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 79 4281 x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 79 4282w Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 79 4282x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 79 4283w Intervention Required 3 79 4283x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 79 4284w x Paper Jam Intervention Required
322. ny integer or string of 32 or fewer non null characters An integer is converted to a string UseOldcopypage boolean True indicates the copypage command is processed as defined in PostScript Level 2 description False indicates the copypage command is processed as defined in PostScript 3 description UseOldFonts boolean True redefines the following PostScript resident fonts to match the character designs and metrics defined in PostScript Level 2 The font names in parentheses are the equivalent PostScript 3 font names for the associated PostScript Level 2 names Antique Olive Antique Olive Roman Antique Olive Bold Antique Olive Italic Letter Gothic Letter Gothic Bold Letter Gothic Italic Letter Gothic Slanted Marigold Univers Bold False restores the font compatibility to PostScript 3 ValidNV boolean Read only Indicates if non volatile memory is currently used to store persistent parameters If this memory is found defective during system initialization factory defaults are used If further testing reveals this memory is defective it is not used and ValidNV is False Otherwise ValidNV is True WaitTimeout integer The value in seconds to which the user parameter WaitTimeout is initialized at the beginning of each print job Negative values are ignored and the previous setting is used A value of zero indicates an infinite timeout If you select a number between 1 and 14 15 is set Legal values x 0 1
323. o the default values For example after the printer receives a command that selects a right margin beginning at column 63 the right margin of each printed page begins at column 63 That margin stays constant until a right margin command with a different value resets it or until the printer is reset Parameters for each command are listed in the command tables beginning on page 2 34 Use the Symbol Set Tables to determine the decimal or hexadecimal value for each parameter To determine a decimal or hex value first locate the value of the parameter you require in the Symbol Set Table The decimal value is the value shown in the bottom of the cell or box with that parameter To find a hex value go straight up the grid from the desired parameter and read the value in the top heading This is the first character of the hex value Next go straight across the grid to the left of the parameter and read the value in the left column heading This is the second character of the hex value For example ESC c is coded 1B in Hex and 27 in decimal Any one of the three values lt 1B or 27 might be used in your application Read your documentation to determine which to use The example on the following page sets the pitch of the primary font to 16 66 characters per inch Example ESC 516 66H e Decimal 27 40 115 49 54 46 54 54 72 e Hex 1B 28 73 31 36 2E 36 36 48 Use the plus symbol or the minus symbol to select a position relative to the
324. ob until the page specified by this parameter is reached Thefirst page range is from 1 to 2 147 483 647 Omission of the START parameter causes the printer to start printing with page 1 of the job END last page Use the END parameter in conjunction with the START parameter to skip the printing of a particular portion of the job The emulator discards all pages of a job after the last page has been printed The specification of last page is relative to page 1 of the print job and its range is from 1 to 2 147 483 647 Omission of the END parameter causes the printer to print all pages to the end of the job PASSWORD number A system administrator can control which jobs and therefore which users are allowed to modify the printer default or NVRAM variables by declaring a PJL password With a PJL password declared the PASSWORD parameter with the correct PASSWORD number must be specified in order to modify the default printer environment A PJL JOB command with the correct PASSWORD must be issued before any PJL command can modify an NVRAM setting The PJL EOJ command terminates the job and disables any further modification of NVRAM If a PUL password is declared and the wrong PASSWORD number is specified on the PJL JOB command the printer will delay one half of a second before processing the next command For detailed information on PJL password protection see File and Device Protection Commands on page 3 93 Note Setting a def
325. off deficient memory Intervention required 30026 55 Insufficient Fax Buffer FALSE insufficient fax buffer Intervention required 30027 54 Std Par ENA Connection Lost FALSE standard parallel ENA connection lost Intervention required standard parallel port 30027 56 Std Parallel Port Disabled FALSE disabled Intervention required resolution reduced 30029 36 Resolution Reduced FALSE Intervention required 30031 Print Jobs on Disk or FALSE print jobs on disk request Print Jobs on Disk Go Stop Intervention required 30031 Restore Held Jobs Go Stop FALSE printer powered off disk installed with Print and Hold jobs on the disk Intervention required 30034 34 Short Paper FALSE short paper Intervention required 30035 52 Flash Full FALSE flash full Intervention required 30035 62 Disk Full FALSE disk full Intervention required 30036 51 Defective Flash FALSE defective flash Intervention required 30036 53 Unformatted Flash FALSE unformatted flash Intervention required 30036 61 Defective Disk FALSE defective disk Intervention required 30036 63 Unformatted Disk FALSE unformatted disk Note The Display String is returned in the current language A display string longer than one line shows only the first line of the message Table 3 13 PJL Messages for Auto Continuable Conditions Continued Status Printer State Code Display String Online Status Interventi
326. ol to Standard This causes the printer to operate in IEEE compliant compatibility mode The following illustration shows the typical timing sequence DATA 1 8 E nile STROBE pla T7 T10 rel T2 T3 n gt Mb ACK T8 T8 19 4 gt 4 79 BUSY Interfaces Table 8 2 shows all protocol timings in nanoseconds Table 8 2 Fastbytes Timing Sequence Time Minimum Maximum T1 Data setup to STROBE low 400 min T2 STROBE low to ACKNLG low 0 ACKNLG low to STROBE high 0 T4 STROBE high to ACKNLG high 0 T5 ACKNLG high and BUSY low to STROBE low 0 T6 ACKNLG low to change data 50 min T7 STROBE Timeout 500 min Max based on Auto Strobe Timer T8 ACKNLG width 400 min Equal to Data Setup Time T9 ACKNLG to BUSY Skew 20 max T10 STROBE high time 400 min Equal to Data Setup Time Printer to Computer Communication Advanced Status The printer has a standard IEEE 1284 B compliant connector and is an IEEE 1284 1 compliant device The optional RS 232C Serial Parallel 1284 C Interface Card has an IEEE 1284 C compliant connector and is an IEEE 1284 1 compliant device Your printer could be considered an IEEE 1284 1 compliant device if the C to B style connector converter were used The printer exceeds the maximum all
327. on 4 51 x ImageBrightness 4 51 x ImageContrast 4 51 x PrintQuality 4 51 x Duplex 4 51 EndPage 4 51 ExitJamRecovery 4 51 V HWResolution 4 51 V ImagingBBox 4 52 V InputAttributes 4 52 0 Tray 1 4 52 1 2 4 52 V 2 Envelope Feeder 4 52 V 3 Tray 3 4 52 4 Multipurpose Feeder 4 52 4 5 Tray 4 4 52 y e 6 Tray 5 4 52 4 PageSize 4 52 4 C 6 517 Table C 2 Page Device Parameters Continued 4 Supported Printer Model X Not Supported Page numbers reference parameter descriptions Default values are listed 3 Q Key 4 52 4 MediaColor 4 52 MediaType 4 52 V MediaWeight 4 52 InputLocation 4 52 P4 Mode 4 53 Priority 4 53 Install 4 53 Jog 4 53 x ManualFeed 4 54 P4 ManualFeedTimeout 4 54 V MediaColor 4 54 4 MediaPosition 4 54 MediaType 4 54 V MediaWeight 4 54 NumCopies 4 54 4 54 NupDetails 4 55 Rows 4 55 Columns 4 55 Orientation 4 55 Border 4 56 Order 4 56 Type 4 56 LandscapeOverride 4 56 OutputAttributes 4 57 4 0 Standard Bin 4 57 1 Optional Bin 1 4 57 V 2 Optional Bin 2 4 57 V C 7 58 Table C 2 Page Device Parameters Continued 4 Su
328. on of Nup pages to position the pages correctly on a hostpage However during the translation process many landscape pages are created in portrait orientation by using the PageSize parameter Then the page is rotated to create the appearance of landscape orientation When this happens the PostScript emulation interpreter cannot place the Nup page correctly on the hostpage unless the PageSize parameter is set correctly 4 57 PostScript Table 4 8 Page Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition OutputAttributes dictionary Contains information about the output bin targets There is a numeric key which is a dictionary for each installed output bin OutputType and OutputLocation are the allowable keys in each output dictionary OutputType is used in the search algorithm to determine which output bin is used as the exit path The numeric keys are 0 Standard Output Bin or Top Output Bin 1 Optional Output Bin 1 or Rear Output Bin 2 Optional Output Bin 2 3 Optional Output Bin 3 4 Optional Output Bin 4 5 Optional Output Bin 5 6 X Optional Output Bin 6 7 Optional Output Bin 7 8 Optional Output Bin 8 9 Optional Output Bin 9 10 Optional Output Bin 10 OutputType fields can be assigned strings to specify the output destination For example lt lt OutputAttri butes lt lt 0 lt lt Standard Bin setpagedevice lt lt OutputAttri butes lt lt 1 lt lt Out
329. on required 30075 80 Scheduled Maintenance FALSE scheduled maintenance Intervention required 30076 35 Res Save Off Deficient Memory FALSE resource save off deficient memory Intervention required 30076 37 Insufficient Collation Area FALSE insufficient collation area Intervention required 30107 Empty Hole Punch Box FALSE hole punch box full Intervention required 30107 Empty Box M FALSE hole punch box full Intervention required 30107 Insert Box M FALSE hole punch box missing Intervention required 30107 Insert Staple Cartridge FALSE staple cartridge missing Intervention required 30107 Insert Stapler FALSE insert stapler Intervention required 30107 Priming Failed Retry Go Stop FALSE priming failed Intervention required 30112 54 Network x Software Error FALSE network x software error Intervention required 30112 56 Serial Port x Disabled FALSE serial port x disabled Intervention required 30112 54 Serial Option x Error FALSE serial option x error Intervention required 30112 54 Ser x Fax Connection Lost FALSE serial x fax connection lost Intervention required 30112 56 USB Port x Disabled FALSE USB port disabled Intervention required 30113 54 Par x ENA Connection Lost FALSE parallel x ENA connection lost Intervention required 30113 56 Parallel Port x Disabled FALSE parallel x port disabled Intervention required 32001 Operation Failed Jobs on Disk FALSE disk operation failed jobs on disk Intervention required 32001 Operation Failed
330. ontrol signals and input data Interface conditions are based on TTL levels printer outputs are totem pole TTL devices All printer input output I O are devices with an internal pull up resistor to 5 V Rise and fall times of each signal must be less than 1 500 nanoseconds ns without slope reversal Standard Protocol Data Transfer Sequence The following illustration shows the typical data transfer sequence on the parallel interface See Table 8 1 for typical parallel interface timings on the parallel interface DATA1 8 X BUSY ACK Interfaces Table 8 1 shows all protocol timings in nanoseconds Table 8 1 Typical Parallel Interface Timings Time Minimum Maximum A Data setup to STROBE low 500 min B STROBE width 500 min C Data hold after STROBE 500 min D STROBE low to BUSY high 500 max E ACKNLG low until ACKNLG high 500 min F ACKNLG high to BUSY low G BUSY low and ACKNLG high to STROBE low 500 min Relationship of ACKNLG and BUSY is not consistent Fastbytes Protocol Data Transfer Sequence Your printer is equipped with Fastbytes protocol which is an enhanced parallel interface protocol Fastbytes protocol may give you a faster data transfer time on some personal computers and operating systems Fastbytes protocol is the printer default If you have data transmission problems between your personal computer and the printer change the parallel protoc
331. operator panel or through MarkVision Professional if the device is unformatted Warning When you format flash memory or a disk all information currently stored on the device is lost If flash memory or a disk becomes full while downloading resources a message displays on the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional The file being downloaded is not saved unless room is available to store the entire file Resource Data Collection Download Target Use the Resource Data Collection Download Target mode to save the following information to flash memory or disk Permanent bitmapped and scalable fonts for PCL emulation Permanent macros for PCL emulation macros Permanent symbol sets for PCL emulation Type 1 fonts for PostScript emulation Other PostScript resources Resource Data Collection can be turned On and Off by using The operator panel menus to select Download Target The MarkVision Professional printer utility You can also download resources to flash memory and disk or format the flash memory or disk using this printer utility e APJL command see LDOWNLOADTARGET on page 3 30 and LDOWNLOADTARGET Command on page 3 86 The download target the destination for the resource data collection may be RAM the default flash memory or disk If you store resources fonts macros or symbol sets in RAM the resources can be lost if the printer is reset or if the printer language changes
332. or ImageEnhancement affect Screening in the following way 0 Changes Screening to PictureGrade 1 Changes Screening to IETPictureGrade For more information on Screening see page 4 48 PrintDarkness specifies the value of the Print Darkness printer setting Legal values are 1 Lightest 2 Lighter 3 Normal 4 Darker 5 Darkest PostScript Table 4 8 Page Device Parameters Continued Key Definition DeviceRenderinglInfo dictionary AutoMediaType is a boolean that controls the MediaType entries in the continued InputAttributes dictionary in the pagedevice dictionary True MediaType entries in the InputAttributes dictionaries cannot be modified by the user The values are confined to values known by the printer operating system False MediaType entries in the InputAttributes dictionaries can be modified by the user EdgeToEdge is a boolean which determines if there should be an unprintable area on the page True Print to the edge of the paper False Do not print to the edge of the paper default DefaultPoliciesPageSize is an integer which equals the PageSize parameter in the Policies dictionary unless PageSize is set to 23 in that case DefaultPoliciesPageSize equals the PageSize parameter value before it was set to 23 or equals 0 if the PageSize parameter is initialized to 23 For more information on PageSize see page 4 58 SubstituteSize allows for the substitution of A4 and Letter size prin
333. orizes the file such as 5 macro for PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets See the table beginning on page 3 87 for a complete list of the supported filetypes The filetype is case sensitive 3 97 Unlocking a Protected File or Device for the Current Job The file or device unlocked by the execution of this command is automatically re locked upon execution of the EOJ command or by a printer language change Syntax 1 LDECLARE LRESOURCE device filename filetype LRWLOCKJ password lt CR gt lt LF gt PJL LDECLARE LRESOURCE device filename filetype LWLOCKJ password lt CR gt lt LF gt LRESOURCE device filename filetype Values for device filename filetype are device flash 1 disk ordisk1 case insensitive filename A unique identifier for a file such as the macro ID for a PCL macro the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set the font ID fora PCL font or the actual file name for data Type 1 fonts and demo files as shown on the Directory The fil ename is case sensitive filetype An identifier that categorizes the file such as p5macro for PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets See the table beginning on page 3 87 for a complete list of the supported file types The filetype is case sensitive LRWLOCK password OrLWLOCK password Parameters See Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables on page 3 52 for information about values for LRWLOCK password and LW
334. orted Printer Model X Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions and are listed for supported variables only Default values are listed for exceptions only Variable Name LPUNCH 3 43 x LREAROUTBINNAME 3 43 x LREPEATPRINTLIMIT 3 43 x LRESET 3 43 LRESOURCESAVE 3 43 v LRIGHTMARGINOFFSET 3 43 v LSCREENING 3 43 x LSEPARATORSHEETS 3 43 v LSEPARATORSOURCE 3 43 A LSTANDARDOUTBINNAME 3 44 x LSTAPLE 3 44 x LSTAPLESEMPTYALARM 3 44 x LSTAPLETESTBIN 3 44 x LSTAPLETESTSOURCE 3 44 x LSTROKEWIDTH 3 44 x LSUBSTITUTESIZE 3 44 LTHINCOAT 3 44 x LTOPBINROTATE 3 44 x LTOPMARGINOFFSET 3 44 x LTRANSPARENCYLENGTH 3 44 x LTRANSPARENCYOUTBIN 3 45 x LTRANSPARENCYTEXTURE 3 45 v LTRANSPARENCYWEIGHT 3 45 v LTRAY1SENSEDTYPEPAPER 3 45 x LTRAY1SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY _ 3 45 x LTRAY2SENSEDTYPEPAPER 3 45 x LTRAY2SENSEDTYPETRANSPARENCY _ 3 45 x LTRAYSSENSEDTYPEPAPER 3 46 x PJL Support Table B 2 Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued 4 Supported Printer Model X Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions and are listed for supported variables only Default values are listed for exceptions only E Variable Name LTRAYSSENSEDTYPETRANSPARENC
335. ory and Disk on page 6 1 To determine which devices your printer supports see Table C 5 on page C 12 To determine which device parameters your printer supports see Table C 6 on page C 14 4 72 PostScript Table 4 11 PostScript Emulation Device Parameters Key Type Definition Device Parameters for the Communication Device Parallel ParallelA ParallelB ParallelC ParallelD Parallel NV and Parallel_Pending contain the same parameters DelayedOutputClose boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job Supported values are True An end of file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs finish printing False An end of file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the interpreter whether or not that job has finished printing This value is set independently for each port Enabled boolean Read only Supported values are True False Filtering name Indicates if the input needs further filtering before the data can be correctly processed Supported values are InterpreterBased None Handshake integer Read only Always returns a value of 2 HasNames boolean Read only Always returns False Interpreter name Read only Supported values are PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data Supported values are True Data is sent
336. ostScript Table 4 10 PostScript Emulation System Parameters Continued Key Type Definition MaxSourceList integer Read only See Table C 4 on page C 9 for the default value of your printer MaxUPathCache integer Maximum bytes occupied by the user path cache Legal value Any non negative integer PageCount integer Read only Total number of pages that have been printed PanelCode string Read only Version of the operator panel code PrinterCode string Read only Firmware version of the printer controller card PrinterName string Initialized from the printer name stored in NVRAM the default name of the printer If this parameter is set to a zero length string the PrinterName is set to the value of the product string in statusdict Legal value Any string of 32 or fewer non null characters RamSize integer Read only Total amount of memory in bytes installed in the printer RealFormat string Read only Preferred representation for real numbers in binary encoded tokens Revision integer Read only The current revision level of the machine dependent portion of PostScript emulation SearchBuiltinFontsFirst boolean Controls the device search order the interpreter uses to locate fonts SerialNumber string Read only Serial number of your printer StartJobPassword string Write only Controls the ability of the startjob operator to alter initial Virtual Memory VM Legal valu
337. ot installed an undefinedfilename error occurs This operator may change the search order See Device Search Order on page 6 12 Errors invalidaccess stackunderflow undefinedfilename devstatus devicename devstatus false or devicename devstatus searchable writeable hasnames mounted removable searchorder free size true returns on the stack the status of a specified device This operator is in systemdict A value of f al se is returned if the device is not present If the device is present five boolean values and three integers see the following description followed by a value of true are returned The five boolean values are searchable true if the device is included in the search order and 15 to be searched for the file operators that do not specify a device name Same as the value of the Searchable device parameter from the specified lODevice writeable true if the device can be written to This value is the same as the Writeable device parameter from the specified ODevice hasnames true if the device supports named files This value is the same as the HasNames device parameter from the specified lODevice PostScript mounted true if the device is mounted This value is the same as the Mounted device parameter from the specified lODevice removable true if the device is removable and must be mounted before it is referenced This value is the same as the Removable device parameter from the specified
338. owable circuit capacitance for Level Il interfaces Compliance with IEEE 1284 11 may slow data flow control time slightly however all minimum and maximum criteria set forth in IEEE 1284 documentation will be met The printer supports Compatibility mode Nibble mode Byte mode ECP mode Interfaces The printer also supports a Device ID function When queried for its ID the printer returns the following information Manufacturer Command set Model of printer The LEXPARAL EXE file is available from ftp lexmark com as pub driver technical brief LEXPARAL EXE Use your web browser to access ftp ftp lexmark com pub driver technical_brief LEXPARAL EXE When the Advanced Status menu item is set to On the printer supports IEEE 1284 communication If the attached host computer does not support IEEE 1284 communication you can turn Advanced Status to Off from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional SLCTIN and AUTO FD will be ignored Note Excessive device queries and status checks Nibble and Byte modes will slow printer performance You can get IEEE 1284 documentation by calling 1 800 678 IEEE order number DS02709 Parallel Mode 1 Parallel Mode 1 is a feature available for many Lexmark printers The factory default setting is On or Off depending on your printer model See your printer documentation for the factory default for your printer If the host side of the p
339. own on the Directory The filename is case sensitive filetype An identifier that categorizes the file such as p5macro for PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets See the table beginning on page 3 87 for a complete list of the supported file types Thefiletype is case sensitive LRWLOCK password OrLWLOCK password See Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables on page 3 52 for information about values for LRWLOCK password and LWLOCK password parameters Note This should be the same password that was defined in the DEFAULT command See Password Protection for a File on page 3 93 and Password for an Entire Device on page 3 94 for examples Re Locking a Protected File or Device Use the LDELETEPASSWORD command to re lock a password protected file or device that has been unlocked using the LDECLARE command If an LRESOURCE is not specified all unlocked files or devices are re locked Syntax L LDELETEPASSWORD LRESOURCE device filename filetype CR LRESOURCE device filename filetype Values for device filename filetype are device flash flashl disk ordisk1 case insensitive filename A unique identifier for a file such as the macro ID for a PCL macro the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set the font ID for a PCL font or the actual file name for data Type 1 fonts and demo files as shown on the Directory The filename is case sensitive filetype An identifier that categ
340. ppendix A PCL Support on page A 1 Selecting PCL Emulation Using SmartSwitch When SmartSwitch is enabled for both printer languages on an interface for example Parallel USB Serial Option 1 or Network Option 1 the printer automatically switches to the printer language being sent by your software program The printer is shipped with SmartSwitch enabled for both printer languages in all interfaces The printer examines all print jobs and switches dynamically between PostScript emulation and PCL emulation Using the Operator Panel or MarkVision Professional If SmartSwitch is set to Off for both printer languages you can select PCL emulation from your printer operator panel or from MarkVision Professional See your printer documentation for information on changing menu settings Using Your Software Program To select PCL emulation use the Printer Job Language PJL Enter Language Command See ENTER LANGUAGE Command on page 3 3 for more information See Printer Job Language on page 3 1 for the syntax and use of PJL Warning When you change printer languages you may lose some or all previously downloaded resources unless Resource Save is set to On or the resources are stored in flash memory or on disk Page Formatting The printable areas and logical pages for PCL emulation both portrait and landscape orientation are illustrated below See the Legend that follows for definitions of areas A through I Pr
341. pported Printer Model X Not Supported gi Page numbers reference parameter descriptions Default values are listed 3 Q Key 3 Optional Bin 4 57 V 4 Optional Bin 4 4 57 5 Optional Bin 5 4 57 V 6 Optional Bin 6 4 57 7 Optional Bin 7 4 57 V 8 Optional Bin 8 4 57 V 9 Optional Bin 9 4 57 4 10 Optional Bin 10 4 57 OutputType 4 57 4 OutputLocation 4 57 4 OutputPage 4 57 OutputType 4 57 4 PageDeviceName 4 57 PageSize 4 58 4 Policies 4 58 PolicyNotFound 4 58 PolicyReport 4 58 PageSize 4 58 PostRenderingEnhance 4 58 PostRenderingEnhanceDetails 4 59 V REValue 4 59 Type 4 59 PowerSave 4 59 ProcessColorModel 4 59 X Punch 4 59 x SlipSheet 4 59 x SlipSheetDetails 4 60 V SlipSheetSource 4 60 Type 4 60 C 8 5 Table C 2 Page Device Parameters Continued Supported Printer X Not Supported gi nsn Page numbers reference parameter descriptions Default values are listed e Key Staple 4 60 x TraySwitch 4 60 4 Tumble 4 61 UniversalDetails 4 61 Type 4 61 PageSize 4 61 V Orientation 4 61 Prompt 4 61 4 Table C 3 User Interpreter Parameters 4 Supported X Not Supported d E Page numbers reference parameter descriptions 3 e o Default AccurateScreens 4 62 false Collate
342. pression mode 2 50 connectors 8 1 D device flash memory or disk names PostScript emulation 6 9 search order 6 12 dimensions printer 7 3 directory description 6 4 example 6 4 printing MarkVision Professional 6 3 operator panel 6 3 PJL 3 83 disk description 6 1 directory of contents 6 4 job buffering 6 13 password protection 6 7 performance 6 13 Resource Data Collection mode 6 2 retrieval speed 6 13 storing fonts macros and symbol sets 6 2 viewing the contents 6 3 disk option download target PJL 3 30 drivers ACKNLG Lexmark C510 8 17 ERROR Lexmark C510 8 17 PE Lexmark C510 8 17 SLCT Lexmark C510 8 17 DSR protocol 8 24 DTR protocol 8 23 8 24 DTR DSR protocol 8 23 8 24 E edge to edge printing See whole page setting electrical specifications 7 2 envelope sizes supported 4 9 Lexmark 510 2 4 environmental commands and variables PJL 3 7 environmental conditions 7 4 errors service 3 80 escape commands PCL emulation categorized by function color extensions 2 52 cursor positioning 2 40 font creation 2 45 font selection 2 42 job control 2 34 macros 2 45 miscellaneous commands 2 55 page control 2 36 picture frame 2 55 print model 2 46 raster graphics 2 49 rectangular area fill graphics 2 47 status readback 2 54 user defined pattern 2 47 user defined symbol set 2 44 external network adapter See external print server external print server MarkNet Pro 8 29 MarkNet XLe 8 29 F fastby
343. program 2 2 PostScript emulation 4 1 operator panel 4 1 software program 4 2 Printer Job Language PJL 3 3 setting for different interfaces 5 2 SmartSwitch 5 1 logical page PCL emulation 2 3 2 5 macros printing directory list flash memory or disk 6 3 setting password protection 3 93 storing on flash memory or disk 6 3 MarkNet Pro external print server 8 29 MarkNet S internal print server 8 28 MarkNet XLe external print server 8 29 MarkVision Professional job buffering 6 13 passwords 6 8 Resource Data Collection mode 6 2 viewing contents of flash memory and disk 6 3 media sizes status message codes 3 74 menus printing settings from PJL 3 83 multipurpose feeder paper source PCL emulation 2 36 Printer Job Language PJL 3 39 N network support 8 28 noise emission levels 7 1 nonprintable areas 2 5 notation commands PCL emulation 2 31 Printer Job Language PJL 3 1 operator intervention status messages PJL 3 72 3 75 X 3 output bins status message codes 3 75 P page printable PCL emulation 2 3 paper handling 3 72 paper sizes status message codes 3 74 paper sizes supported Lexmark 510 2 4 paper trays PCL emulation paper size 2 36 paper source 2 36 PostScript emulation automatic size sensing search order 4 4 operators 4 6 Printer Job Language PJL paper size 3 14 paper source 3 39 status message codes 3 74 parallel interface 8 7 connector pin assignments 8 8 signal descriptions 8 15
344. putClose 4 73 Enabled 4 73 V Filtering 4 73 V FlowControl 4 73 V HasNames 4 73 HonorDSR 4 73 V Interpreter 4 74 V On 4 74 V Parity 4 74 15 1 Table C 6 Device Parameters Continued 4 Supported Printer X Not Supported E nsn Page numbers reference parameter descriptions E i LE PCLSmartSwitch 4 74 V ocation 4 74 4 PSSmartSwitch 4 74 RobustXon 4 74 4 SerialMode 4 74 4 StopBits 4 75 V Type 4 75 Device Parameters for the Communication Device 2 Were E ELEGA b Were ES Oy eT BEST A DelayedOutputClose 4 75 4 Enabled 4 75 Filtering 4 75 HasNames 4 75 Interpreter 4 75 V LocalTalkType 4 75 V NodelD 4 75 4 75 4 PCLSmartSwitch 4 76 PortLocation 4 76 V PSSmartSwitch 4 76 V Type 4 76 V Device Parameters for the Communication Device EtherTalk EtherTalkA EtherTalkB EtherTalkC EtherTalkD DelayedOutputClose 4 76 4 Enabled 4 76 V EthernetAddress 4 76 V EtherTalkType 4 76 V EtherTalkZone 4 76 V Filtering 4 77 C 16 59774177 Table 6 Device Parameters Continued 4 Supported Printer Model X Not Supported Page numbers reference parameter descriptions i
345. putType Optional Output Bin 1 Exit setpagedevice For more information see OutputType on page 4 57 OutputLocation key is a read only string that represents the name of the associated destination The OutputAttributes dictionary contains a Priority Array If an OutputType string does not match the priority array is searched in order for a valid output bin The initial value of the priority array is set at the beginning of a job and is equal to the value of the menu item for OutputBin The array can be changed using this setpagedevice operator lt lt OutputAttri butes lt lt Priority 10 gt gt gt gt setpagedevice This command gives the Optional Output Bin 1 1 a higher priority than the Standard Bin 0 Once the command is issued if no match is found for the OutputType string the paper exits into the standard output bin OutputPage boolean Specifies if pages are actually printed Supported values are True Job is processed as usual default False No page is printed but all other job processing occurs OutputType string Specifies the output bin destination for the current page If the destination is not null setpagedevice compares it with the OutputType values in the OutputAttributes dictionary during the search algorithm If a match is found this output bin is the target output for the current page PageDeviceName string name Assigns or names a page device by using a string parameter This is used by the or nu
346. r 1 XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK where CMYK denotes Cyan Magenta Yellow and Black cartridges respectively PJL Support Table B 11 PJL Messages for Attendance Conditions Continued 4 Supported Printer Model X Not Supported rae Page numbers reference message descriptions Status Code Return String Intervention Required 3 68 40021 Close Front Door x Close Front Door Intervention Required 3 68 40021 Close Side Door x Close Side Door Intervention Required 3 68 40021 Close Finisher Door x Close Finisher Door Intervention Required 3 68 40021 Close Finisher Side Door x Close Finisher Side Door Intervention Required 3 68 40021 Close Finisher Top Cover x Close Finisher Top Cover Intervention Required 3 68 40021 Close Door lt d gt Close Door d Intervention Required 3 68 40021 Close Cover c x Close Cover lt c gt Intervention Required 3 68 40021 Close Tray x Top Cover x Close Tray x Top Cover Intervention Required 3 69 40021 Insert Print Cartridge x Insert Print Cartridge Intervention Required 3 69 40022 2xx Paper x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 69 40027 Check Tray lt source gt x Check Tray Connection Connection Intervention Required 3 69 40027 Install Tray x or Cancel Job x Install Tray x or Cancel Job Intervention Required 3 69 40028 Reatta
347. r Languages Continued 4 Supported Printer Model X Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions and are listed for supported variables only Default values are listed for exceptions only Variable LCUSTOMPAPERWIDTH 3 22 LCUSTOMPAPERHEIGHT 3 23 LCUSTOMPAPERFEED 3 23 LCUSTOMTYPE1LENGTH 3 23 x LCUSTOMTYPE1LOADING 3 23 LCUSTOMTYPE1MEDIA 3 23 LCUSTOMTYPE1NAME 3 23 LCUSTOMTYPE10UTBIN 3 24 x LCUSTOMTYPE1TEXTURE 3 24 LCUSTOMTYPE1WEIGHT 3 24 V LCUSTOMTYPE2LENGTH 3 24 x LCUSTOMTYPE2LOADING 3 24 LCUSTOMTYPE2MEDIA 3 24 LCUSTOMTYPE2NAME 3 25 LCUSTOMTYPE2OUTBIN 3 25 x LCUSTOMTYPE2TEXTURE 3 25 LCUSTOMTYPE2WEIGHT 3 25 LCUSTOMTYPESLENGTH 3 25 x LCUSTOMTYPE3LOADING 3 25 x LCUSTOMTYPE3MEDIA 3 26 LCUSTOMTYPE3NAME 3 26 LCUSTOMTYPESOUTBIN 3 26 x LCUSTOMTYPE3TEXTURE 3 26 v LCUSTOMTYPESWEIGHT 3 26 LCUSTOMTYPE4LENGTH 3 26 x LCUSTOMTYPE4LOADING 3 27 x LCUSTOMTYPE4MEDIA 3 27 LCUSTOMTYPE4NAME 3 27 PJL Support Table B 2 Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued 4 Supported Printer Model X Not Supported Page numbers reference variable descriptions and are listed for supported variables only Default values are listed for exceptions only
348. r language and OFF to 212 er disable PPDS printer language After this command is 4 aue processed the printer performs a Power On Reset POR to activate the changes language Note The following printer settings in NVRAM are changed when PPDS is activated PCLand PS SmartSwitch settings for each port are turned off Printer Language is set to PPDS LPPDSFORMLINES Lines Per Page 1 to 255 64 68 DEFAULT only PPDS Country specific LPPDSLINESPERINCH Lines Per Inch 0 25 to 30 00 in increments of 0 25 6 00 DEFAULT only Note If a Lines Per Inch setting outside this range is specified the printer defaults to the closest number in the range LPREPRINTEDLENGTH Preprinted NORMAL SHORT NORMAL DEFAULT only Paper Length LPREPRINTEDLOADING Preprinted OFF DUPLEX OFF DEFAULT only Paper Loading Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Function Selections Factory Default LPREPRINTEDOUTBIN Assign UPPER LOWER DISABLED OPTIONALOUTBIN1 UPPER Type Bin OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBINS DISABLED Preprinted OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBINS Model specific Paper OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBINT OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBINS OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on prepri
349. r some printers you can change the default VMI from the printer 6 6 E Default operator panel or through MarkVision Professional by using the 8 8 Default Lines Per Page menu item See your printer documentation for 12 epa zs h more information 16 16 1 Unsupported values are ignored 24 24 lines inch Use of this command alters any earlier VMI setting 48 48 lines inch ESCg a G Duplex Page Side Selection 0 Next Side Specifies which physical page side to print next when duplex printing E Note When the duplex option is not installed this command causes a ACT DICE conditional page eject ESC8 0 gp Set Page Length Sets the logical page length in number of lines Notes This command is sent at the beginning of a page in a print job and prior to any printable data When the command is sent the current page is closed and printed Unsupported values are ignored ESC amp k W 5 Turn Text Scale Mode OFF 6 Turn Text Scale Mode ON Text Scale Mode Allows 66 lines of text at six lines per inch to print on an effective page length of 10 1 2 inches Notes Unsupported values are ignored The command is ignored when the printer is in landscape mode Table 2 13 Alphanumeric ID Command Parameters Function Result ESC a n W operation string number of data bytes that make up the operation and string Operation operation 100 or 1 byte 0x64 or d ascii
350. reference message descriptions zi P So Status Code Intervention Required 3 76 4203x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 76 4204x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 76 4205x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 76 4206x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 76 4207x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 76 4208x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 76 4209x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 76 4210x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 76 4211x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 76 4220x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 76 4221x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 76 4222x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 76 4230x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 76 4231x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 77 4232x x Paper Jam w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover The door or cover needs to be opened x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer y represents the tray number z represents the bin number B 28 PJL Support Table B 13 PJL Messages for Paper Jams Continued y Supported Printer Model X Not Supported es Page numbers reference message descriptions E P So Status Code Intervention Required 3 77 4233x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 77 4234 x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 77 424yx x Paper Jam In
351. rency NORMAL SHORT NORMAL Length Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Function Selections Factory Default LTRANSPARENCYOUTBIN Assign UPPER LOWER DISABLED OPTIONALOUTBIN1 UPPER DEFAULT only Type Bin OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBINS DISABLED y Transparency OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBINS Model specific OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBINT OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBINS OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on transparencies A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type Bin Transparency setting returns Assign Type Bin DINQUIRE or Transparency setting INQUIRE value Standard Bin UPPER Bin 1 OPTIONALOUTBIN1 Bin 2 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 Bin 3 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 Bin 4 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 Bin 5 OPTIONALOUTBINS Bin 6 OPTIONALOUTBING Bin 7 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 Bin 8 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 Bin 9 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 Bin 10 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name LTRANSPARENCYTEXTURE Transparency SMOOTH NORMAL ROUGH NORMAL DEFAULT only Texture LTRANSPARENCYWEIGHT Transparency LIGHT NORMAL HEAVY NORMAL DEFAULT only Weight LTRAY1SENSEDTYPE Detected Type PLAIN BOND GLOSSY CARDSTOCK LABELS PLAIN PAPER for Paper LETTERHEAD PREPRINTED COLORED Tray 1 CUSTOMTYPE1 CUSTOMTYPE2 CUSTOMTYPE3 CUSTOMTYPE4 CUSTOMT
352. required 4261x 261 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 427zx 27z Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4271 271 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4272 272 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4273 273 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4280x 280 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4280x Clear Staple Job from Finisher FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4280w 280 Paper Jam FALSE w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover The door or cover needs to be opened x represents the number of jammed pages in the printer y represents the tray number Z represents the bin number See your printer documentation for more information on printer messages Table 3 19 PJL Messages for Paper Jams Continued Printer State Status Code Display String 3 79 Online Status paper jam Intervention required 4281w 281 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4281x 281 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4282w 282 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4282x 282 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4283w 283 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4283x 283 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4284w 284 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4284x 284 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Int
353. resource of the Pattern category would be in Resource Pattern LexmarkLogo These parameters are Lexmark specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 2016 2 These parameters are available with the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010 3 These parameters are Lexmark specific and are in addition to the Adobe PostScript Language Supplement 3010 4 68 PostScript Table 4 10 PostScript Emulation System Parameters Continued Key Type Definition InstalledRam integer Read only Indicated in bytes the total amount of installed printer memory RAM in the system Note InstalledRam should not be confused with RamSize which is the amount of memory RAM available to the formatting interpreters and the graphics engine JobTimeout integer The value in seconds to which the user parameter JobTimeout is initialized at the beginning of each print job If you set the system parameter JobTimeout to a negative value it is ignored and the previous setting of JobTimeout is used A value of 0 zero indicates that the timeout is infinite If you set a number between 1 and 14 15 is set Legal values x 0 15 lt x lt 65355 languagelevel integer The value of languagelevel integer in systemdict always matches the value of this system parameter If set to 2 the printer will behave as though UseOldcopypage and UseOldfonts are both true regardless of their actual values The latter two
354. rgin SP 32 20 Space Moves the cursor to the right one column SI 15 Primary Font Selects the primary font SO 14 Secondary Font Selects the secondary font Commands PCL commands are multibyte strings also known as escape sequences that begin with the Escape control code E56 lt decimal 27 or hexadecimal 1B The ESC control code notifies the printer that the characters that follow are to be interpreted as part of a command and are not control codes or data to be printed Command Structure Most PCL emulation commands have the following structure Spaces have been added to this example for readability The command parameter variables are indicated by a number sign 8 Table 2 10 Description of Command Structure Element Description ESG Decimal 27 or hex 1B amp Parameterized character from American National Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII table ranging from 33 to 47 decimal a Group character from ASCII table ranging from 96 to 126 decimal that specifies a group type of control Decimal character string value within specified numeric ranges may be preceded by a or sign and contain a decimal point C Termination character from ASCII table ranging from 64 to 94 decimal Command Parameters A command parameter sets the value for a command This value stays constant until either a different value resets the command or a command resets the printer t
355. ried the quotes are not returned around the string name The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name CUSTOMTYPE4 LCUSTOMTYPEAOUTBIN DEFAULT only Assign Type Bin Custom Type 4 UPPER LOWER DISABLED OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBINS OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBINS OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBINQ OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins The text string is truncated to 24 characters Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on custom type 4 paper A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type Bin Custom Type 4 setting returns DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value Assign Type Bin Custom Type 4 setting Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 name UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN 1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBINS5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 name UPPER DISABLED Model specific LCUSTOMTYPE4TEXTURE DEFAULT only Custom Type 4 Texture SMOOTH NORMAL ROUGH NORMAL LCUSTOMTYPE4WEIGHT DEFAULT only Custom Type 4 Weight LIGHT NORMAL HEAVY NORMAL Table 3 4 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Function Selections Factory Default LCUSTOMT
356. rom the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional See your printer documentation for more information On the printout the typeface number is the last number on the font selection command example line The example line is below the name of the font In the following example the typeface number is underlined RO Courier lt lt ESC gt gt lt lt symset gt gt lt lt ESC gt gt s0p lt lt pitch gt gt h0s0b4099T ESC X primary ESC X secondary Font ID 0 32767 Select Font by Font ID Selects the font by the identification number FSC 3 9 primary ESC 3 secondary Select Default Font Sets all font selection characteristics to the Default Font ESC amp pitX data number of data of bytes to print as text Transparent Print Data Prints the next number of bytes as text ESCad D 0 1 Fixed 2 Fixed double 3 Floating 4 Floating double Select Underline Type Enable Notes Fixed underline is drawn 5 pels below cursor position Floating underline position is determined by all the positions of the characters with descenders in the fonts that are to be underlined Underline thickness is 1 100 inch ESC amp Underline Disable Table 2 15 Font Selection Continued Command Parameters Function Result ESC8 Text Parsing Method 0 1 1 byte characters Communicates to the PCL parser whether character codes are
357. rs for the Communication Device LPR LPR_A LPR_B LPR_C LPR_D Enabled 4 84 4 Filtering 4 84 4 HasNames 4 84 Interpreter 4 84 4 84 V PortLocation 4 84 4 84 7 Device Parameters for the Communication Device LexLink LexLinkA LexLinkB LexLinkC LexLinkD DelayedOutputClose 4 84 4 Enabled 4 84 V HasNames 4 85 Interpreter 4 85 4 85 4 85 4 85 Device Parameters for the Communication Device IP IP_A IP_B IP_C IP_D GatewayAddress 4 85 4 IPAddress 4 85 V IPAddressDynamic 4 85 NetworkMask 4 85 V On 4 85 V Physical 4 85 PortLocation 4 85 V Type 4 85 Table C 6 Device Parameters Continued 4 Supported X Not Supported Page numbers reference parameter descriptions Key Device Parameters for the Communication Device EthernetPhysical EthernetPhysicalA EthernetPhysicalB EthernetPhysicalC EthernetPhysicalD C 20 PostScript Support Printer Model T640 T642 T644 Device Parameters for the Communication Device TokenRingPhysical TokenRingPhysicalA TokenRingPhysicalB TokenRingPhysicalC TokenRingPhysicalD EthernetAddress 4 86 V On 4 86 PortLocation 4 86 4 86 V Device Parameter
358. rted values are True Data is sent and processed False Data is lost 4 76 PostScript Table 4 11 PostScript Emulation Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition PCLSmartSwitch boolean Supported values are True PCL SmartSwitch is On False PCL SmartSwitch is Off For more information see Using SmartSwitch on page 2 1 PortLocation string Read only Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set Supported values are Standard Port Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2 Option Slot 3 PSSmartSwitch boolean Supported values are True PS SmartSwitch is On False PS SmartSwitch is Off For more information see Using SmartSwitch on page 4 1 Type name Read only Always returns the value of Communications Device Parameters for the Communication Device EtherTalk EtherTalkA EtherTalkB EtherTalkC EtherTalkD EtherTalk_NV and EtherTalk_Pending contain the same parameters DelayedOutputClose boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job Supported values are True An end of file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs finish printing False An end of file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the interpreter whether or not that job has finished printing This value is set independently for each port Enabled boolean Read only Supported values are
359. rticipates in searches in the file system operations that specify a filename without specifying a device SearchOrder integer Read only If the Searchable parameter is True indicates the priority assigned to the disk when searching for a file and no device has been specified A lower integer indicates a higher priority If the Searchable parameter is False this value is ignored Type name Read only Always returns the value of FileSystem Writeable boolean Read only Indicates if the files on the disk can be opened for write access If the disk is Device Parameters for the lODevice flash1 write protected this parameter is a constant equal to False When the disk is not mounted this parameter indicates if the drive supports writeable media BlockSize integer Read only Free integer Read only Indicates the amount of free space available in pages on the flash Valid if the flash is mounted mounted is set to True A value of 0 zero indicates that either the flash is not mounted or is full PostScript Table 4 11 PostScript Emulation Device Parameters Continued Key HasNames Type boolean Definition Read only Indicates if the flash parameter is only valid when flash is mounted mounted is set to True If flash is not mounted the parameter has a value of False InitializeAction integer Specifies an action for initializing flash 0 Indicates no
360. s If this parameter is omitted from an LREADFILE command al ocati on of 0 beginning of the file is assumed If it is omitted from a LWRITEFILE command with an accesstype of RW al ocati on of0 is also assumed If a START location is provided but it is greater than the file size the LREADFILE command response will contain no file data Similarly an LWRITEFILE command with anaccesstype of RW functions like an LWRITEFILE command with anaccesstype of AP Note If PostScript emulation is used to create the file on the device it may automatically attach a data extension to the f name See Filename Extensions on page 6 10 for more information For example if myfi l e is downloaded to flash through PostScript emulation the f name on the PJL commands is myfile data LOPENFILE Command Use this command to open a file on a storage device Syntax QPJL LOPENFILE DEVICE filedevice FILENAME fname ACCESS accesstype lt CR gt lt LF gt LCLOSEFILE Command Use this command to close a file on a storage device The command is ignored if the file doesn t exist on the device or if the file is not open Syntax QPJL LCLOSEFILE DEVICE filedevice FILENAME lt CR gt lt LF gt LREADFILE Command Use this command to read data from a file on a storage device Syntax P L LREADFILE DEVICE filedevice FILENAME fname START location LENGTH bytecount CR LF Response S
361. s see Table 3 16 Tray Codes page 3 74 yy represents a size code For more information on size codes see Table 3 17 Media Size Codes on page 3 74 ww represents the bin code For more information on bin codes see Table 3 18 Output Bin Codes on page 3 75 Note The Display String is returned in the current language A display message longer than one line shows only the first line of the message Table 3 12 PJL Information Messages Printer State Status Code Display String Online Status Ready with Replace Transfer 10006 Replace Transfer TRUE Power Saver with Ink Low 10006 88 Ink Low TRUE Power Saver mode with Toner Low 10006 88 Toner Low TRUE Power Saver mode with Replace Toner 10006 Replace Toner TRUE Power Saver mode with Replace PC Kit 10006 Replace PC Kit TRUE Power Saver mode with Replace Fuser 10006 Replace Fuser TRUE Power Saver mode with Replace Transfer 10006 Replace Transfer TRUE Cancelling Job 10007 Cancelling Job TRUE Busy 10023 Busy TRUE Waiting 10024 Waiting TRUE Input Source Empty 11xyy Tray source gt Empty TRUE Input Source Missing 12xyy Tray source gt Missing TRUE Output Bin Full 15wwl Bin bin gt Full TRUE Resolution Reduced 35029 Res Reduced TRUE Power Saver 35078 Powersaver TRUE X represents an input source code For more information on input source codes see Table 3 16 Tray Codes on page 3 74 yy represents a size co
362. s the entire disk is formatted Ifa value of 1 2 or 3 is set as pages ioerror is generated InitializeAction parameter is set to acti on plus 1 Errors invalidaccess ioerror rangecheck stackunderflow typecheck jobname jobname string identifies each print job selection This string in statusdict queries and changes the current setting of the JobName user parameter Originally j obname is set to null To query jobname obname or currentuserparams JobName get A string indicating the job name is returned on the stack To change jobname jobname string def or JobName string setuserparams where string is the new job name Error stackoverflow PostScript jobsource jobsource string indicates the current value of the CurlnputDevice system parameter A string is returned on the stack indicating the job source Valid values are LocalTalk SerialA SerialD ParallelA ParallelB ParallelC ParallelD IR_A C96 D96 USB USB 05 C96 05 0 EtherTalkB EtherTalkC EtherTalkD TokenTalkB TokenTalkC Token TalkD LexLinkB LexLinkC LexLinkD PrintServerB PrintServerC PrintServerD RemotePrinterB RemotePrinterC RemotePrinterD AppSocketB AppSocketC AppSocketD PostScript LPR_B LPR_C LPR_D UnknownDevice This operator is
363. s are used throughout the chapter to illustrate the syntax of each PJL command Table 3 1 PJL Command Notation Character Code Description Decimal Code lt ESC gt Escape Character 0x1B 27 lt LF gt Line Feed Character 10 CR Carriage Return Character 13 FF Form Feed Character 0 0 12 Horizontal Tab 0x09 9 lt UEL gt Universal Exit Language 0 1 25 2D 31 32 33 34 35 58 Notes Parameters enclosed in square brackets are optional and not required for command execution The interpreter requires uppercase for the prefix for all PUL com mands except the Universal Exit Language UEL command The rest of the PUL command is not case sensitive The UEL command is case sensi tive All PUL commands except UEL must be terminated with a line feed char acter lt LF gt Kernel Commands UNIVERSAL EXIT LANGUAGE Command The Universal Exit Language UEL command terminates the current printer language and allows dynamic switching into PJL Syntax lt ESC gt 12345X Notes If the printer receives this command while in PCL emulation it performs a Printer Language Reset before exiting PCL emulation Ifthe printer receives this command while in PostScript emulation it performs an End of Job EOJ command before exiting PostScript emulation Ctrl D The PJL commands must immediately follow the UEL
364. s data flow control protocol the printer sends an XOFF signal when it detects the following BUSY conditions Buffer full Attendance error Printer not in ready state The following diagram illustrates XON XOFF Protocol Timing 1 RTS DTR _ DSR XON XOFF XON ae o de JAO o o 4 ae 5 m 5 RXD Legend 1 TheRTS signal is driven active as long as power is supplied to the printer 2 DTR signal becomes active at the completion of initialization 3 The printer considers data received invalid when DSR is low and discards the data This is conditional depending on the setting of Honor DSR 4 After you power on the printer and DTR is active the printer sends an signal to the computer DC1 control or X 11 However the computer does not need to detect this initial XON before sending data to the printer because the printer can be powered on before the computer or terminal 5 The printer sends an XOFF signal DC3 control or X 13 to request that data transmission end until the buffer clears About 640 free bytes remain in the buffer at this time If the computer continues to send data after the printer sent an XOFF signal data could be lost 6 The printer sends an XON signal to the computer when the buffer space is again available The serial interface is ready to receive more data 8 27 Interfaces Serial Errors The printer places an underscore character in the link buffer when it detects an
365. s for the Parameters Device Calendar CalendarA CalendarB CalendarC CalendarD Address 4 86 V On 4 86 4 PortLocation 4 86 V Speed 4 86 4 86 BSizeStandard 4 86 V Darkness 4 87 PageCount 4 88 4 TimeToStandby 4 88 4 Type 4 88 V Language 4 88 4 88 V Day 4 88 4 Hour 4 88 V Minute 4 88 C 21 597741777 Table 6 Device Parameters Continued 4 Supported Printer Model X Not Supported E nsn Page numbers reference parameter descriptions i LE Month 4 88 Running 4 88 Second 4 88 4 88 4 4 88 DateTime 4 88 V DayOfWeekLong 4 88 DayOfWeekNum 4 88 DayOfWeekShort 4 88 4 C 22 591177 Table C 6 Device Parameters Continued 4 Supported Printer Model X Not Supported E Page numbers reference parameter descriptions 5 Key Page E Device Parameters for the Parameters Device disk1 BlockSize 4 88 V Free 4 88 HasNames 4 88 V InitializeAction 4 89 V LogicalSize 4 89 V Mounted 4 89 V PhysicalSize 4 89 V Removable 4 89 Searchable 4 89 V SearchOrder 4 89 V Type 4 89 V Writeable 4 89 V BlockSize 4 89 4 89 HasNames 4 90 V InitializeAction 4 90 V LogicalSize 4 90 J Mounted 4 90 V PhysicalSize 4 90 V
366. s sent and processed False Data is lost PCLSmartSwitch boolean Supported values are True PCL SmartSwitch is On False PCL SmartSwitch is Off For more information see Using SmartSwitch on page 2 1 PortLocation string Read only Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set Supported values are Standard Port Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2 Option Slot 3 PSSmartSwitch boolean Supported values are True PS SmartSwitch is On False PS SmartSwitch is Off For more information see Using SmartSwitch on page 4 1 Type name Read only Always returns the value of Communications Device Parameters for the Communication Device IR IR_A IR_B IR_C 0 IR_NV and 0 contain the same parameters DelayedOutputClose boolean Selects how the printer manages the port at the end of each print job Supported values are True An end of file message is not sent until the current job and all preceding jobs finish printing False An end of file message is sent as soon as a job finishes executing in the interpreter whether or not that job has finished printing This value is set independently for each port 4 78 PostScript Table 4 11 PostScript Emulation Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition Enabled boolean Read only Supported values are True False Filtering name Indicates if the
367. s set independently for each port Enabled boolean Read only Supported values are True False PostScript Table 4 11 PostScript Emulation Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition HasNames boolean Read only Always returns False Interpreter name Read only Supported values are PostScript AutoSelect PCL PPDS On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data Supported values are True Data is sent and processed False Data is lost PortLocation string Read only Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set Supported values are Standard Port Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2 Option Slot 3 Type name Read only Always returns the value of Communications Device Parameters for the Parameters Device IP IP_A IP_B IP_D GatewayAddress string Read only IPAddress string Read only IPAddressDynamic boolean Read only Supported values are True False NetworkMask string Read only On boolean Designates if the communication channel is On and able to receive and send data Supported values are True Data is sent and processed False Data is lost Physical string Read only PortLocation string Read only Designates the physical location of the port related to the parameter set Supported values are Standard Port Option Slot 1 Option
368. s specified by a SET or DEFAULT command the value is changed to 999 REPRINT Jam Recovery ON OFF AUTO AUTO RESOLUTION Print Resolution 300 600 1200 600 RESOURCESAVE Resource Save ON OFF AUTO OFF AUTO DEFAULT only ON indicates Resource Save is set On Model specific OFF and AUTO indicate Resource Save is set to Off See Table B 1 Common Variables for Both Printer Languages on page B 1 for the default value of your printer RET Print Quality OFF DARK MEDIUM LIGHT ON ON If this value is set through PJL the same value is PQET returned on a PJL inquiry DARK MEDIUM LIGHT and ON values indicate that PQET is On OFF indicates PQET is Off TIMEOUT Print timeout 0 to 255 90 in seconds The time the printer remains idle before the job is forced to print Note If a value greater than 255 is specified by a SET or DEFAULT command the value is changed to 255 Table 3 3 Common Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Function Selections Factory Default USERNAME Print and Hold username NULL SET only username is a text string truncated to 24 characters No username Note A null string is an acceptable value and indicates no Print and Hold Username is specified WIDEA4 A4 width NO YES NO NO indicates the A4 width is 198 mm YES indicates the A4 width is 203 mm Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages
369. sk Format 3 66 80 Belt Exhausted 3 66 80 Belt Life Warning 3 66 80 Fuser Exhausted 3 66 80 Fuser Life Warning 3 66 80 Fuser Maintenance 3 66 80 Fuser Belt Exhausted 3 66 80 Fuser Belt Life Warning 3 66 80 Scheduled Maintenance 3 65 3 66 81 Scheduled Maintenance 3 66 83 ITU Maintenance 3 66 Disk Corrupted Reformat 3 66 X 9 Empty Box M 3 65 Held Jobs May Not Be Restored 3 63 Insert Box M 3 65 Insert Staple Cartridge 3 65 Insert Stapler 3 65 Operation Failed Faxes on Disk 3 65 Operation Failed Jobs on Disk 3 65 Priming Failed Retry Go Stop 3 65 Print Jobs on Disk Go Stop 3 64 Print Jobs on Disk 3 64 Restore Held Jobs Go Stop 3 64 command categories device attendance 3 80 file and device protection 3 93 file commands for flash and disk 3 86 job separation commands 3 4 kernel commands 3 2 miscellaneous 3 82 status readback 3 53 3 54 command syntax command codes 3 1 optional parameters 3 2 commands COMMENT 3 3 DEFAULT 3 8 3 94 DINQUIRE 3 54 ECHO 3 55 ENTER LANGUAGE 3 3 EOJ 3 6 INFO 3 56 INITIALIZE 3 11 INQUIRE 3 58 JOB 3 4 LBEEP 3 82 LBYPASSPASSWORD 3 97 LCLOSEFILE 3 89 LDECLARE 3 95 3 97 LDELETEFILE 3 92 LDELETEPASSWORD 3 96 LDOWNLOADTARGET 3 86 LESCAPECHAR 3 83 LFAX PHONENUMBER 3 85 LFORMAT 3 92 LOPENFILE 3 89 LPORTROTATE 3 82 LPRINTDIRECTORY 3 83 6 4 LPRINTMENUS 3 83 LPRINTPSFONTS 3 83 LPRINTTESTPAGE 3 83 LREADFILE 3 90 LRENAMEFILE 3 92 LRUNFILE 3 91
370. ssion Mode on page 2 60 and Group 3 and Group 4 Raster Compression on page 2 65 ESC pstWI data Number of Data Bytes Transfer Raster Data by Row Block Transfers RIG data Note After each command the cursor position is moved to the beginning of the next raster row ESC rB End Raster Graphics Version B Signals the end of the raster graphics transfer If a Raster Height is specified the cursor is moved to the first raster row past the Raster Height ESC rC End Raster Graphics Version C Same as Version B but Resets the compression mode to uncoded Setsthe left graphics margin to 0 Raster Width Destination Sets the width of the destination raster Table 2 22 Raster Graphics Continued Command Parameters Function Result Raster Height Destination Sets the height of the destination raster ESC gatW data Set Raster Configuration Sets the configuration of the destination raster it 8 K only or 26 KCMY Data Byte 0 0x02 constant Byte 1 number of colors 0x01 K only 0x04 CMYK Byte 2 3 X res for K plane 0x012C 300 or 0x0258 600 Byte 4 5 Y res for K plane 0x012C 300 or 0x0258 600 Byte 6 7 K plane intensity levels 0x02 1 bit plane or 0x04 2 bits plane Byte 8 9 X res for C plane 0x012C 300 or 0x0258 600 Byte 10 11 Y res for C plane 0x012C 300 or 0x0258 600 Byte 12 13 C plane intens
371. ssword on a device not just a single file omit the filename LRWLOCK with DEFAULT specified locks a device for reading and writing LWLOCK with DEFAULT specified locks a device for writing only Syntax QPJL DEFAULT LRESOURCE device LRWLOCK password CR LF QPJL DEFAULT LRESOURCE device LWLOCK password CR lt LF gt Unlocking a Protected File or Device Use the LDECLARE command to specify a password so a protected file or device may be accessed or unlocked The LDECLARE command is only allowed within a JOB EOJ combination LRWLOCK with LDECLARE specified unlocks a file or device for reading and writing LWLOCK with LDECLARE specified unlocks a file or device for writing only The file or device must be re locked using the LDELETEPASSWORD command after the job is completed The file or device is not automatically re locked with the EOJ command Syntax 1 LDECLARE LRESOURCE device filename filetype LRWLOCK password CR lt LF gt P L LDECLARE LRESOURCE device filename filetype LWLOCK password lt CR gt lt LF gt LRESOURCE device filename filetype Values for device filename filetype are device flash 1 disk ordisk1 case insensitive filename A unique identifier for a file such as the macro ID for a PCL macro the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set the font ID for a PCL font or the actual file name for data Type 1 fonts and demo files as sh
372. supported 0 Offset Pages is disabled 1 Offset Pages is disabled 2 Offset Pages is set to Between Jobs 3 Offset Pages is set to Between Copies Offset refers to stacking entire print jobs or copies of the same print job in two separate groups in an output bin PostScript Table 4 8 Page Device Parameters Continued Key Definition ManualFeed boolean Indicates if the current or active source is a manual source The following values are supported True Manual feed False Automatic feed If ManualFeed is set to True and a change is made to PageSize MediaWeight MediaColor or MediaType parameters no matching occurs It is assumed that the correct page is fed Note ManualFeed is initialized at the start of each print job according to the default paper source set by the operator panel menus or through PJL If the default paper source is a manual source ManualFeed is set to True If the default paper source is not a manual paper source ManualFeed is set to False ManualFeedTimeout integer Indicates the amount of time that the printer waits for you to manually load a sheet of paper 0 infinite wait or no timeout If the timeout expires a timeout error is generated This is initialized at the start of each PostScript emulation job to the value of the Feed Timeout menu item value MediaColor string name Specifies the color of the current media or null MediaPosition integer Specifies
373. t LDEFRAG Command Use this command to recover storage space on a flash device Syntax QPJL LDEFRAG DEVICE flashdevice lt CR gt lt LF gt File and Device Protection Commands The following information applies to password protection You can set both read write and write passwords for a resource If both passwords are set the read write password has precedence over the write password f you attempt password protect a non existing resource the PJL interpreter will return a warning CODE 25001 faresource has already been password protected the resource must be unlocked before you can specify a different password for that resource Several restrictions with passwords apply to flash due to the nature of the technology You can create change passwords for the whole flash multiple times but each change uses up free space in the flash that can only be recovered by reformatting the whole flash You can create passwords for individual resources on the flash only once You can also delete this password once If this is done you must recreate the resource before using the password feature again Protecting a File or Device Use the DEFAULT command to set a password on the entire flash or disk or on an individual macro or font in flash Password Protection for a File LRWLOCK with DEFAULT specified locks a file or device for reading and writing LWLOCK with DEFAULT specified locks a file or d
374. t a separator sheet at device deactivation 2 Insert a separator sheet at the end of the print job 3 Inserta separator sheet at the end of each set in a multicopy job If Collate is set to True a set consists of one copy of each page of the document For example if a print job is five pages long a set is one copy of pages one to five If Collate is set to False a set is all the copies of a single page of the job For example if a print job is three copies of a five page job a set is three copies of the first page 4 Insert a separator sheet after each showpage or copypage PostScript Table 4 8 Page Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition SlipSheetDetails dictionary Specifies the following two unique separator sheet parameters SlipSheetSource and Type SlipSheetSource is an integer type parameter which identifies the source used for separator sheets Supported values are Null Use current source default Tray 1 Tray 2 Envelope Feeder Tray 3 Multipurpose feeder Tray 4 Tray 5 The key is found in the DeviceRenderingInfo dictionary within pagedevice It can be altered using a setpagedevice operator SlipSheetDetails lt lt Type 96 ISlipSheetSource n gt gt setpagedevice Type is constant value To find the value of Type for your printer see Table C 2 on page C 4 Staple integer Specifies whether to staple the current print job Supported values
375. t materials and and 11x17 inch size print materials for each other when one size is not installed Note For size substitution to occur the substituted print material and the requested print material must be of the same paper type The following values are supported Off No size substitution is performed A4 Letter If A4 is requested but not installed and Letter is installed Letter is substituted for A4 Or if Letter is requested but not installed and A4 is installed A4 is substituted for Letter A3 11x17 If A3 is requested but not installed and 11x17 is installed 11x17 is substituted for A3 Or if 11x17 is requested but not installed and A3 is installed A3 is substituted for 11x17 All Both size substitutions are permitted Note When the size substitution occurs the page is scaled to the size of the requested print material The DefaultPoliciesPageSize value is used as the effective policy when The SubstituteSize parameter is not set to Off and a size substitution cannot be performed The PageSize parameter in the Policies dictionary is set to 23 Notes f SubstituteSize is set to Off the effective policy is the value of PageSize f SubstituteSize is not set to Off and a size substitution is possible the effective policy is 3 PostScript Table 4 8 Page Device Parameters Continued Key Type Definition DeviceRenderingInfo dictionary is a constant value To f
376. tScript emulation sequence Tumble boolean setpagedevice Errors stackunderflow typecheck PostScript setuserdiskpercent integer setuserdiskpercent removes an integer from the stack and discards it Errors stackunderflow rangecheck invalidaccess typecheck softwareiomode softwareiomode 0 supports compatibility with the IBM LaserPrinters 4019 4029 and 4039 It is parsed and returns a 0 zero Binary Mode Off on the stack Software IO mode defines the data stream you are using Errors stackoverflow stackunderflow tumble tumble boolean returns the current value of the Tumble page device parameter true the back side of the duplexed page prints upside down in relation to the front side short edge binding false the back side of the duplexed page prints in the same orientation as the front side long edge binding default Note No error is generated if a duplex unit is not installed This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence currentpagedevice Tumble get Errors stackunderflow stackoverflow 4 47 PostScript userdiskpercent userdiskpercent 0 returns a 0 zero on the stack Errors stackoverflow invalidaccess waittimeout waittimeout integer queries the current value for the WaitTimeout user parameter An integer is returned on the stack 0 disabled 15 65355 seconds This operator is equivalent to execu
377. tech On H 6 7 Rewriting the Flash Content 6 8 Accessing Files with PostScript 2 2 6 9 File Naming 10444000 6 9 Device Search I 6 12 Performance c 6 13 Job Buffering RE HT 6 13 a use nk nri 6 14 Enabling Job BUMGHINO EE a 6 14 Disabling JOD Buffering 6 15 Recovering from a Power 055 6 15 Printer Specifications 7 1 Airflow 7 1 Noise EMISSION Levels 7 1 Electrical Specifications E 7 2 xti dizice ti 10 2 err T 7 2 Physical SPS CMC AMONG ucc cm metu 7 3 SQ 7 3 Clearance Requirements 7 3 Environmental ss 7 4 Altitude Specifications 7 4 TOC 4 Contents Atmospheric 7 4 incluir E 8 1
378. teger that specifies the current value of the PQET menu item Supported values are 0 PQET is Off 1104 POET is On default is 1 Type is a constant value To find the value of Type for your printer see PostRenderingEnhanceDetails on page C 7 PowerSave integer A value of 1 120 or 1 240 model specific indicates the number of minutes that elapses after the last page prints and before the Power Saver feature is invoked A value of 0 zero indicates the Power Saver feature is turned Off on some printer models Note Some printer models released in the year 2000 or later designated as Energy Star printers cannot have Power Saver disabled This value is initialized at the start of each PostScript emulation job to the value of the Power Saver menu item Note This parameter can only be modified within a system administration job ProcessColorModel name or Specifies the color model to use for rendering process colors in the printer string Supported values are DeviceGray DeviceRGB DeviceCMYK DeviceCMY Punch integer Requests holes to be punched in the output page The format for setting the Punch key is lt lt Punch n gt gt setpagedevice where nis one of the following values 0 Do not punch holes in the output page 3 Punch holes in the output page SlipSheet integer Specifies where blank separator sheets should be inserted in the output Supported values are 0 Do not insert separator sheets 1 Inser
379. tells the printer that the output resulting from the current job is being sent to the fax processing device instead of to the printer The current job is printed and is not sent to the fax processing device if one of the following occurs The printer is not configured for fax send capability The command is received with a command that selects an interpreter that does not support formatting functionality for sending faxes Syntax GPJL LFAX PHONENUMBERz number STATI ONI Dz station name CR LF PHONENUMBERz number The PHONENUMBER parameter is a text string up to 60 characters long If an unsupported character is supplied in the PHONENUMBER parameter the entire LFAX PHONENUMBER command is ignored Table 3 21 LFAX PHONENUMBER number Values Character Description 0 9 DTMF digits 0 to 9 DTMF character DTMF character A D DTMF characters A C and D Flash W Wait for dial tone Wait for silence amp Wait for credit card tone comma Pause Toggles between tone and pulse modes DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency is the system used by touch tone telephones which assigns a specific frequency or tone to each key so it can easily be identified by a microprocessor STATI ONI D station name The STATI ONI D parameter specifies a station name that is sent to the receiving fax machine to indicate the origin of an incoming fax The station name
380. tend currentfilenameextend boolean returns a boolean on the stack to indicate whether the extension should be automatically added to any filename The boolean value is either true adds the extension false does not add the extension See Filename Extensions on page 6 10 Error stackoverflow currentmanualduplexmode integer currentmanual dupl exmode queries the current value of the manual duplex mode An integer is returned on the stack 0 current job manual duplex mode is no manual duplex 1 current job manual duplex mode is printing first sides of job 2 current job manual duplex mode is printing second sides of job Error stackoverflow PostScript defaulttimeouts defaulttimeouts job manualfeed wait queries the user default settings of all timeouts Three integers are returned on the stack JobTimeout system parameter 0 disabled default 15 65535 seconds ManualFeedTimeout page device parameter 0 disabled 1 65535 seconds default is device dependent To find the default for your printer see Table C 2 on page C 4 WaitTimeout system parameter 0 disabled 15 65535 seconds default is 40 seconds Error stackoverflow deletefile filename deletefile deletes the specified file from the disk This operator is in systemdict Errors invalidfileaccess ioerror stackunderflow typecheck undefinedfilename Note An undefinedfilename error occurs if the file does not exist PostScript
381. tervention Required 3 77 4241wy x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 77 4242wy x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 77 4243w x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 77 4244wy x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 77 4245w x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 77 4246w x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 77 4247wy x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 77 4248w x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 77 4249w x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 77 4250w Intervention Required 3 77 4250x Intervention Required 3 77 4251wy w indicates this message includes a letter indicating a door or cover The door or cover needs to be opened X represents the number of jammed pages in the printer y represents the tray number Z represents the bin number PJL Support Table B 13 PJL Messages for Paper Jams Continued y Supported Printer Model X Not Supported es Page numbers reference message descriptions s P So Status Code Intervention Required 3 77 4251x x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 77 4252w x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 78 4253w Intervention Required 3 78 4254wy x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 78 4255 x Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 78 4256w Paper Jam Intervention Required 3 78 4257w Paper Jam Interve
382. tes protocol 8 12 file flash memory or disk close 3 89 delete 3 92 format device 3 92 open 3 89 read 3 90 rename 3 92 run 3 91 write 3 91 filenames file types 6 6 filename parameter PJL 3 88 macros font and symbol set ID 6 5 PostScript emulation conventions 6 9 searching 6 12 fit to page printing 2 6 2 7 flash memory description 6 1 directory of contents 6 4 download target PJL 3 30 password protection 6 7 performance 6 13 Resource Data Collection mode 6 2 retrieval speed 6 13 rewriting contents 6 8 storing fonts macros and symbol sets 6 2 viewing the contents 6 3 fonts PCL emulation X 2 Lexmark X422 2 7 printing directory list for flash or disk 3 83 6 3 saving on flash memory or disk 6 3 setting password protection 3 93 formatting flash or disk PJL 3 92 G GL 2 commands character group 2 58 configuration group 2 56 line and fill attributes group 2 59 polygon group 2 57 vector group 2 57 H hard disk See disk hardware specifications 7 1 8 1 Honor DSR setting 8 24 information messages status messages PJL 3 61 interface parallel 8 7 selecting 8 6 serial 8 18 SmartSwitch 5 2 internal network adapter See internal print server internal print server MarkNet S 8 28 J job buffering 6 13 creating a partition 6 14 disabling 6 15 enabling 6 14 recovering from a power loss 6 15 L language switching PCL emulation MarkVision Professional 2 1 operator panel 2 1 software
383. that is stored on flash memory with a Read Write password This password ensures that only those authorized can use the signature All other files fonts letterhead macros can be unprotected for general use Passwords are set declared retracted and deleted using the PJL commands or the MarkVision Professional utility See Protecting a File or Device on page 3 93 Rewriting the Flash Content Be aware that once a bit on the flash memory is turned from 1 binary 1 to O binary 0 it cannot be changed back to binary 1 without a complete flash memory format As PostScript emulation file operators write data to flash memory the printer microcode software verifies that none of the bits being set to binary 1 is binary O If any attempt is made to change a O0 bit back to 1 a PostScript emulation ioerror occurs When device is formatted all locations are set to binary 1 This is also the reason descriptions and passwords can be set only once for files on flash memory Accessing Files with PostScript Emulation File Naming Conventions For any PostScript emulation operator that requires a filename parameter the filename can be one of the following device filename Specifically references a file on a particular device If the filename does not exist on device no other device is accessed for a duplicate filename filename Does not specifically reference a device The following action occurs Forthe PostScript emula
384. the ManualFeed page device parameter is true when showpage or copypage is executed the page is fed manually If both have a value of f al se when showpage or copypage is executed the page is fed from an automatic source These two values are independent of each other Note If manualfeed is redefined between printing the front and back page of a duplexed page the information for the front and back pages is printed on the same page Error stackoverflow papertray papertray integer queries the paper tray that is currently selected An i nteger is returned on the stack indicating which paper tray is currently in use Valid i ntegers are Tray 1 Tray 2 Multipurpose Feeder or Envelope Feeder Manual Paper Manual Envelope Tray 3 Multipurpose Feeder Tray 4 Tray 5 o UJ Lr Error stackoverflow PostScript setpapertray integer setpapertray changes the active paper source for the next page through the end of job by setting the PageSize entry in the page device to the size loaded in the selected source and by setting MediaPosition to the selected source This operator executes a setpagedevice The PageSize Policy page device parameter is not altered by this operator Use the following i nt egers to set the paper tray Tray 1 Tray 2 Multipurpose Feeder or Envelope Feeder Manual Paper Manual Envelope Tray 3 Multipurpose Feeder Tray 4 Tray 5 o
385. the current page count This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence currentsystemparams PageCount get Error stackoverflow PostScript pagesprinted pagesprinted queries the number of pages of the current job submitted by the PostScript interpreter to the printer Error stackoverflow papertray See page 4 7 printername string printername substring returns the value of the PrinterName system parameter that is defined by the setprintername operator The value of the string defines the printer name A maximum of 32 characters are returned on the stack This operator is equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence currentsystemparams PrinterName get Errors rangecheck stackunderflow typecheck product product string queries the name of the product that is defined in statusdict A string is returned on the stack indicating the name of the product The product string in systemdict cannot be changed To change this product string in statusdict product string def Error stackoverflow PostScript PS2fonts PS2fonts redefines the following PostScript resident fonts to match the character designs and metrics defined in PostScript Level 2 The font names in parentheses are the equivalent PostScript 3 font names for the associated PostScript Level 2 names Antique Olive Antique Olive Roman Antique Olive Bold Antiqu
386. the font sample pages are the standard PCL emulation fonts The next 39 fonts R47 to R85 are called Type 1 fonts and were originally defined for PostScript emulation but now also work in the PCL emulation The final five fonts R86 to R90 are additional specialty PCL fonts For a list of the 47 standard PCL emulation fonts see Table 2 2 on page 2 9 For a list of the 39 Type 1 fonts see Table 2 3 on page 2 11 For list of the five additional specialty PCL fonts see Table 2 7 on page 2 24 These tables list both the forward and backward compatibility font selection commands For more information on forward and backward compatibility see page 2 9 For more information on selecting symbol sets see page 2 20 For compatibility purposes you can disable Type 1 fonts with the Printer Job Language PJL LTYPE1FONTS command The factory default for these fonts is Enabled See LTYPE1FONTS on page 3 47 for more information You can also select fonts using PJL commands The selection parameter is the number portion from the font identifier shown on the font sample pages such as 0 or 76 from font identifiers RO or R76 Use the PJL values shown in the tables beginning on page 2 9 to select a symbol set If a symbol set does not have a PJL value use the symbol set ID to select the symbol set A font selection can be either temporary or set as the default Use the following PJL commands to select fonts FONTSOURCE FONTNUMBER PITCH PTSIZE SYMSET SE
387. ting the following PostScript emulation sequence currentuserparams WaitTimeout get Error stackoverflow 4 48 PostScript Page Device Parameters In addition to the page device parameters described in Section 4 11 of the PostScript Language Reference Manual Third Edition by Adobe Systems Inc the following page device parameters are used by setpagedevice and currentpagedevice Certain parameters such as Policies Priority and ManualFeed are listed here since more information about the parameters is given in Table 4 8 than in the PostScript Language Reference Manual Third Edition by Adobe Systems Inc To determine which parameters and default values your printer supports see Table C 2 on page C 4 Table 4 8 Page Device Parameters Key Type Definition BeginPage procedure Executes at the beginning of each page and returns an integer which indicates how many times showpage has been invoked Collate boolean Indicates if the printer is set to collate multi copy print jobs If a print job consists of three pages and two copies are requested then the collated output is 1 2 3 1 2 3 The non collated output is 1 1 2 2 3 3 DeferredMediaSelection boolean Determines if the printer uses the printer s own internal algorithms or Adobe PostScript algorithms to select print media The following values are supported True Uses the printer s algorithms False Uses Adobe PostScript algorithms default DeviceRend
388. tinued Command Parameter RA X Y Command Name Fill Rectangle Absolute RR X Y Fill Rectangle Relative WG radius start angle sweep angle chord angle Fill Wedge Table 2 30 Character Group Command Parameter AD kind value Command Name Define Alternate Font CF mode pen Character Fill CP spaces lines Character Plot DI run rise Absolute Direction DR run rise Relative Direction Define Label Terminator DT label_terminator mode DV path line Define Variable Text Path ES width height Extra Space Fl font_ID Primary Font FN font_ID Secondary Font LB char char label terminator Label LM mode row number Label Mode LO position Label Origin LO 21 Uses PCL Label Origin SA Select Alternate Font SB mode Scalable or Bitmapped Fonts SD kind value Define Standard Font SI width height Absolute Character Size SL tangent Character Slant SR width height Relative Character Size SS Select Standard Font TD mode Transparent Data Table 2 31 Line and Fill Attributes Group Command Parameter Command Name AC X Y Anchor Corner CR red black ref red white STEEN black ref JEEN white ref Color Range blue black ref blue white ref FT fil
389. tion Required 3 66 32002 62 Disk Full x Disk Full Intervention required 3 66 32015 Disk Corrupted Reformat x Disk Corrupted Reformat Intervention Required 3 66 32030 58 Too Many Flash Options x Too Many Flash Options Installed Intervention Required 3 66 32052 53 Unformatted Flash V Unformatted Flash Intervention Required 3 66 32052 63 Unformatted Disk x Unformatted Disk Intervention Required 3 66 32052 64 Unsupported Disk x Unsupported Disk Format Format Intervention Required 3 66 32056 51 Defective Flash Defective Flash Intervention Required 3 66 32056 61 Defective Disk x Defective Disk Intervention Required 3 66 35075 80 Scheduled Maintenance x Scheduled Maintenance Intervention Required 3 66 35075 81 Scheduled Maintenance x Scheduled Maintenance Intervention Required 3 66 40038 80 Fuser Maintenance x Fuser Maintenance Intervention Required 3 66 40038 80 Fuser Life Warning x Fuser Life Warning Intervention Required 3 66 40038 80 Belt Life Warning x Belt Life Warning Intervention Required 3 66 40038 80 Fuser Belt Life Warning x Fuser Belt Life Warning Intervention Required 3 66 40038 80 Fuser Exhausted x PJL Support Table B 10 PJL Messages for Auto Continuable Conditions Continued y Supported Printer Model X Not Supported Page numbers reference message descriptions Status Message Code Return String Intervention Required 3 66 40038 80 Belt Exhausted x Belt Exhaust
390. tion operator deletefile only the first device in the search order is checked for filename For all other PostScript emulation operators and all other combinations of search order and available devices each installed device is checked in the search order for the existence of filename The operator acts upon the first filename that it finds Device Names The term device refers to flash memory disk or ROM For PostScript emulation some of the operators require or return device names These operators are deletefile filenameforall devforall devdismount devmount devformat devstatus The device always begins and optionally ends with a 96 character The following are the valid device names r o m Wf lash F 1 ash1 di sk disk1 The same filename can exist on more than one device The device prefix determines the actual file to use For example r om myfi le and flash myfile designate respectively a file called e both on the ROM and on flash memory The device name distinguishes which file to use Filenames Device names are case sensitive They must appear exactly as shown Each device except the disk has one synonym For example the flash memory can be referred to as f lash or flash1 The name with the 1 is a unique identifier This system allows for future expansion of multiple flash memory or disk devices The disk device name provides for multiple physical units and multiple logical units Thus
391. top Bits This bit is always set to zero Data Style 01 7 data bits 11 8 data bits Flow Control 000 XON XOFF 001 DTR DSR 101 DTR 110 XON XOFF DTR 111 XON XOFF DTR DSR Parity 00 ignore 01 odd 10 even 11 none Errors rangecheck stackoverflow stackunderflow typecheck PostScript sccinteractive channel sccinteractive baud options provided for parsing compatibility purposes A value of 0 is returned Errors invalidaccess rangecheck stackoverflow stackunderflow typecheck setcover page boolean setcoverpage specifies a cover page for a fax job The default value is f al se The bool ean values indicate true the current page that is processing is moved to the first page of the current fax job false the current page that is processing is unaffected Errors stackunderflow typecheck setdefaulttimeouts job manualfeed wait setdefaultti meouts changes the values for all timeouts Valid values are JobTimeout system parameter 0 disabled 15 65355 seconds ManualFeedTimeout page device parameter 0 disabled 1 65355 seconds WaitTimeout system parameter 0 disabled 15 65355 seconds Errors invalidaccess rangecheck stackunderflow typecheck 4 37 PostScript setdoidlefonts boolean setdoidlefonts is parsed and discarded A boolean value is required Errors stackunderflow typecheck setdojamrecovery boolean setdojamrecovery changes the user default setti
392. tor Intervention Paper Jams When it Paper Jam message appears on the printer operator panel display or through MarkVision Professional a message is returned to the host computer indicating the type and location for the prompt Attendance operator intervention messages are returned in this form CODE status code DISPLAY display string in double quotes ONLINE online status 3 76 To determine which messages your printer supports see Table B 13 on page B 26 Table 3 19 PJL Messages for Paper Jams Printer State Status Code Display String Online Status Intervention required 4200x 200 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4201x 201 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4202x 202 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4203x 203 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4204x 204 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4205x 205 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4206x 206 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4207x 207 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4208x 208 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4209x 209 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4210x 210 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4211x 211 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4220x 220 Paper Jam FALSE paper jam Intervention required 4221x 221 Paper Jam FA
393. ts Valid to 2 decimal places Note Point size is not needed for monospaced fonts For fonts larger than 12 points it may be necessary to change the line spacing ESC s S primary ESC s S secondary Upright Default Italic Condensed Condensed Italic Compressed Expanded Outline 64 Inline 128 Shadowed 160 Outline Shadowed Select Style Identifies the physical traits of a character and the composition of the font symbols Note You can only use this command to select fonts currently available in the printer It cannot alter the appearance of the available fonts Table 2 15 Font Selection Continued Command Parameters Function Result ESC s T secondary Typeface identifier 0 65535 Note For a list of typeface numbers see Table 2 2 on page 2 9 and Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark C760 and C762 on page 2 7 ESC s B primary Select Stroke Weight ESC s B secondary Selects a font with a particular thickness 7 Ultra Thin Note This command will not alter the stroke weight of an available font 6 Extra Thin 5 Thin 4 Extra Light 3 Light 2 Light 1 Semi Light 0 Medium Default 1 Semi Bold 2 Demi Bold 3 Bold 4 Extra Bold 5 Black 6 Extra Black 7 Ultra Black ESC s T primary Select Typeface Selects the best fit font design To obtain the typeface values for downloaded fonts print the font list f
394. tting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 95 98 Me on page 8 2 Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows NT 4 0 on page 8 3 Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 2000 on page 8 4 Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows XP on page 8 5 RS 232C Port Compatibility The RS 232C port on the RS 232C Serial Interface Card or the RS 232C Serial Parallel 1284 C Interface Card is compatible with the Plug and Play External COM Device Draft Specification Rev 0 86 Devices that are compatible with Plug and Play COM can Detect attachment of serial devices Identify the device Locate a driver for the device Detect detachment of serial devices Network Support Installing an internal print server enables you to connect your printer to a local area network LAN The print server supports these network interfaces The Token Ring print server conforms to IEEE 802 5 using either IBM Cabling System STP or unshielded twisted pair cable which meets the IBM Cabling System Type 3 Media Specification UTP The Ethernet Combined 10BaseT and 10Base2 print server conforms to IEEE 802 3 with a Category 3 4 or 5 unshielded twisted pair UTP cable for the 10BaseT and conforms to IEEE 802 3 with an RG58 coaxial cable for the 10Base2 Interfaces The Ethernet 10 100BaseTX print server conforms to the IEEE 802 3 standard for 10BaseT networks using Category 3 4 or 5 unshielded twisted
395. ttings to the factory values It retains permanent downloaded fonts and macros but deletes temporary downloaded fonts and macros The link buffer remains intact Variable default paper size settings become the active paper formatting size f paper is loaded in a tray with auto size sensing the printer resets the active default paper formatting size to the size of the paper in the tray NIT is not honored when Hex Print is active INIT causes the parallel interface to go busy The printer processes INIT when the parallel interface becomes active and all preceding characters have been processed Computer to Printer Communications This section describes how the parallel interface receives data from the computer Interfaces Standard Parallel Connector The cabling in the following illustration supports Standard and Fastbytes protocols and IEEE 1284 Nibble Byte and ECP protocols Printer Computer Side Side IEEE 1284 B Roe E IEEE 1284 A 36 Pin 25 Pin 2 D Shell D Shell o Connector Connector Male Male iy 25 13 The following illustration shows the pin assignments for connecting the 25 pin connector to the 36 pin connector The symbol indicates an active low signal 4 STROBE DATA 0 2 2 1 3 gt 33 2 4 4 3 5 5 4 Printer
396. turn a status code To determine whether your printer supports returning service messages see Table B 14 Service Errors on page B 31 Device Attendance Commands To determine which commands your printer supports see Table B 15 Device Attendance Messages on page B 32 RDYMSG Command The RDYMSG command is used to specify a message that appears on the first line of the printer operator panel display or through MarkVision Professional whenever the printer is ONLINE in the Ready or Busy state This message displays instead of the Ready or Busy message Syntax QPJL RDYMSG DISPLAY message CR lt LF gt OPMSG Command When an OPMSG command is received the message appears and is allotted both lines of the display The printer is taken OFFLINE This message along with the STMSG command is the lowest priority so if another intervention occurs it displays instead Note See your printer documentation for information about how to return your printer to the ONLINE state Once in the ONLINE state the Ready Busy or Waiting message appears on the printer operator panel display or through MarkVision Professional A printer reset is not available from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional while OPMSG displays Syntax PJL OPMSG DISPLAY message CR LF STMSG Command When a STMSG 15 received the message appears and is allotted both lines of the disp
397. tus variabl e lt CR gt lt LF gt one or more lines of printable characters spaces or tabs CR LF FF To determine which variables your printer supports see Table B 9 USTATUS Unsolicited Status Variables on page B 14 See Status Message Format on page 3 61 for additional information about the messages returned by the INFO STATUS USTATUS DEVICE and USTATUS TIMED commands ustatus variable value The following values are supported for the ustatus vari abl e value parameter Table 3 11 USTATUS Unsolicited Status Variable Values Usiatus Variable Value Description DEVICE ON Enables unsolicited status for device changes VERBOSE Enables unsolicited status for all device changes Also enables warnings from the PJL parser OFF Disables unsolicited status for device changes JOB ON Enables unsolicited status for job changes The printer sends a status message when a job begins and ends OFF Disables unsolicited status for job changes PAGE ON Enables unsolicited status for page changes The printer sends a status message when a printed sheet reaches the standard output bin OFF Disables unsolicited status for page changes TIMED 5 to 300 in seconds Enables timed unsolicited status The printer automatically sends status at a specified time interval 0 Disables timed unsolicited status USTATUSOFF Command This command turns off unsolicited status Unsolicited status may also
398. until the entire image has been sent The following example prints a Group 4 image file that is 256 bits wide and 9 645 bytes long ESC 1002 M Set Raster Compression to Group 4 ESC r 2565 Define width of image in input bits ESCK f Start Raster Graphics at current position ESCK b9 645 W 9 645 bytes of a Group 4 image Group 4 image data ESCK f B End Raster Graphics All lines of data must be the same length If they are not zeroes 0 must be added to attain the same length Note Ifthe uncompressed image extends beyond the logical page dimensions or beyond the raster width specified in the Raster Width command 5 the image is clipped at print time Additional Compression Modes When the compression mode is 1008 Lexmark Adaptive TIFF word and double word can be printed using compression scan modes 254 and 255 respectively This compression method sends a raster image as a block of raster data Macros When creating a macro first assign it an ID number If this number is identical to an existing macro ID in RAM the old macro is deleted when you specify the Macro Control Start Definition Next start the macro definition send the contents of the macro and stop the macro definition Note Although a macro may be called or executed from within another macro nesting a macro cannot be defined within another macro definition Each macro must be defined separately Example This exa
399. user data any file written with PostScript operators type1 PostScript font replaces the earlier t1 extension demo demo used for demonstration printouts or forms p5scalable PCL scalable font p5bitmap PCL bitmapped font p5macro PCL macro replaces the earlier Mac5 extension p5symset PCL symbol set Usually the PostScript file operators can only read write files with the extension data Use the setfilenameextend operator to read write other file types including demo Any other file type appears in the list as Unknown File Type The description column then contains the full filename with the file type extension Size The size listed for each resource includes the size of the file header Prot Indicates if the file is password protected R W read write protection W write protection If this field is blank then this resource in flash memory or disk is not password protected For more information on file protection see File and Device Protection Commands on page 3 93 and Password Protection on page 6 7 Description The description field for fonts comes from the font header The description field for macros or symbol sets is blank unless the description field in the file header is set by the PJL LRESOURCE command See Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables on page 3 52 The description for macros or symbol sets can be set only once for files stored in flash memory The description can be s
400. ve method 2 39 page orientation 2 37 page size 2 36 paper source 2 36 print direction 2 37 right margin 2 37 set page length 2 39 set universal custom name 2 37 set universal feed direction 2 37 set universal height 2 36 set universal width 2 36 skip perforation 2 38 text length 2 38 text scale mode 2 39 top margin 2 37 vertical motion index 2 38 picture frame enter GL 2 language 2 55 enter PCL emulation 2 55 GL 2 plot horizontal size 2 55 GL 2 plot vertical size 2 55 picture frame horizontal size 2 55 picture frame vertical size 2 55 set picture frame anchor point 2 55 print model area fill ID 2 46 logical operation 2 46 pattern control 2 47 pattern transparency mode 2 46 pixel placement 2 46 select current pattern 2 46 set pattern reference point 2 47 source transparency mode 2 46 user defined pattern 2 47 raster graphics destination raster height 2 51 destination raster width 2 50 end raster graphics version B 2 50 end raster graphics version C 2 50 raster graphics presentation 2 49 raster resolution 2 49 set raster compression mode 2 50 set raster configuration 2 51 source raster height 2 49 source raster width 2 49 start raster graphics 2 49 transfer raster data by plane 2 49 transfer raster data by row block 2 50 Y offset 2 49 X 5 rectangular area fill graphics area fill ID 2 48 fill rectangular area 2 48 horizontal rectangle size 2 47 vertical rectangle size decipoints 2 47 vertical rectangle siz
401. vention Required 3 71 40049 STMSG message STMSG Intervention Required 3 71 40050 Replace Fuser Replace Fuser Intervention Required 3 71 40050 Replace Transfer Kit Replace Transfer Kit Intervention Required 3 71 40087 59 Incompatible Bin x Incompatible Bin x Intervention Required 3 71 40088 59 Incompatible Duplex Incompatible Duplex Intervention Required 3 71 40089 59 Incompatible Tray x Incompatible Tray x Intervention Required 3 71 40090 59 Incompatible Envelope Incompatible Envelope Feeder Feeder Intervention Required 3 71 40095 Check Duplex Connection Check Duplex Connection Intervention Required 3 72 40095 Install Duplex or Cancel Job Install Duplex or Cancel Job Intervention Required 3 72 40096 Close Duplex Door Duplex Cover Open Intervention Required 3 72 40096 Insert Duplex Option Insert Duplex Option Intervention Required 3 72 40101 Load Staples Load Staples 1 XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK where CMYK denotes Cyan Magenta Yellow and Black cartridges respectively PJL Support Table B 12 PJL Messages for Paper Handling Supported X Not Supported Page numbers reference message descriptions Message Status Code Return String N 7 Lr Load Manual Request X represents an input source code For more information see Table 3 16 Tray Codes on pa
402. w 3 70 88 Toner Low 3 70 88 Yellow Toner Empty 3 70 88 Yellow Toner Low 3 70 89 Cartridge Empty 3 71 2xx Paper Jam 3 69 Cartridge Life Expired XXXX 3 67 Cartridge Life Warning XXXX 3 68 Change Cartridge Invalid Refill 3 67 Check Duplex Connection 3 71 Check Finisher Installation 3 69 Check Mailbox Installation 3 69 Check Tray source gt Connection 3 69 Close Cover 3 68 Close Cover c 3 68 Close Cover A 3 67 Close Deflector G 3 68 Close Door 3 67 Close Door d 3 68 Close Duplex Door 3 72 Close Finisher Door 3 68 Close Finisher Side Door 3 68 Close Finisher Top Cover 3 68 Close Front Door 3 68 Close Side Door 3 68 Close Top Covers 3 67 Close Tray x Top Cover 3 68 Cover Open 3 67 Incompatible Duplex 3 71 Incompatible Envelope Feeder 3 71 Incompatible Tray x 3 71 Insert Cartridge 3 67 Insert Duplex Option 3 72 Insert Hole Punch Box 3 67 Insert PC Cartridge 3 67 Insert Print Cartridge 3 69 Install Bin x or Cancel Job 3 69 Install Duplex or Cancel Job 3 72 Install Env Feed or Cancel Job 3 69 Install Tray x or Cancel Job 3 69 Load Staples 3 71 3 72 Open Cover 3 68 Open Rear Door 3 68 OPMSG message 3 71 paper handling 34 Incorrect Media 3 73 34 Wrong Paper Size in Tray x 3 73 34 Wrong Paper Size Manual Feed 3 73 Change source 3 73 Check source Paper Guide 3 73 Insert Duplex Pages amp Press Go 3 73 Insert Tray source gt 3 73 Load source 3 73 Load Manual
403. while Resource Save is set to Off In each case the resources must be downloaded again By storing resources on flash memory or disk the resources become permanent in the printer Storing Resources on Flash Memory or Disk Complete the following steps to download resources to flash memory or disk using the printer operator panel MarkVision Professional or a PJL command 1 Set the download target to flash memory or disk Resource Data Collection mode is enabled to the device selected 2 Download the resources to flash memory or disk using PCL emulation or PostScript emulation PCL emulation collects and stores the currently defined font macro or symbol set information in printer RAM memory These resources are written to flash memory or disk when Resource Data Collection is disabled see step 3 Stored resources are also copied to flash memory or disk when a printer language switch occurs PostScript emulation writes Type 1 fonts or other resources to flash memory or disk after successfully parsing a definefont operator 3 Set Download Target to RAM Resource Data Collection mode is disabled Viewing the Contents of Flash Memory and Disk There are three ways to view the contents of flash memory and disk Send the LPRINTDIRECTORY command see LPRINT Commands Information Pages on page 3 83 Select Print Directory from the printer operator panel menus Use the MarkVision Professional utility The d
404. witch 4 1 status and error messages 4 92 4 93 supplemental operators 4 13 appletalktype 4 13 buildtime 4 13 byteorder 4 13 checkpassword 4 14 currentfilenameextend 4 14 currentmanualduplexmode 4 14 defaulttimeouts 4 15 deletefile 4 15 devcontrol 4 16 devdismount 4 17 devforall 4 18 devformat 4 18 devmount 4 19 devstatus 4 19 diskonline 4 20 diskstatus 4 21 displayoperatormsg 4 21 doidlefonts 4 21 dojamrecovery 4 22 doprinterrors 4 22 doret 4 22 dostartpage 4 23 dosysstart 4 23 X 6 duplexer 4 23 duplexmode 4 24 enginesync 4 24 file 4 25 filenameforall 4 25 fileposition 4 25 firstside 4 26 fontnonzerowinding 4 26 hardwareiomode 4 26 idlefonts 4 26 ignoresize 4 27 initializedisk 4 27 jobname 4 27 jobsource 4 28 jobtimeout 4 29 manualfeed 4 29 manualfeedtimeout 4 30 newsheet 4 30 pagecount 4 30 pagesprinted 4 31 papertray 4 31 printername 4 31 product 4 31 PS2fonts 4 32 PS3fonts 4 32 quiet 4 32 ramsize 4 33 realformat 4 33 renamefile 4 33 resolution 4 34 revision 4 34 sccbatch 4 35 sccinteractive 4 36 setcoverpage 4 36 setdefaulttimeouts 4 36 setdoidlefonts 4 37 setdojamrecovery 4 37 setdoprinterrors 4 37 setdoret 4 38 setdostartpage 4 38 setdosysstart 4 39 setduplexmode 4 39 setenginesync 4 40 setethernetaddress 4 40 setfilenameextend 4 40 setfileposition 4 41 sethardwareiomode 4 41 setidlefonts 4 41 setignoresize 4 41 setjobtimeout 4 42 setmanualduplexmode 4 42 setpapertray 4 42 s
405. xamines the received data stream attempts to determine the type of data stream and automatically switches to the proper language The printer examines the active printer language and decides when an End of Job point occurs End of Job points are SIC command UEL command Print timeout Wait timeout PostScript timeout due to erasing the contents of an internal link Ctrl D in PostScript or tagged binary INIT Network Protocol Alliance Protocol job boundary CHAPTER 6 Flash Memory and Disk Flash memory and disk devices are used to store permanent fonts macros and symbol sets The disk device is also used to buffer print jobs collate large jobs and store job statistics Unlike RAM memory these devices retain the following information when the printer is powered off or when the printer switches languages PCL emulation permanent bitmapped and scalable fonts PCL emulation permanent macros PCL emulation symbol sets PostScript Type 1 fonts Files created using the PostScript emulation file operators Demonstration files Some printers have connectors that let you install optional flash memory or a disk device other printers may offer one or the other of these devices as a standard feature See your printer documentation for more information When first installed in the printer the flash memory or disk may be unformatted You must format the device before you download resources A message displays on the printer
406. y OPMSG FALSE OPMSG Intervention required 40049 Message specified by STMSG FALSE STMSG Intervention required 40050 Replace Fuser FALSE replace fuser Intervention required 40050 Replace Transfer Kit FALSE replace transfer kit Intervention required 40087 59 Incompatible Bin x FALSE incompatible bin x Intervention required 40088 59 Incompatible Duplex FALSE incompatible duplex Intervention required 40089 59 Incompatible Tray x FALSE incompatible tray x Intervention required 40090 59 Incompatible Envelope Feeder FALSE incompatible envelope feeder Intervention required 40095 Check Duplex Connection FALSE check duplex connection XXXX represents a subset of letters CMYK where CMYK denotes Cyan Magenta Yellow and Black cartridges respectively For this message the values for XXXX are returned to indicate which ink cartridges are defective 2 d represents a one letter designator for each door labeled on the printer 3 c represents a one letter designator for each cover labeled on the printer Note The Display String is returned in the current language A display string that is returned is truncated to the DISPLAY CHARACTER SIZE returned in INFO CONFIG 3 72 Table 3 14 PJL Message for Attendance Conditions Printer State Status Code Display String Online Status Intervention required 40095 Install Duplex or Cancel Job FALSE install duplex or cancel job Intervention required 40096
407. y as follows If Image Enhancement Technology is set to Off 1 is returned If Image Enhancement Technology is set to On 2 or 4 is returned depending on the Image Enhancement Technology Type setting If Image Enhancement Technology Type is set to On the numerical value of BITSPERPIXEL is returned If Image Enhancement Technology Type is set to Auto a value of 2 or 4 is returned depending on the amount of total memory installed 1 CLEARABLEWARNINGS Auto Continue from operator JOB ON ON READ only If Auto Continue is set to On JOB is returned panel non fatal warning messages If Auto Continue is set to Off ON is returned COPIES Number of copies 1 to 999 1 of each page Note If a value greater than 999 is specified by a SET or DEFAULT command the value is changed to 999 Table 3 3 Common Variables for Both Printer Languages Continued Variable Function Selections Factory Default CPLOCK Disables menus ON OFF OFF DEFAULT only ON disables the printer operator panel menus OFF enables menus DENSITY Print Darkness 1to5 2 3 4 Model specific 1 Lightest 2 Lighter 3 Normal 4 Darker 5 Darkest To determine the default value of your printer see Table B 1 Common Variables for Both Printer Languages on page B 1 DUPLEX Duplex ON OFF OFF ECONOMODE Toner Saver ON OFF OFF FORMATTERNUMBER Unique printer The value of the NVR
408. y it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you You can purchase additional copies of publications related to this product by calling 1 800 553 9727 In the United Kingdom and Eire call 44 0 8704 440 044 In other countries contact your point of purchase References in this publication to products programs or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates Any reference to a product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products programs or services except those expressly designated by the manufacturer are the user s responsibility Lexmark Lexmark with diamond design MarkNet MarkVision and Optra are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc registered in the United States and or other countries ColorGrade PerfectFinish and PictureGrade are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of other companies Albertus The Monotype Corporation plc ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation Antique Olive Monsieur Marcel OLIVE ITC Lubalin Graph International Typeface Corporation Apple Chancery Apple Computer Inc ITC Mona Lis
409. y to 0 Checks the active source to see if it matches the requested envelope size If the sizes match the envelope is fed from the active source Note The active source is the last source selected from the printer operator panel or data stream If the requested size and the size loaded in the active source do not match the sources are searched in the order defined by the Priority array in the InputAttributes dictionary in the pagedevice dictionary f the requested media size is not found by the previous search the following search order is used Envelope Feeder Multipurpose Feeder f the requested size and type are not available from any automatic source you are prompted to load the requested envelope size and type in the manual feed source fthe size is still not available a configurationerror is issued and the print job is flushed If manualfeed or ManualFeed is t rue the printer prompts you to load the requested size manually If no manual feed exists on the printer a rangecheck error message is generated The envelope tray the printer selects when it receives an envelopetray operator is listed in Table 4 5 These operators are equivalent to executing the following PostScript emulation sequence PageSize x y ImagingBBox null Policies lt lt PageSize 0 gt gt gt gt setpagedevice where x y are the PageSize in points PostScript Table 4 5 Envelopetray Operator Selectio
410. yntax QPJL LREADFILE DEVICE filedevice FILENAME fname START location LENGTH bytecount lt CR gt lt LF gt requested data from the file QGPJL END DATA lt CR gt lt LF gt lt FF gt Notes The file must be closed using the LCLOSEFILE command once all operations are complete The command is ignored if the file doesn t exist on the device or has not already been opened with LOPENFILE with an accesstype of RO RW or AP e Ifthe START locati on parameter is omitted location 0 beginning of the file is assumed e Ifa START location is provided but it is greater than the file size the response will contain no file data If the LENGTH parameter is omitted byt ecount is assumed to be equal to the entire file beginning at the START location If the LENGTH is greater than the file size on a LREADFILE command it is assumed to be the entire file beginning at the START location LWRITEFILE Command Use this command to write data to a file on a storage device Syntax QPJL LWRITEFILE DEVICE filedevice FILENAME fname START location LENGTH bytecount CR lt LF gt lt data gt P L END DATA lt CR gt lt LF gt Notes The file must be closed using the LCLOSEFILE command once all operations are complete The command is ignored if the file doesn t exist on the device The command is ignored if the file isn t already open with a write accesstype e f START locati on is omitte
411. your software program The printer is shipped with SmartSwitch enabled for both printer languages and all interfaces The printer examines all print jobs and switches dynamically between PostScript emulation and PCL emulation Using the Operator Panel or MarkVision Professional You may select PostScript emulation from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional To disable the automatic switching and have all input interpreted as PostScript language turn PCL SmartSwitch Off and set the printer language default to PostScript emulation See your printer documentation for information on changing menu settings Using Your Software Program PostScript To select PostScript emulation use the ENTER LANGUAGE command which is a Printer Job Language PJL command For more information see ENTER LANGUAGE Command on page 3 3 See Printer Job Language on page 3 1 for information about syntax and the use of PJL Warning When you change printer languages you may lose all previously downloaded fonts and macros unless Resource Save is set to On or the resources are stored in flash memory or on disk Table 4 1 Paper Sizes Supported 4 Supported X Not Supported Printer Paper Sizes Literal Name Size mm Size inches Size points letter 215 9 x 279 4 8 5 x 11 0 612 x 792 V legal 215 9 x 355 6 8 5 14 0 612 x 1008 v b5 182 0 x 257 0 7 17 x 10 1 51

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

ブリヂストンサイクル株式会社が輸入した自転車用幼児座席の リコール  Wind Generation Data Entry  説明書 - pb ピービー  Samsung S24D391HL Priručnik za korisnike  Coleman 9924 Series User's Manual    Buffalo 1.0TB DriveStation  実施設計書 平成25年度 小型動力ポンプ付積載車等購入 兵庫県 加東市  Sony XS-LE30 Product Specifications  K 047 IonTech Kullanma Klavuzu con  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file